What ET Believes
The U.S. Government has all but explicitly acknowledged that Earth is being visited by extraterrestrial beings. Since the likelihood is very high that extraterrestrials are here now on Earth, one should clearly strive to know as much as possible about them and what motivates them. What do they believe at their deepest roots? What do they seek for their development? Do they have a belief in some form of non-physical existence after death? And do they believe in some aspect of underlying Universality? This book summarizes what information is presently available about extraterrestrial viewpoints on spirituality and the non-physical.
This book is also available on AMAZON.
Dedication:
This book is dedicated to the people of Planet Earth. It is important for humans on Earth to have an appreciation of how extraterrestrials may view the true nature of reality from their larger perspective. We must come to realize that We Are All One.
Acknowledgements:
The author acknowledges his interactions with Judy Carroll in Australia, who provided valuable insights into the nature of Grey extraterrestrial concepts of the non-physical nature of reality. He is indebted to his wife, Blanche, his daughter, Michelle, and his son-in-law Adam for their familial support during the writing of this book.
Preface:
Why have I chosen to write a book on Extraterrestrial Spirituality? One might say that this subject seems quite like an off-the-wall topic. However, things have changed dramatically in recent times regarding the existence of extraterrestrials. The U.S. Government has all but explicitly acknowledged that the Earth is being visited by such beings. I have written five books on the subject of science and spirituality in the past, and this book seems to be a logical extension into the larger cosmos of my spiritual quest for understanding.
Since the likelihood is high that extraterrestrials are here now on Earth, one should clearly strive to know as much as possible about them and what motivates them. What do they believe at their deepest roots? What do they seek for their development? Do they have a belief in some form of non-physical existence after death? And do they believe in some aspect of underlying Universality?
In this book, I will summarize what information is presently available about extraterrestrial viewpoints on spirituality and the non-physical. I must note that the information on this topic is quite limited, and much of it cannot be fully verified in a scientifically satisfying manner. Yet it is all that we have to work with at the present time. If extraterrestrials choose to reveal more about themselves in the relatively near future, this may change. However, for now this is all we have.
Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth:
On June 25th 2021, the U.S. Department of Defense issued a truly remarkable report to the U.S. Congress that confirmed the existence of Unidentified Flying Objects (UFOs) that were being detected by military ships and airplanes. In this report, they refer to the UFOs as UAPs, or Unidentified Aerial Phenomena. This was the first time the U.S. Government has officially conceded that they were seeing craft in the sky that exhibited remarkable flight characteristics and which they could not identify. Some of these remarkable flight characteristics are: 1) no visible flight surfaces to provide lift against the force of gravity; 2) no obvious means of flight propulsion; 3) hypervelocity flight speeds; 4) instantaneous changes in flight directions; 5) visibility only in the infrared spectrum; 6) the ability to move from space-to air-to-underwater environments in a continuous path of motion. As of the date of the report, it said that there were 144 such craft observed by military personnel during the time period 2004-2021. The report stated that the U.S. government did not possess any secret, classified craft with the observed flight characteristics, and that it was unlikely that any other foreign governments did as well. But the report stopped short of declaring that the craft were of extraterrestrial origin.
From an informed perspective, it is abundantly clear that extraterrestrials from other places in the universe have been visiting Planet Earth for at least the past 75 years. In fact, the possibility exists that such beings have visited Earth for thousands of years in the past, if not millennia. It seems that such extraterrestrial contacts have been accelerating since the testing and use of nuclear bombs that first occurred in 1945.
What I will go through now are some of the most famous and well-documented cases of extraterrestrial events that have happened in the past 75 years. I will not be describing these cases in detail but rather in general, overview terms. Should the reader wish to learn more details, these are readily available on the Internet.
1947 Kenneth Arnold UFO Event:
The modern extraterrestrial history begins with the June 24, 1947 observation of unidentified aircraft by Kenneth Arnold. Arnold was flying his airplane near Mount Rainier in Washington State when he observed a group of nine shining Unidentified Flying Objects (UFOs) that appeared to be traveling at approximately 1200 miles per hour. Arnold also said that they seemed to move in a discontinuous manner, like thrown flat stones skipping over the water of a pond. The national press at the time coined the name for these craft as “flying saucers”, and thus flying saucers and UFOs entered the collective national lexicon.
1947 Roswell UFO Crash:
I first drove through the town of Roswell, New Mexico in the Spring of 1979. I had purchased a Volkswagen campmobile in 1978 and I, my wife, and our two-year old daughter were taking a trip down to Carlsbad Caverns. I remember driving past the park at the center of Roswell. In 1979, Roswell was still just another town in the State of New Mexico. My, how things have changed. Now, Roswell is the best-known location in New Mexico by people all over the world. How did this happen?
What really happened at Roswell did not become widely known until 1978. In that year, the UFO researcher Stanton Friedman interviewed an aged Jesse Marcel about what actually occurred outside Roswell in 1947. Marcel was getting up in years and wanted to reveal the truth about the event. So, the real story of Roswell had actually been hidden from the public for more than 30 years, most likely as a result of a government coverup that continues to the present day.
On the date of July 7, 1947 a local rancher by the name of William (Mac) Brazel discovered some strange debris on his ranch which was about 75 miles from Roswell. Brazel reported this discovery to the local sheriff, who subsequently reported it to Roswell Army Air Field personnel in Roswell. At the time, the Roswell Army Air Field was the only location in the world housing aircraft that were certified to carry atomic weapons. Roswell Field then assigned Major Jesse Marcel to investigate Brazel’s claim.
Marcel and Brazel went out to the crash site in a truck and found a large debris field. They loaded some of the debris into the truck and returned to Roswell. The next day, July 8th, the Roswell Air Field issued a public statement that they had recovered debris from a “flying disk” that had crashed in a violent storm the night before. This was released to the Roswell paper and the Roswell radio station, which immediately published it. Marcel took some of the debris back to his home and showed it to his wife and son. There was some metal-like foil that, when crumpled, immediately returned on its own to a flat condition. There was also a metal-like long strut that had hieroglyphic-type symbols written on it.
But on July 9th, the U.S. Army Air Corps stepped in and said that it was not a “flying disk” but rather an Army weather balloon that had crashed. They basically quelled the “flying disk” recovery story and quickly buried it. There is a famous photo of Major Jesse Marcel next to a piece of this supposed weather balloon wreckage.
The Army took Mac Brazel into its custody for a week on July 9th. After he came back into public view, he would not further discuss his experiences with the wreckage debris. I actually have some second-hand knowledge of this aspect. While I was working in Los Alamos, New Mexico, I used to watch the Albuquerque news channel. This channel had a fellow by the name of Frank Joyce on it who gave updates on the New Mexico fishing report, and I used to enjoy listening to him.
However, it turns out that Frank Joyce was a young employee of the Roswell radio station at the time of the Roswell incident. Joyce had direct contact with Mac Brazel before the Army took him into their custody, as well as when Brazel again appeared in public. Joyce asked Brazel after he was returned about the “little green men” and he said that Brazel told him “they weren’t green”. In addition, in mid-July, the radio station received a phone call from a very authoritative sounding person telling them to stop reporting about the Roswell incident, and if they did not do so, the station would be shut down. The Roswell radio station stopped their reporting completely.
It is said that the U.S. government put a very strict security clampdown on the entire Roswell incident under the justification of national security. The UFO debris was sent to Wright-Patterson Army Air Base in Dayton, Ohio. It is also said that there were dead extraterrestrial bodies, as well as one living extraterrestrial that were retrieved from the crash. The claim is that autopsies were performed on the dead extraterrestrials, while the live extraterrestrial was taken to Los Alamos and interred in a secret location at the Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory until 1952, when the extraterrestrial died.
It is said that as a result of the Roswell incident, US President Harry Truman formed a secret high-level working group called Majestic 12 to manage this interaction with extraterrestrials. The head of Majestic 12 was James Forrestal, the first US Secretary of Defense. Forrestal died under rather mysterious circumstances in 1949 by falling from the 16th floor of the Bethesda Naval Hospital in Washington DC. There are some people who say that he was murdered because he was about to divulge the extraterrestrial nature of the Roswell incident.
1952 UFO Overfly of Washington DC:
On the evening of Saturday July 19, 1952, the radar operator at Washington DC National Airport spotted seven unknown objects on his radar screen. Other radar operators in the airport control tower also had these objects on radar and also saw objects that appeared as bright lights visually, some of whom were slowly moving and then moving off at incredible speeds. Objects were also tracked on radar and seen by personnel at Andrews Air Force Base near Washington, as well as by a pilot of an aircraft at Washington National Airport that was sitting on the runway waiting to take off. The unknown objects were observed starting at 11:30 pm on July 19 and ending at 5:30 am on July 20.
Rather amazingly, these unknown objects again appeared over Washington DC the next weekend on July 26th and 27th. Again, objects were tracked on radar and observed visually by both airport personnel and Andrews AFB personnel. In this case, the Air Force send up two jet aircraft to engage with the objects. However, although these aircraft visually saw the objects, they were unable to get close to them because the objects were moving faster than the fastest speeds possible by the jets.
Large numbers of the public in Washington DC visually saw these UFOs. There was subsequently a public outcry that the government explain what was going on here. So, the military had a press conference where a General John Samford put forward the explanation that the radar and visual images of the objects were due to a “temperature inversion” in the sky above Washington. However, the radar operators and control tower personnel who tracked and saw the objects themselves did not agree with this “temperature inversion” explanation. Rather, they were adamant that what they tracked and saw were solid objects that performed maneuvers impossible for known aircraft and which exhibited speeds in excess of those possible with the jet aircraft of that time.
1961 Betty and Barney Hill UFO Abduction:
On September 19, 1961, Betty and Barney Hill were driving back to their home in Portsmouth, New Hampshire after a vacation trip. At 10:30 pm in the evening, the Hills noticed a bright star in the sky which grew brighter and brighter, and seemed to be approaching their car. The next thing that they consciously remembered, they were driving again down the road, but they were miles away from where they thought they should be. In addition, there were three hours of time that had passed that they could not account for.
The details of what Betty and Barney Hill experienced that night would only be revealed when they were both placed under hypnosis. To say the least, the details they put forth were indeed remarkable. They reported that a large UFO descended on their car, that extraterrestrials came up to the car, put them in some form of mental control, and took them inside the UFO. When inside, they were both given medical examinations. Betty reported that she had a conversation with one of the extraterrestrials, who spoke to her in English. When she asked him where they were from, the extraterrestrial showed her a star map, which she remembered under hypnosis and was able to draw. A number of years later this star system was identified as that of Zeta Reticuli which is located 39 light years from Earth. After the activities inside the UFO, the Hills were escorted back to their car and mentally directed to start driving home again. They both came out of a daze during the drive back to their home.
1964 Lonnie Zamora UFO Incident:
The 1964 Lonnie Zamora UFO incident occurred near the town of Socorro, New Mexico. Having lived in New Mexico for a number of years, I have had occasion to visit Socorro a number of times. Basically, Socorro is in the middle of nowhere in south-central New Mexico. It is about 100 miles south of Albuquerque and is essentially in a desert-like, desolate environment. Rather interestingly, Socorro is not very far from Trinity Site, the site of the very first atomic bomb test that took place in July 1945. At the time, the people of Socorro saw and heard the explosion, but were told by the U.S. government that a large ammunition depot had exploded.
Lonnie Zamora was a New Mexico state trooper who was considered to be very reliable and an excellent observer. On April 24, 1964, he was in the process of chasing down a speeding car, when he noticed a flame in the sky about a mile away. Thinking that something might have crashed or exploded, he broke off his chase and directed his police car to the location of the flame. When he arrived at that location, to his amazement, he saw a white egg-shaped craft with some red markings on it, and two “people” who were outside the craft, apparently collecting samples from the ground. However, when the beings saw him, they went back into the craft and it took off with a flame and roar.
Zamora called on his police radio for assistance and another officer came to the location. They observed that the desert bushes the craft was sitting on while on the ground were still burning. Furthermore, there were footprint tracks on the ground, and an array of ground indentations that were presumably related to the landing gear of the craft.
1975 Travis Walton UFO abduction:
Travis Walton was an American logger who said he was abducted by a UFO on November 5, 1975 while working with a logging crew in a national forest in northern Arizona. The abduction lasted for a period of five days and extensive search activities for him were conducted with no success. However, he was located when he himself phoned a friend from a phone booth at another location in Arizona far away from his abduction site.
Walton and the other members of his logging crew had finished their work for the day and were heading back home in their truck. At one point, they came into contact with what they described as a UFO that was about 8 feet high and 20 feet in diameter. This UFO was hovering off the ground at a remote location within the national forest. Walton jumped out of the truck and approached the UFO to more closely inspect it. However, when he came near it, he was struck by a beam of light with lifted him and threw him unconscious to the ground. Seeing this and assuming that he was perhaps killed by this light beam, his compatriots left the scene in a panic, but a bit later after thinking about deserting him like that, they returned and found no trace of him at the spot where he had been hit by the light from the UFO.
His compatriots returned home and informed the local sheriff as to what had happened, but the sheriff was highly skeptical of their story and thought perhaps they had murdered Walton. However, they were all given lie detector tests and passed them, so the sheriff had no choice but to believe their story. They searched for five days to try and find any trace of Walton. At the end of the five days, Walton was located because he called a friend from a phone at a service station that was a significant distance from where he was last seen. Here is what Travis Walton said about his experience.
Walton said that the UFO’s light knocked him unconscious and that when he awoke, he found himself lying on a bed and thought that he was in a hospital. However, he was shocked when he saw that he was surrounded by three extraterrestrial beings clad in orange jumpsuits. They were short with large eyes and thin lips, and he later said that they appeared to be the Grey-type extraterrestrials. Upon seeing them, he jumped up from the bed and picked up an item that was lying around and used it to try and protect himself. Upon seeing this, the Grey extraterrestrials retreated from the room. With them gone, Walton left this room, went down a hallway, and then into a spherical room that had a single chair at its center. He sat down in the chair and when he began fiddling with a lever that was located on it, the light dimmed and he was presented with a 360 degree view of a field of stars. When he moved the lever some more, this star field seemed to rotate in its orientation.
Walton decided to stop what he was doing since he had no idea of what was happening, so he got up from the chair and began searching for an exit door. At that time, he was confronted by a tall human figure that was wearing blue coveralls and a glass helmet. This human figure did not speak to him but guided him out of the spherical room and down a ramp. At the end of the ramp was a large hanger-like area which contained a number of other discs like the one he had just exited. Essentially, he was actually inside a much larger UFO craft. The human took him to another room where he was confronted by three other humans, two men and a woman. The woman put a mask over his face and he blacked out. When he awoke, he found himself at the gas station where he then made his phone call.
Was Travis Walton telling the truth about his UFO abduction? He was later given a lie detector test that seemed to indicate he was not truthful, but there is a lot of controversy about the quality of this lie detector test he was given. However, his compatriots passed their lie detector tests indicating that they had encountered a UFO. The fact is that Travis Walton has not changed any of the details of his story in the many years since the event.
1980 Rendlesham Forest UFO event:
The 1980 Rendlesham Forest UFO incident is a very interesting and important one because of the detailed observations that were made by highly qualified and credible military sources. The incident spanned three days in 1980. Rendlesham Forest is a large pine forest, east of Ipswich, in Suffolk, England. Nearby are the twin NATO air bases, RAF Bentwaters and RAF Woodbridge. At the time, both bases were being leased to the United States Air Force. In 1980, the Cold War was running hot, and as a result there were nuclear weapons stored by the U.S. Air Force on the base. This being the case, the military personnel stationed there were of the highest quality. It is interesting to note that we would not know of this incident were it not for a freedom of information act document, a report by the base deputy commander, Col. Charles Halt, that was released to the public in 1983.
The incident began of the evening of December 26, 1980. The security military personnel had observed some strange lights in the Rendlesham Forest area and thought that an aircraft might have crashed there. Security at the base was tight given the presence of nuclear weapons and so a small group of military personnel was dispatched to the suspect area to check it out.
The person in charge of the investigation team was Sgt. James Penniston. He and another soldier approached the area of interest in Rendlesham Forest and to their great astonishment observed an object on the ground that was completely foreign to their military experience and training. The object appeared to be some sort of craft that had landed. It was black in color, triangular in shape, and about three meters wide and two meters in height. It was definitely not any sort of aircraft that they knew of. Penniston sketched the craft in his notebook and took a series of photos of it. He then proceeded to approach the craft and actually physically touched it with his hands. He said that the craft surface felt like metal and was somewhat warm to the touch. He also noted a series of figures that were etched into the craft’s surface. When the craft started to light up, Penniston retreated, and the craft took off at what Penniston described in his notebook as an “impossible” speed. Penniston and the other solder then returned to the base and reported what they had seen.
The next evening, December 27th, guards reported to the base deputy commander, Col. Charles Halt, that the craft had returned. Halt decided to investigate this for himself and so he and another group of security people went into Rendlesham Forest. Halt expected that by doing so, he would lay this matter to rest. But that is not what happened. Instead, Halt and his men observed multiple unknown craft in the sky. At one point in his encounter, one of the craft shown a narrow, focused beam of light down at Halt’s group. Halt was astonished and could not believe what he was seeing.
Upon his return to base, Halt drafted a memo describing the UFO encounter. This was a classified memo that was sent to the British Base Commander, since the U.S. Air Force was occupying a British air base. The whole Rendlesham Forest UFO incident would have been unknown to the general public, had it not been for a Freedom of Information Act request by a UFO group that caused Halt’s memo to be made public in 1983. Halt and Penniston have steadfastly maintained that what they encountered in Rendlesham Forest was not something made by mankind, but was of an extraterrestrial nature.
1986 Airline Encounter with a UFO:
Japan Air Lines flight 1628 was a UFO incident that occurred on November 17, 1986 involving a Japanese Boeing 747 cargo aircraft. The aircraft was enroute from Paris to Tokyo. On the Reykjavík to Anchorage section of the flight, at 5:11 PM over eastern Alaska, the crew first witnessed two unidentified objects to their left. These abruptly rose from below and closed in to escort their aircraft. Each had two rectangular arrays of what appeared to be glowing nozzles or thrusters, though their bodies remained obscured by darkness. When closest, the aircraft's cabin was lit up and the captain could feel their heat on his face. These two craft departed before a third, much larger object started trailing them, causing the pilots to request a change of course. Anchorage Air Traffic Control obliged and requested an oncoming United Airlines flight to confirm the unidentified traffic, but when it and a military craft sighted JAL 1628 at about 5:51 PM, no other craft could be distinguished. The sighting of 50 minutes ended in the vicinity of Mt. McKinley.
The pilot on the Japan Air Lines flight was Captain Terauchi. He and his cockpit crew first observed two square-shaped objects that had light and dark rectangular features on them. These square objects maneuvered around his airplane in ways that seemed to defy the laws of inertia. Their movements were sharp, discontinuous, and rapid. After a while these two objects went away, but a bit later the Captain noticed a very large, spherically-shaped UFO that seemed to be tracking the movements of his aircraft. Captain Terauchi described this object as being “twice the size of an aircraft carrier”. The Captain made a 360 degree turn, but the UFO continued to maintain its position with respect to his aircraft. Eventually, he lost sight of it and landed his plane successfully at the Anchorage, Alaska airport.
Captain Terauchi reported his encounter with these UFOs to the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration. All the pertinent aircraft data, pilot reports, and associated radar scans were sent to John Callahan, the FAA Division Chief of the Accidents and Investigations branch. Callahan initially thought that the Japan Air Lines flight might have been interacting with a secret U.S. stealth aircraft.
A meeting was set up at FAA headquarters in Washington DC to discuss this event. The meeting was attended by representatives of the FBI, CIA and President Reagan’s Scientific Study Team, among others. Upon completion of the presentation, all present were told that the incident was secret and that their meeting "never took place". According to Callahan, the officials considered the data to represent the first instance of recorded radar data on a UFO, and they took possession of all the presented data. However, the FAA’s report on this incident stated that it was due to a “split radar image”.
1989 Bob Lazar Area 51 Account:
In 1989, Bob Lazar made contact with a news reporter by the name of George Knapp at a Las Vegas, Nevada television station, and conveyed to him a fantastic account of his activities back-engineering captured UFOs at the infamous Area 51 in Nevada. The reason he did this is because Lazar was recently terminated from his job at Area 51 due to the fact that he had let others view a UFO, and Lazar was frightened for his life. He was afraid that black ops personnel would terminate him.
The Bob Lazar story begins at Los Alamos, New Mexico. In the 1980s, Lazar had been hired as a contract technician to work at the Clinton P. Anderson Meson Facility at the Los Alamos National Laboratory. Interestingly, I was also working at Los Alamos at that same time. Although I didn’t have any direct contact with him, I do remember one day reading about a jet-powered car that he had built in the local paper, the Los Alamos Monitor. Also, Lazar was listed in the Los Alamos personnel directory of that time. So, Bob Lazar was definitely employed at Los Alamos and I personally know this to be true. Later in the 1980s, Lazar left Los Alamos and moved to Las Vegas, Nevada, where he established his own photo processing small business.
Now, how did Bob Lazar come to be working on UFOs at Area 51? It’s a very interesting story. Edward Teller, the developer of the hydrogen bomb and an original member of the Manhattan Project, would come to Los Alamos periodically to meet with the people there and he typically also gave a lecture talk to the overall Los Alamos personnel. On one of his visits, Lazar came to his lecture early and Teller, before the lecture, was reading a copy of the Los Alamos Monitor newspaper that featured the article about Lazar’s jet-powered car. Lazar took it upon himself to start up a conversation with Teller about his car, and apparently this meeting remained in the recesses of Teller’s memory.
In Las Vegas, Lazar was getting tired of his photo business and submitted an application for U.S. government employment. On his application, Lazar audaciously listed Edward Teller as a reference. Now it’s important to note that Teller was very well placed in the government’s scientific community. It was Teller, for example, who convinced President Ronald Reagan to begin the “Star Wars” initiative. And it is also quite possible that Teller had some involvement in Area 51.
A bit later, Lazar received a phone call from a government official who told him that he had been approved for a position at Area 51, and that his employer would be the Office of Naval Intelligence. Arrangements were made for Lazar to fly to Area 51 via a private, unmarked jet service called Janet Airlines, that flew Area 51 personnel to and from the Las Vegas McCarran airport. Thus, Lazar began his employment at Area 51.
Once at Area 51, Lazar was loaded into a bus with blacked-out windows and driven approximately 10 miles to a site called S-4. He was given a book to read which gave him background information on S-4 and the fact that extraterrestrial craft were located there and were being back-engineered. Lazar was hired to be a part of this back-engineering effort.
Lazar was then taken to the extraterrestrial craft that he would be working on. His job was to try and understand the power system and propulsion system of this craft. Lazar called the craft the “sport model”. It was saucer shaped on the outside and was about 30 feet in diameter. Lazar was allowed to go inside the craft. He found it had two levels, an upper deck that he entered into and a lower deck below it. There were two seats in the upper deck but they were the size of children’s seats. At the center of the craft was what he was told was the energy reactor of the craft.
Lazar came to know that the energy reactor was able to generate the tremendous amount of energy required to create gravity waves. These gravity waves were then directed into gravity amplifiers whose output was fed into gravity emitters that were located in the lower deck of the craft. These gravity emitters were mounted on some sort of mounts that allowed them to swivel in different directions. So, it was the generation of gravity waves that allowed the craft to lift off the ground, hover, and speed away at high speeds. The key to the generation of the gravity waves appeared to be based on a new physics which scientists do not understand at the present time. Lazar said that the gravity waves were produced by the bombardment of Element 115 with proton particles. According to him, gravitons were being produced within the nucleus of Element 115.
Lazar’s pronouncement of Element 115 in the year 1989 is quite interesting. At that time, Element 115 had not yet been discovered by Earth scientists. In fact, Element 115 was not discovered until the year 2003, when it was first synthesized by scientists from Russia and America. Since the synthesis took place at a laboratory in Russia, Element 115 was later named Moscovium. The Element 115 that was synthesized was unstable with an extremely short half-life. However, atomic scientists believe that there is an “island of stability” in the vicinity of heavy elements such as 115, where there might be found stable isotopes of Element 115.
Given these later developments, it has always intrigued me that Lazar would speak about Element 115 in the year 1989, when this element would not yet be discovered on Earth until 14 years later. Lazar has further gone on to say that he personally took a piece of Element 115 to the Los Alamos National Laboratory in 1989 to have it machined into a particular shape for use in the extraterrestrial craft. This is also quite interesting to me since I was at Los Alamos in 1989 and had some knowledge of a heavy metal penetrator anti-armor program that was being conducted there at the time. In fact, such heavy metal materials were routinely being machined in the very building I worked in. Given this, it would have been very easy for a piece of Element 115 to have been machined without the knowledge of the type of material that it actually was, this being performed under classified security conditions.
1990 Belgian UFO wave:
The 1990 Belgian UFO wave actually began in November 1989. One night, a triangular-shaped object with lights underneath it was observed to be hovering in the air above a Belgian town by two policemen on night patrol. Subsequently, in 1990 many members of the Belgian public began to report similar looking triangular objects. These craft had a span of about 120 feet and were seen to move very slowly in the sky, then accelerate at terrific speeds. One observer was a Belgian army colonel who was the director of military infrastructure at the time. He had no explanation concerning the nature of the triangular craft that both he and his wife observed one night.
In March 1990, Belgian air force pilots were scrambled to try and make contact with one of these triangular UFOs. However, they found themselves unable to do so. A Belgian general was assigned to look into the case and found that the only possible explanation could be an American black project advanced craft. However, the general was given assurances by the American government that no such American black project vehicles were associated with the Belgian sightings.
1997 Phoenix Lights Event:
The fascinating thing about the 1997 Phoenix lights event is the fact that the phenomenon was observed by literally thousands of people across the State of Arizona. The initial observation actually occurred in Henderson, Nevada at about 8 pm. A man reported seeing a V-shaped object in the sky with lights on it, which appeared to be about the size of a 747 commercial aircraft. The V-shaped craft continued to move to the south into the area of Prescott, Arizona. Observers there noted that it was moving slowly and silently. It appeared to pass over them at a height of about 150 feet and when it passed over, they knew it was a solid craft because it blotted out the images of the stars when it passed by. As the craft passed over the Phoenix area, there were many people who saw it and took pictures of the phenomenon.
Perhaps the most significant witness of the 1997 Phoenix lights event was the then-governor of Arizona, Fife Symington. Although initially at the time Symington appeared to discount the event as a UFO, a few years later he recanted and stated that he had personally seen the craft himself. Symington, a former Air Force pilot, said: "I'm a pilot and I know just about every machine that flies. It was bigger than anything that I've ever seen. It remains a great mystery. As a pilot and a former Air Force Officer, I can definitively say that this craft did not resemble any manmade object I'd ever seen.” So Symington was unable to identify the size, shape, and flight characteristics of the craft that he himself observed. And he was certain that it was not a military aircraft object.
However, somewhat after the fact, the U.S. Air Force put forward an explanation that what the public had observed was actually a training flight of military aircraft that was releasing flares. But when Governor Symington contacted the military in real time to try and determine what the lights were, the military response was “no comment”. The military flare explanation did not describe what a great many of the public observers saw and they scoffed at it. The actual observers were convinced that what they saw was a UFO.
2004 UFO Encounters with Aircraft Carrier Nimitz Navy Planes:
In November 2004, the aircraft carrier Nimitz and its support ships were conducting operational drills in the Pacific Ocean about 100 miles from San Diego. At this time, Navy radar ship personnel and Navy aircraft had encounters with UFOs that the Navy personnel could not identify. Rather interestingly, these events were kept secret from the public by the Navy until 2017, when an expose appeared in the New York Times.
The encounters began in early November 2004 when highly advanced radar tracking systems on the USS cruiser Princeton began tracking multiple unknown targets that kept appearing on their radar screens. The Princeton was equipped with the highly advanced Aegis radar system which was designed to protect the Nimitz from aerial threats. Multiple targets were observed that descended rapidly from 80,000 feet altitude down to 28,000 feet. The personnel on the Princeton thought that their system might have some glitches, so they had it thoroughly inspected. However, the unknown targets continued to appear.
On November 14th, the Nimitz had aircraft in the air as part of their training exercise at the same time the unknown targets were being observed by the Princeton. So, the commander of the Nimitz decided to send two jets over to the target position in order to determine what these targets were.
When the aircraft reached the target area, they observed a whitish object below the surface of the ocean that was about the size of a 737 aircraft. In addition, they also saw a small oblong white craft in the air about the size of a fighter jet. The oblong white craft was described by the pilots as a “tic-tac” because it looked like tic-tac candy. However, the “tic-tac” was flying very fast and in a highly erratic manner, stopping and starting abruptly and changing directions abruptly. It was making maneuvers that no Navy aircraft could make because of the G-forces that would kill the pilots. The military jets were clearly trying to intercept an unknown vehicle which was much faster and much more maneuverable than their own craft. The unknown craft had no flight surfaces and no apparent engines. It was observed to descend from 80,000 feet to 50 feet above the water in such a small amount of time that its speed was estimated to exceed 20,000 miles per hour. Yet no sonic boom was detected. In addition, the pilots were able to get infrared radar locks on the tic-tac. The pilots involved in the encounter said that the unknown craft were so strange that they were probably not of this Earth.
When the pilots returned to the Nimitz, they were met by the Nimitz commander and two unknown Air Force officers. They were forced to sign non-disclosure agreements about their encounter and told that the incident never happened. Additionally, the classified radar tapes of the entire incident were physically removed from the USS Princeton by unidentified civilian personnel at the request of the Princeton commander, and the radar operators were told to keep silent about the incident. These are the reasons why this 2004 incident was not revealed to the public until 2017, a full 13 years after the fact. As a result of the Nimitz UFO incident coming to light, the Navy has revised its guidance to its personnel to report any and all UFO incidents that may be encountered in the future.
2006 UFO Incident at O’Hare Airport in Chicago:
The O’Hare airport UFO incident took place on November 7, 2006 at about 4:30 pm. Ground crews and some pilots in airplanes at the airport saw a disc shaped craft about 24 feet in diameter and of a gray color hovering over airport Gate C-17. It was below an overcast cloud deck that was at about 1000 feet height. Over 12 witnesses saw this event, but people in the O’Hare tower did not, nor did the craft appear on their radar. After hovering stationary for about five minutes, the craft shot up vertically at very high speed, so fast that it punched a circular hole in the cloud deck through which blue sky could be observed.
Both United Airlines and the Federal Aviation Administration first denied to the Chicago Tribune newspaper that this event even happened. However, a freedom of information request by the Chicago Tribune eventually revealed that a call was made by a United supervisor to an FAA official about the UFO sighting. In the end, the FAA declined to investigate this UFO event further, stating that it was due to a weather-related phenomenon, something that was absolutely refuted by the actual event witnesses. To the present time, the 2006 UFO incident at O’Hare airport remains a mystery to those who experienced it.
2014 USS Teddy Roosevelt UFO Incident:
In 2014, the aircraft carrier USS Teddy Roosevelt was having a training mission off the east coast of the United States, prior to being deployed to the Persian Gulf. At that time, jet fighters from the Roosevelt were encountering UFOs on their vicinity. These fighters actually obtained radar images of the UFOs and saw some highly unusual things. There were no obvious flight surfaces and the UFOs were observed to exhibit a rotational motion during their flight. One pilot described something "like a sphere encasing a cube”. As with the 2004 Nimitz incident, the Roosevelt encounters were not reported to the public until 2017, when they appeared in the New York Times. The Pentagon confirmed that the videos published were in fact genuine military videos.
The 2017 revelation of the Nimitz and Roosevelt UFO encounters lead to classified Congressional briefings. It is said that a general stated at these briefings that the mysterious objects being encountered by the military were not related to any secret U.S. technology.
Photo of a UFO taken by the Navy in 2014
This is a photo of a UFO taken by a Navy aircraft from the USS Roosevelt in 2014 that was pursuing it. The pilots stated that the object was rotating while in fast flight, something no Navy aircraft can yet do. Note the lightish region that surrounds the UFO, which might suggest some type of electromagnetic field. This photo was officially confirmed as being authentic by the U.S. Navy.
The UFO cases that I have summarized make it clear that extraterrestrial beings are presently visiting the Earth. This is the only logical conclusion one can come to. Furthermore, it appears that governments worldwide are aware of this fact, but have deliberately withheld this information from the general public. This is most evident by the United States government. Why is the public not being told? For a while, it was because the governments feared that social, economic, and religious dislocations would occur if such information were widely known. However, there is also the situation that government black programs have been under development to back-engineer extraterrestrial technology, and these programs exist under a cloak of deeply classified national security restrictions. There is even the speculation that governments have treaty arrangements with extraterrestrials to develop advanced technologies.
Types of Extraterrestrials:
What types of extraterrestrials are currently interacting with Earth? That is a very good question indeed. There are some people who say that as many as 80 different types of extraterrestrials may currently have activities on Earth. These extraterrestrials are from different locations in our physical universe, some as close as 10 light years away, and even some from different galaxies much, much further distant. Some people also say that there are extraterrestrials that come from different dimensions, whatever that may mean. Are such different dimensions of a physical or non-physical nature? Are they multidimensional?
However, there appear to be three major groups of extraterrestrials currently interacting with Earth. These three groups are the Nordics, the Greys, and the Reptilians. In terms of what they may look like, they are typically depicted as shown below:
Nordics Greys Reptilians
Extraterrestrial Types
The Nordics appear quite similar to Earth humans, while the Greys and Reptilians do not. However, all of these types are humanoid, in that they possess a head, a torso, two arms, and two legs. One question I have had for a long time is why these extraterrestrials are humanoid in form. Is their DNA similar to our own, and if so, why?
It’s interesting that the Nordics look so much like ourselves. What is the reason for this quite striking similarity? Are Earth human beings related to them in some unknown way? Are the Nordics our distant ancestors?
These three classes of extraterrestrials appear to be based upon mammals, insects, and reptiles. On Earth, all three of these biological classes possess essentially similar DNA structures in their biological makeups. This certainly begs the question as to whether Earth-based DNA is unique to Earth or came to Earth from extraterrestrial sources. In other words, did Earth life begin from random chemical reactions in a “warm pond” as Darwin suggested, or was it the result of panspermia from comets or asteroids, or perhaps artificially planted here by extraterrestrials billions of years ago.
Nordics:
There is quite a large amount of information about Nordics provided by their interactions with the Swiss national Eduard Albert (Billy) Meier. Meier was born in 1937 and then spent his youth traveling around the Middle East. At one point, he was a member of the French Foreign Legion. He got the nickname Billy because he used to wear a cowboy hat and his friends thought that he looked like the old west outlaw Billy the Kid. In 1965 he lost his left arm in a bus accident, so since then he has been a one-armed man. Sometime after that, he met and married a Greek woman, Kalliope Zafiriou, with whom he had three children. At the present time, Meier is still alive.
Meier claims his extraterrestrial encounters began in 1942, at the age of five, when he met an elderly Pleiadian man named Sfath. After Sfath's death in 1953, Meier said that he began communicating with an extraterrestrial woman by the name of Asket. All contacts ceased in 1964, he said, but then resumed on January 28, 1975, when he met Semjase, the granddaughter of Sfath.
The Billy Meier case has been heavily documented by the UFO investigator Wendelle C. Stevens. Wendelle Stevens was a retired US Air Force pilot-turned-UFO investigator and researcher. Wendelle began his military career in the Army Air Force in 1942. After WWII, in the newly formed Air Force, he participated in many top-secret programs, including those which had him investigate UFOs. Having this official inside knowledge, he knew there was something to the phenomena, so he began his own private research and investigation. Stevens died in 2010.
In about 1977, Stevens first heard of the Billy Meier UFO interactions and went to Switzerland to meet Meier himself. He became convinced that Meier was telling the truth and was interacting with the Pleiadian extraterrestrial woman Semjase on a regular basis. He conducted an extensive analysis of the evidence that Meier had obtained concerning the Pleiadian extraterrestrials. In 1979 Stevens acquired 1,800 pages from Meier in the form of 18 volumes of 100 pages each, the entire first edition German contact notes, Semjase Kontakt Berichte 1st Edition, which he then published in English as the book “Message from the Pleiades”. The Billy Meier contact notes provide a verbatim transcription of Meier’s many conversations with Semjase, and Meier stated that he was able to transcribe them from his mind word-for-word.
According the Meier, Semjase was a rather good looking human-type woman with blonde hair. He said she looked like she was in her early 30s, but she stated she was actually 330 years old. Semjase said the Pleiadians had a lifespan of about 1000 years. The Pleiades star cluster is located 444 light-years from Earth.
Meier had taken a great number of daylight UFO pictures with his 1970s 35mm film camera and also with a moving picture film camera during the time period of 1975-1980. One must remember that in that time period, there were no digital cameras and certainly no digital photo processing. Meier said that he would be telepathically told in his mind to go to a certain location at a certain time in order to observe the Pleiadian ships. He would typically see these ships alone, but on occasion other people were with him that observed them also. Shown below is a photo Meier took of a Pleiadian UFO vehicle. The Pleiadians referred to their craft as “beam ships”.
Pleiadian beam ship
If Meier’s UFO photos are genuine and not faked photos of UFO models as some people have claimed, they are clearly the best UFO photographs that have ever been taken to date. Wendelle Stevens and his team had Meier’s photographs analyzed with the best computer digital analysis techniques available in the 1970s, and the conclusion of that study was that the photos were not faked. There then remains the possibility that Meier somehow was able to photograph string-supported models of UFOs. However, the scientific photo analyses did not reveal any evidence of string or support structures in the photos.
When asked if Meier had any photos of Semjase, he said that he had attempted to take some of her, but that the photo film always came out blank after development. That is rather unfortunate.
Meier also recorded audio sounds that the Pleiadian beam ships made and they have a rather eerie, electromagnetic oscillating whine to them. Wendelle Stevens had scientific audio analyses done on these recordings, and complex interactions of a variety of audio frequencies were detected.
In Meier’s contact notes, Semjase goes into considerable detail describing the Pleiadian views of spirituality and religion. We will go into this in more detail later in the book.
Greys:
The public first became aware of Grey extraterrestrials as a result of the Betty and Barney Hill abduction case of 1961. The next situation that played an impact was the revelation in 1978 of the 1947 Roswell UFO crash by Maj. Jesse Marcel, where it was reported that the extraterrestrials were of the Grey type.
Greys are described as being humanoid with small bodies, smooth grey-colored skin, enlarged hairless heads, and large black eyes. Size wise, they are small in stature like children. Greys are typically depicted as grey-skinned diminutive humanoid beings that possess reduced forms of, or completely lack, external human body parts such as noses, ears or sex organs. Their bodies are usually described as being elongated, having a small chest, and lacking in muscular definition and visible skeletal structure. Their legs are depicted as being shorter and jointed differently from humans, with limbs proportionally different from a human. Greys are said to be descended from insectoid species.
During her abduction, Betty Hill asked the Grey beings where they were from and they showed her a star chart which was years later interpreted to show that their home planet was in the Zeta Reticuli binary star system, which is 39 light-years from Earth.
Reptilians:
Reptilians are reported to be of two types, one extraterrestrial and one that evolved on Earth. The extraterrestrial reptilians are said to be from the area of Alpha Draconis (approximately 300 light-years from Earth) and are referred to as Draconians. The Draconians are described as war-like in nature and seek to conquer and occupy different regions of the Milky Way Galaxy by force. They are described as being very large in stature, between 14-22 feet tall and weighing up to 2000 pounds, with some possessing wing-like appendages. The Draconians are bipedal, with two legs, two arms, a torso, and a reptilian appearing head, and they are covered with a scaly-type exterior.
The second type of reptilians are those said to have evolved naturally here on Earth. They are descendants of the dinosaurs who evolved into bipedal form millions of years before the evolution of homo sapiens from the mammals. These Earth reptilians consider themselves to be the original inhabitants of the Earth, with homo sapiens being the latecomers. They are said to live underground in deep large caverns, where they have cities. They possess the ability of space travel and have some bases on the Moon, Mars, and the moons of Jupiter. They shy away from contact with humans and have the ability, through mind control, to make humans perceive them as human when there are any meetings with humans. It is said that they maintain some level of secret contact with human governments and leaders.
Religious Views Concerning Extraterrestrials:
If extraterrestrials were to land on the White House lawn tomorrow, what would be the reaction of the world’s religions and the impact upon billions of peoples’ religious beliefs?
Western Religions:
Judaism:
The Jewish Torah provides some suggestions that extraterrestrials may have been interacting with human beings very long ago. Here is an interesting statement in the Genesis Chapter of the Torah:
6:4 There were giants in the earth in those days; and also after that, when the sons of God came in unto the daughters of men, and they bare children to them, the same became mighty men which were of old, men of renown.
The Torah speaks about sons of God who came in unto the daughters of men, and caused them to bare giant offspring. However, the Torah is short on the details of this. More information can be found in the Book of Enoch.
Enoch was the 7th pre-flood patriarch from Adam. He was the father of Methuselah, the most long-lived patriarch who died at the age of 969. Enoch himself reached the age of 365, when it is said that he did not die but rather was taken up into heaven. Enoch was also the great-grandfather of Noah who survived the Great Flood.
For some reason, the Book of Enoch was not included in the Jewish Torah. However, portions of it were found among the Dead Sea Scrolls, so it is clear that the Essenes who lived at the time of Jesus were quite familiar with Enoch’s writing.
Here is how Enoch describes the “fallen angels”, who he calls “The Watchers”:
6.1 And it came to pass, when the sons of men had increased, that in those days there were born to them fair and beautiful daughters.
6.2 And the Angels, the sons of Heaven, saw them and desired them. And they said to one another: "Come, let us choose for ourselves wives, from the children of men, and let us beget, for ourselves, children."
6.3 And Semyaza, who was their leader, said to them: "I fear that you may not wish this deed to be done and that I alone will pay for this great sin."
6.4 And they all answered him, and said: "Let us all swear an oath, and bind one-another with curses, so not to alter this plan, but to carry out this plan effectively."
6.5 Then they all swore together and all bound one another with curses to it.
6.6 And they were, in all, two hundred and they came down on Ardis, which is the summit of Mount Hermon. And they called the mountain Hermon because on it they swore and bound one another with curses.
6.7 And these are the names of their leaders: Semyaza, who was their leader, Urakiba, Ramiel, Kokabiel, Tamiel, Ramiel, Daniel, Ezeqiel, Baraqiel, Asael, Armaros, Ananel, Zaqiel, Samsiel, Satael, Turiel, Yomiel, Araziel.
6.8 These are the leaders of the two hundred Angels and of all the others with them.
7.1 And they took wives for themselves and everyone chose for himself one each. And they began to go into them and were promiscuous with them. And they taught them charms and spells, and they showed them the cutting of roots and trees.
7.2 And they became pregnant and bore large giants. And their height was three thousand cubits.
7.3 These devoured all the toil of men; until men were unable to sustain them.
7.4 And the giants turned against them in order to devour men.
7.5 And they began to sin against birds, and against animals, and against reptiles, and against fish, and they devoured one another's flesh, and drank the blood from it.
7.6 Then the Earth complained about the lawless ones.
8.1 And Azazel taught men to make swords, and daggers, and shields, and breastplates. And he showed them the things after these, and the art of making them; bracelets, and ornaments, and the art of making up the eyes, and of beautifying the eyelids, and the most precious stones, and all kinds of coloured dyes. And the world was changed.
8.2 And there was great impiety, and much fornication, and they went astray, and all their ways became corrupt.
8.3 Amezarak taught all those who cast spells and cut roots, Armaros the release of spells, and Baraqiel astrologers, and Kokabiel portents, and Tamiel taught astrology, and Asradel taught the path of the Moon.
It would seem that The Watchers were a renegade group from a larger group of off-world extraterrestrials, who decided to mate with human women. Enoch says that when they wished to, they were able to appear as men.
According to Enoch, the behavior of the fallen angels and their offspring was not acceptable to the higher authorities, and thus the decision was made to wipe them off the face of the Earth through the mechanism of the Great Flood of Noah, which would happen in the future with respect to Enoch.
At the age of 365, the Genesis Torah states that Enoch did not die, but was physically taken up into heaven by the higher authorities.
The next person in the Torah to discuss is Abraham. Abraham’s original name was Abram, but it was later changed to Abraham. Abraham’s father was named Terah and he originally lived in a town called Ur. Abraham’s wife was named Sarai and she was later given the name Sarah. He also had a brother by the name of Lot. Terah relocated from Ur to the land of Canaan, along with Abraham, Sarah, and Lot. Abraham lived in the town of Hebron while his brother Lot lived in the town of Sodom. Abraham also had interactions with Melchizedek, the King of the town of Salem.
The Torah indicates that Abraham had three “visitors” come by one day:
18:2 And he lift up his eyes and looked, and, lo, three men stood by him: and when he saw them, he ran to meet them from the tent door, and bowed himself toward the ground,
18:3 And said, My LORD, if now I have found favour in thy sight, pass not away, I pray thee, from thy servant:
18:4 Let a little water, I pray you, be fetched, and wash your feet, and rest yourselves under the tree:
18:5 And I will fetch a morsel of bread, and comfort ye your hearts; after that ye shall pass on: for therefore are ye come to your servant. And they said, So do, as thou hast said.
18:6 And Abraham hastened into the tent unto Sarah, and said, Make ready quickly three measures of fine meal, knead it, and make cakes upon the hearth.
18:7 And Abraham ran unto the herd, and fetcht a calf tender and good, and gave it unto a young man; and he hasted to dress it.
18:8 And he took butter, and milk, and the calf which he had dressed, and set it before them; and he stood by them under the tree, and they did eat.
18:9 And they said unto him, Where is Sarah thy wife? And he said, Behold, in the tent.
18:10 And he said, I will certainly return unto thee according to the time of life; and, lo, Sarah thy wife shall have a son. And Sarah heard it in the tent door, which was behind him.
18:11 Now Abraham and Sarah were old and well stricken in age; and it ceased to be with Sarah after the manner of women.
18:12 Therefore Sarah laughed within herself, saying, After I am waxed old shall I have pleasure, my lord being old also?
18:13 And the LORD said unto Abraham, Wherefore did Sarah laugh, saying, Shall I of a surety bear a child, which am old?
18:14 Is any thing too hard for the LORD? At the time appointed I will return unto thee, according to the time of life, and Sarah shall have a son.
18:15 Then Sarah denied, saying, I laughed not; for she was afraid. And he said, Nay; but thou didst laugh.
18:16 And the men rose up from thence, and looked toward Sodom: and Abraham went with them to bring them on the way.
These “men” left Abraham to go and visit his brother Lot in the town of Sodom:
19:1 And there came two angels to Sodom at even; and Lot sat in the gate of Sodom: and Lot seeing them rose up to meet them; and he bowed himself with his face toward the ground;
19:2 And he said, Behold now, my lords, turn in, I pray you, into your servant's house, and tarry all night, and wash your feet, and ye shall rise up early, and go on your ways. And they said, Nay; but we will abide in the street all night.
19:3 And he pressed upon them greatly; and they turned in unto him, and entered into his house; and he made them a feast, and did bake unleavened bread, and they did eat.
19:4 But before they lay down, the men of the city, even the men of Sodom, compassed the house round, both old and young, all the people from every quarter:
19:5 And they called unto Lot, and said unto him, Where are the men which came in to thee this night? bring them out unto us, that we may know them.
19:6 And Lot went out at the door unto them, and shut the door after him,
19:7 And said, I pray you, brethren, do not so wickedly.
19:8 Behold now, I have two daughters which have not known man; let me, I pray you, bring them out unto you, and do ye to them as is good in your eyes: only unto these men do nothing; for therefore came they under the shadow of my roof.
19:9 And they said, Stand back. And they said again, This one fellow came in to sojourn, and he will needs be a judge: now will we deal worse with thee, than with them. And they pressed sore upon the man, even Lot, and came near to break the door.
19:10 But the men put forth their hand, and pulled Lot into the house to them, and shut to the door.
19:11 And they smote the men that were at the door of the house with blindness, both small and great: so that they wearied themselves to find the door.
19:12 And the men said unto Lot, Hast thou here any besides? son in law, and thy sons, and thy daughters, and whatsoever thou hast in the city, bring them out of this place:
19:13 For we will destroy this place, because the cry of them is waxen great before the face of the LORD; and the LORD hath sent us to destroy it.
Who were these “men” that visited both Abraham and Lot? They appeared to Abraham and Lot as men and they ate and drank as men. But one must wonder if they might actually have been extraterrestrials. They clearly had the technological means to completely obliterate the towns of Sodom and Gomorrah.
Then we come to Moses. Moses’ first interaction with higher beings came when he encountered the “angel of the Lord” in the “burning bush”:
3:1 Now Moses kept the flock of Jethro his father in law, the priest of Midian: and he led the flock to the backside of the desert, and came to the mountain of God, even to Horeb.
3:2 And the angel of the LORD appeared unto him in a flame of fire out of the midst of a bush: and he looked, and, behold, the bush burned with fire, and the bush was not consumed.
3:3 And Moses said, I will now turn aside, and see this great sight, why the bush is not burnt.
3:4 And when the LORD saw that he turned aside to see, God called unto him out of the midst of the bush, and said, Moses, Moses. And he said, Here am I.
3:5 And he said, Draw not nigh hither: put off thy shoes from off thy feet, for the place whereon thou standest is holy ground.
3:6 Moreover he said, I am the God of thy father, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob. And Moses hid his face; for he was afraid to look upon God.
Now in this passage from Exodus in the Torah, it is not clear whether it was an angel of the Lord or the Lord himself who appeared to Moses in the “burning bush”. And what are we to make of the “burning bush”. Was this some sort of field associated with the manifestation of the being that Moses was interacting with?
Then there is the description of events when the Pharaoh finally decided to let the Jewish people leave Egypt:
12:37 And the children of Israel journeyed from Rameses to Succoth, about six hundred thousand on foot that were men, beside children.
13:21 And the LORD went before them by day in a pillar of a cloud, to lead them the way; and by night in a pillar of fire, to give them light; to go by day and night:
13:22 He took not away the pillar of the cloud by day, nor the pillar of fire by night, from before the people.
14:8 And the LORD hardened the heart of Pharaoh king of Egypt, and he pursued after the children of Israel: and the children of Israel went out with a high hand.
14:9 But the Egyptians pursued after them, all the horses and chariots of Pharaoh, and his horsemen, and his army, and overtook them encamping by the sea, beside Pihahiroth, before Baalzephon.
14:10 And when Pharaoh drew nigh, the children of Israel lifted up their eyes, and, behold, the Egyptians marched after them; and they were sore afraid: and the children of Israel cried out unto the LORD.
14:11 And they said unto Moses, Because there were no graves in Egypt, hast thou taken us away to die in the wilderness? wherefore hast thou dealt thus with us, to carry us forth out of Egypt? 14:12 Is not this the word that we did tell thee in Egypt, saying, Let us alone, that we may serve the Egyptians? For it had been better for us to serve the Egyptians, than that we should die in the wilderness.
14:13 And Moses said unto the people, Fear ye not, stand still, and see the salvation of the LORD, which he will shew to you to day: for the Egyptians whom ye have seen to day, ye shall see them again no more for ever.
14:14 The LORD shall fight for you, and ye shall hold your peace.
14:15 And the LORD said unto Moses, Wherefore criest thou unto me? speak unto the children of Israel, that they go forward:
14:16 But lift thou up thy rod, and stretch out thine hand over the sea, and divide it: and the children of Israel shall go on dry ground through the midst of the sea.
14:17 And I, behold, I will harden the hearts of the Egyptians, and they shall follow them: and I will get me honour upon Pharaoh, and upon all his host, upon his chariots, and upon his horsemen
.
14:18 And the Egyptians shall know that I am the LORD, when I have gotten me honour upon Pharaoh, upon his chariots, and upon his horsemen.
14:19 And the angel of God, which went before the camp of Israel, removed and went behind them; and the pillar of the cloud went from before their face, and stood behind them: 14:20 And it came between the camp of the Egyptians and the camp of Israel; and it was a cloud and darkness to them, but it gave light by night to these: so that the one came not near the other all the night.
14:21 And Moses stretched out his hand over the sea; and the LORD caused the sea to go back by a strong east wind all that night, and made the sea dry land, and the waters were divided.
14:22 And the children of Israel went into the midst of the sea upon the dry ground: and the waters were a wall unto them on their right hand, and on their left.
14:23 And the Egyptians pursued, and went in after them to the midst of the sea, even all Pharaoh's horses, his chariots, and his horsemen.
14:24 And it came to pass, that in the morning watch the LORD looked unto the host of the Egyptians through the pillar of fire and of the cloud, and troubled the host of the Egyptians,
14:25 And took off their chariot wheels, that they drave them heavily: so that the Egyptians said, Let us flee from the face of Israel; for the LORD fighteth for them against the Egyptians.
14:26 And the LORD said unto Moses, Stretch out thine hand over the sea, that the waters may come again upon the Egyptians, upon their chariots, and upon their horsemen.
14:27 And Moses stretched forth his hand over the sea, and the sea returned to his strength when the morning appeared; and the Egyptians fled against it; and the LORD overthrew the Egyptians in the midst of the sea.
14:28 And the waters returned, and covered the chariots, and the horsemen, and all the host of Pharaoh that came into the sea after them; there remained not so much as one of them.
So, at the time of the Exodus under Moses, the Jewish people were guided “by day in a pillar of a cloud, to lead them the way; and by night in a pillar of fire, to give them light”. This almost sounds like there was a UFO in the sky that guided the direction of travel of the Jewish group. At the Red Sea, “the Lord looked unto the host of the Egyptians through the pillar of fire and of the cloud”. This suggests that the Lord was actually located inside a vehicle in the sky and caused the waters to part for the Jews but to return and drown all the Egyptians.
It seems clear to me that the Jewish Torah holds a number of accounts that are possibly related to the presence of extraterrestrials. Such accounts appear strongly associated with Enoch, Abraham, and Moses. Given these accounts in the Torah, it seems possible that Judaism might not be completely surprised if extraterrestrials from the heavens revealed themselves to modern day Jews.
Christianity:
The New Testament Bible is rife with references to angels who might possibly have been extraterrestrials. This begins with the visit of the Angel Gabriel to Mary, as described in the Gospel of Luke:
26 In the sixth month of Elizabeth's pregnancy, God sent the angel Gabriel to Nazareth, a town in Galilee,
27 to a virgin pledged to be married to a man named Joseph, a descendant of David. The virgin's name was Mary.
28 The angel went to her and said, "Greetings, you who are highly favored! The Lord is with you."
29 Mary was greatly troubled at his words and wondered what kind of greeting this might be.
30 But the angel said to her, "Do not be afraid, Mary; you have found favor with God.
31 You will conceive and give birth to a son, and you are to call him Jesus.
32 He will be great and will be called the Son of the Most High. The Lord God will give him the throne of his father David,
33 and he will reign over Jacob's descendants forever; his kingdom will never end."
34 "How will this be," Mary asked the angel, "since I am a virgin?"
35 The angel answered, "The Holy Spirit will come on you, and the power of the Most High will overshadow you. So the holy one to be born will be called the Son of God.
So, it was an angelic being, Gabriel, who told Mary about her future son, Jesus, and how he would be conceived.
Next we come to the birth of Jesus in Bethlehem. The Bible says that the three kings were led to the spot by a “star” that guided them, as indicated in the Gospel of Matthew:
And having heard the king, they went their way; and lo, the star, which they had seen in the east, went on before them, until it came and stood over where the Child was. And when they saw the star, they rejoiced exceedingly with great joy. And they came into the house and saw the Child with Mary His mother; and they fell down and worshiped Him; and opening their treasures they presented to Him gifts of gold and frankincense and myrrh (Matt. 2:9-11)
It was a “star” that went before the three kings and guided them to the place where Jesus was born. Could this “star” have been an extraterrestrial craft?
Then there is the baptism of Jesus by John the Baptist, as given in the Gospel of Mark:
9 And it came to pass in those days, that Jesus came from Nazareth of Galilee, and was baptized of John in the Jordan.
10 And straightway coming up out of the water, he saw the heavens rent asunder, and the Spirit as a dove descending upon him:
11 and a voice came out of the heavens, Thou art my beloved Son, in thee I am well pleased.
This biblical event was painted by Flemmish artist Aert De Gelder in the year 1710. A disc-shaped object appears to shine beams of light on John the Baptist and Jesus in this painting. One must ask why the artist depicted such an image, particularly in the year 1710, when there were no manmade objects in the sky. It looks very much like a flying saucer.
Painting of the baptism of Jesus
Next, we consider the transfiguration of Jesus on the mountain, as described in the Gospel of Mark
2 And after six days Jesus taketh with him Peter, and James, and John, and leadeth them up into an high mountain apart by themselves: and he was transfigured before them.
3 And his raiment became shining, exceeding white as snow; so as no fuller on earth can white them.
4 And there appeared unto them Elias with Moses: and they were talking with Jesus.
5 And Peter answered and said to Jesus, Master, it is good for us to be here: and let us make three tabernacles; one for thee, and one for Moses, and one for Elias.
6 For he wist not what to say; for they were sore afraid.
7 And there was a cloud that overshadowed them: and a voice came out of the cloud, saying, This is my beloved Son: hear him.
8 And suddenly, when they had looked round about, they saw no man any more, save Jesus only with themselves.
Jesus, Peter, James, and John go up on the mountain and Jesus is transfigured, so that “his raiment became shining, exceeding white as snow”. Furthermore, Elias and Moses appear from nowhere. But how did the apostles know that these figures were actually Moses and Elias, since they could not have known what these Jewish historical figures looked like. And then “there was a cloud that overshadowed them: and a voice came out of the cloud, saying, “This is my beloved Son: hear him.” Might this “cloud” have actually been an extraterrestrial vehicle hovering in the sky, from which a message was projected? And finally, Moses and Elias magically disappear from the group. Were they teleported out?
Now, we have the resurrection of Jesus as written in the Gospel of Mark:
1 Saturday evening, when the Sabbath ended, Mary Magdalene, Mary the mother of James, and Salome went out and purchased burial spices so they could anoint Jesus’ body.
2 Very early on Sunday morning just at sunrise, they went to the tomb.
3 On the way they were asking each other, “Who will roll away the stone for us from the entrance to the tomb?”
4 But as they arrived, they looked up and saw that the stone, which was very large, had already been rolled aside.
5 When they entered the tomb, they saw a young man clothed in a white robe sitting on the right side. The women were shocked,
6 but the angel said, “Don’t be alarmed. You are looking for Jesus of Nazareth, who was crucified. He isn’t here! He is risen from the dead! Look, this is where they laid his body.
7 Now go and tell his disciples, including Peter, that Jesus is going ahead of you to Galilee. You will see him there, just as he told you before he died.”
So, the women entered the empty tomb and were told by a “young man clothed in a white robe” that Jesus had risen. Could this young man have been an extraterrestrial? Clearly, this being had the appearance of a young man, rather than an angel.
And finally, we have the ascension of Jesus. Here is how it is described in the Acts of the Apostles as written by Luke:
6 So when they had come together, they asked him, “Lord, will you at this time restore the kingdom to Israel?”
7 He said to them, “It is not for you to know times or seasons that the Father has fixed by his own authority.
8 But you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come upon you, and you will be my witnesses in Jerusalem and in all Judea and Samaria, and to the end of the earth.”
9 And when he had said these things, as they were looking on, he was lifted up, and a cloud took him out of their sight.
10 And while they were gazing into heaven as he went, behold, two men stood by them in white robes,
11 and said, “Men of Galilee, why do you stand looking into heaven? This Jesus, who was taken up from you into heaven, will come in the same way as you saw him go into heaven.”
So, as the assembled people were looking on, “he was lifted up, and a cloud took him out of their sight”. Was Jesus actually levitated into the body of an extraterrestrial craft? And what of the two men who suddenly appeared from nowhere and spoke to the crowd. Were they from the extraterrestrial craft?
The story of Jesus in the New Testament is clearly punctuated at key locations with descriptions of “clouds” in the sky, as well as beings that seem to appear from nowhere. Does this imply that Jesus might have actually had extraterrestrial origins himself? I think that such an idea would be difficult for most, if not all, Christians to accept.
Yet, in the year 2012, Jesuit Father Jose Funes, Vatican Chief astronomer and director of the Vatican Observatory, said Christians should consider alien life as an “extraterrestrial brother” and a part of God’s creation. So, it seems that the Catholic Church has at least begun to establish a position to be taken when the existence of extraterrestrials becomes indisputable to mankind.
There is one miracle event associated with the Catholic Church that bears on the above. There can be no doubt that it was the “dance of the sun” that took place in Fatima, Portugal on October 13, 1917. Let me relate to you the details of this seemingly miraculous event.
On May 13, 1917, three young Portuguese children had a vision of a strange “Lady”. This occurred in a pasture called Cova da Iria. The three children were Lucia Santos (age 10), Franscisco Marto (age 9), and Jacinta Marto (age 7). The Lady appeared to them floating near the top branches of a small oak tree. She told them that she had messages for them and that she would reappear at the same time and in the same spot on the 13th day of the month, for the next five months.
On the 13th of each subsequent month, the children saw and talked with the Lady at the oak tree in Cova. And, as word of this miraculous event got around, they were accompanied by larger and larger crowds of devout Catholics, who believed the Lady to be Mary, the mother of Jesus. Only the children could actually see the Lady. The crowds saw nothing but the children, who appeared to be entranced by an unseen presence.
The Lady told the children that the war (World War I) would end soon. She said that Russia would be converted. She gave the children a vision of Hell, and revealed two other secrets to the children. And on July 13th, the Lady told the children that there would be a “great sign” on her last visit on the 13th of October, so that people would believe.
The 13th of October was a dreary day, cold and quite rainy. Despite these conditions, the children, along with approximately 70,000 people, were assembled at the Cova for the last visit of the Lady, and the promised “great sign”. Included in the crowd were many skeptics there to observe what might happen. The Lady appeared to the children and Lucia asked her what her name was. In response, she said that she was the Lady of the Rosary. And with that she rose into the sky and disappeared.
Then the promised “great sign” began. Here is how it was described by a number of the skeptics in the crowd who observed it. These eyewitness accounts were told to John De Marchi, a Catholic priest and researcher who interviewed eyewitnesses in depth during his research on Fatima conducted during the period 1943-1950.
"Before the astonished eyes of the crowd, whose aspect was biblical as they stood bare-headed, eagerly searching the sky, the sun trembled, made sudden incredible movements outside all cosmic laws — the sun 'danced' according to the typical expression of the people." ― Avelino de Almeida, reporter for the highly secular newspaper O Século.
"The sun, at one moment surrounded with scarlet flame, at another aureoled in yellow and deep purple, seemed to be in an exceeding fast and whirling movement, at times appearing to be loosened from the sky and to be approaching the earth, strongly radiating heat." ― Dr. Domingos Pinto Coelho, reporter for the newspaper Ordem.
"The sun's disc did not remain immobile. This was not the sparkling of a heavenly body, for it spun round on itself in a mad whirl, when suddenly a clamor was heard from all the people. The sun, whirling, seemed to loosen itself from the firmament and advance threateningly upon the earth as if to crush us with its huge fiery weight. The sensation during those moments was terrible." ― Dr. Almeida Garrett, Professor of Natural Sciences at Coimbra University.
"As if like a bolt from the blue, the clouds were wrenched apart, and the sun at its zenith appeared in all its splendor. It began to revolve vertiginously on its axis, like the most magnificent firewheel that could be imagined, taking on all the colors of the rainbow and sending forth multi-colored flashes of light, producing the most astounding effect. This sublime and incomparable spectacle, which was repeated three distinct times, lasted for about ten minutes. The immense multitude, overcome by the evidence of such a tremendous prodigy, threw themselves on their knees." ― Dr. Formigão, a professor and priest at the seminary at Santarem.
"I feel incapable of describing what I saw. I looked fixedly at the sun, which seemed pale and did not hurt my eyes. Looking like a ball of snow, revolving on itself, it suddenly seemed to come down in a zig-zag, menacing the earth. Terrified, I ran and hid myself among the people, who were weeping and expecting the end of the world at any moment." ― Joaquim Lourenco, an observer in Alburitel, located 18 kilometers from Fatima.
So on October 13th, 1917 these observers along with 70,000 other people saw what they interpreted to be the sun “dance” in the sky. This phenomenon took place for a period of about ten minutes. People reported that they had no difficulty looking directly at the sun, which appeared to them as a rotating silver-whitish disc that threw off various colors from its periphery. A further interesting detail is that people in the crowd, who were soaking wet from standing in the rain, reported that they were completely dry immediately following the sun event. People as far as 40 kilometers from Fatima reported seeing the phenomenon, but not further away than that.
How can we explain the phenomenon observed at Fatima on October 13th, 1917? One thing that is clear is that the sun around which our planet revolves did not physically exhibit any such effects on that date. No astronomers observed unusual sun behavior on that day, and they certainly would not have missed it. Furthermore, if our sun had actually “danced” in this way, the Earth would no longer exist! Many have called Fatima a “mass hallucination” of fervent religious believers who saw what they wanted to see. However, such an explanation clearly is patently absurd. Many skeptics and critical observers in the crowd who were certainly not religious believers also saw the phenomenon. Further, the phenomenon was observed by people up to 40 kilometers away, who were just going about their everyday business. Finally, there is the physical drying of peoples’ clothes that was reported by many.
Was what people observed “dance” not actually the sun? Eyewitnesses reported that the rain clouds, which were heavy all day, suddenly parted and the “sun” then appeared. This “sun” could be readily gazed at, since it was not the blindingly intense sun that we know, but rather a silvery looking disc.
Photograph of the Fatima “Sun”
Here is the only black-and-white photograph of the Fatima “sun” in existence. It shows a gray-white disc surrounded by a somewhat brighter background. In addition, the “sun” shown in the photo is not perfectly circular, appearing slightly elliptical in shape.
Perhaps what was observed was a flying craft that came beneath the overcast clouds, which still obscured the real sun. In other words, perhaps people were observing an unidentified flying object that subsequently “danced” in the sky and gave off multi-colored spinning light and enough heat energy to dry out peoples’ clothes. If one accepts this explanation, then it also implies that the children were communicating with a Lady who was indeed not-of-this-earth, but also not from the heaven of the Bible.
I wonder what the reaction of Christians would be if they found out that the life and events of Jesus were actually orchestrated by extraterrestrials to provide a moral framework for the human race. The sum of Jesus’s teachings are exquisitely simple: Love God and Love Others.
Islam:
The religion of Islam was founded by Muhammad in about the year 610. Muhammad was 40 years old when he had his first revelation. This took place in a cave on Mount Hira, while Muhammad was taking a month of vacation and rest from his work. This month is now referred to as Ramadan by Islam.
Muhammad said that while he was in the cave, his was visited by an “angel” who appeared beside him and gave him the order to “Recite!”. When Muhammad heard this, he was troubled and reluctant to obey. However, eventually Muhammad found himself speaking the very first words of the Quran:
Recite in the name of thy Lord who created!
He createth man from a clot of blood.
Recite: and thy Lord is the Most Bountiful
He who hath taught by the pen,
taught man what he knew not.
After this encounter in the cave, Muhammad had another vision of a being who later he identified as the angel Gabriel. Here is how Muhammad described that encounter:
When I was midway on the mountain, I heard a voice from heaven saying: ‘O Muhammad! Thou art the apostle of God and I am Gabriel.’ I raised my head towards heaven to see who was speaking, and lo, Gabriel in the form of a man with feet astride the horizon …. I stood gazing at him, moving neither backward or forward; then I began to turn my face away from him, but towards whatever region of the sky I looked, I saw him as before.
Muhammad then rushed off the mountain, afraid that his encounter had been with a “jinn”. Now jinns were considered by the Arabs to be non-physical devils who were composed of fire. On the other hand, the Arabs considered angels to be non-physical beings who were composed of light. The Arabs thought jinns to be bad and angels to be good.
Muhammad went to his first wife, Khadija, to ask her if he was interacting with the devil or God. Khadija was actually Muhammad’s employer when he was working as a caravan merchant in Mecca. Muhammad loved Khadija more than all of his future wives. Khadija consoled Muhammad and told him that she would consult about his encounter with her Jewish cousin Waraqa, who was knowledgeable about spiritual matters. When Khadija told Waraqa what had happened, he replied:
If you have spoken the truth to me, O Khadija, there has come to him the greatest namus who came to Moses aforetime, and lo, he is the prophet of his people.
So Khadija then told Muhammad that he was blessed to be a prophet of God, and Islam was born, with Khadija being its first convert.
The writings of Muhammad that comprise the Quran are the basis of Islam. Islam regards everything in the Quran as the direct word of God. This is distinctly different from the Bible, which Christians regard as the directed word of God, rather than the direct word. Because of the Islamic belief that everything in the Quran is the direct word of God, there can be no dispute about the words themselves. However, the meaning of the words can be open to a variety of different interpretations by Muslims.
What does the Quran say about the possibility of extraterrestrials? Nothing directly, although it does talk about angels and jinn. Here are some excerpts from the Quran that might have a bearing on extraterrestrials:
It is God who created seven heavens and of the earth the likeness thereof; His command and controlling power circulate among them; signs indicative of His Omnipotence over all things and inductive to the realization that God is aquatinted with all the facts and that His Omnipotence covers all things in all respects. Al- Talaq 12.
And among His visible signs and His marvels, which display omnipotence and authority, is the creation of the heavens and the earth and the beings which He scattered over both; and the power and omnipotence together when He will, is attributed to Him. Al- Shura 29.
And to God all created beings in the heavens and creatures on the earth prostrate themselves in reverence and adoration and so do the angels who do not display inordinate self-esteem. Al- Nahl 49.
And to God, who controls the fate of all, do all beings, the material and the immaterial, in the heavens and on earth submit to His government and to His supreme controlling and influencing power willingly or unwillingly and so do their shadows which are cast on the ground or on a surface by intercepting the sun rays fore and afternoon, and other luminary in the hull of the eve. Al- Ra’d 15.
And to God belong all created beings in the heavens and on earth, each and all being obedient and submissive to His will. Al- Roum 26.
The seven heavens and the earth and all animate and inanimate beings therein praise His glory and extol. Al- Israa 44.
Do you not see you (O you who are oblivious of God’s Omnipotence) that to God do all creatures in the heavens and on earth prostrate in adoration, praise and worship, and so do the sun and the moon, the stars and the mountains, the trees and the animals and a great many among mankind! Al- Hajj 18.
And among His visible signs and His marvels, which display omnipotence and authority is the creation of the heavens and the earth and the beings which He scattered over both; and the power and omnipotence together them all together when He will, is attributed to Him. Al- Shoura 29.
Thus, the Quran contains general statements that the heavens are full of life and created beings (both physical and non-physical). This being the case, Islam might be able to accept the existence of extraterrestrials. Unlike Christianity, Muhammad was simply a prophet of God, not the Son of God. The extraterrestrials may have even had their own prophets. The greatest difficulty for Islam would be that the extraterrestrials are not mentioned specifically in the Quran.
Eastern Religions:
Hinduism:
Hinduism is considered to be the oldest of the major religions, predating Judaism. It began in northern India and, unlike the other major religions, has no specific founder. The major gods in Hinduism are Brahma (the creator), Vishnu (the preserver), and Shiva (the destroyer). However, these three major gods are actually a trinity within the overall ultimate godhead Brahman. Under the major gods are a vast array of demi-god figures.
All Hindu scriptures are written in the ancient Sanskrit language. The oldest Hindu religious writings are the Vedas, and the oldest of the Vedas is the Rig Veda. The Rig Veda has been said by Hindu scholars to have been written down in approximately 1000 BCE by the sage Vedavyasa. However, it is said that there was an oral tradition for many years prior to that point, perhaps as early at 3000 BCE. The major gods venerated in the Rig Veda are Agni and Indra. One might ask why Brahma, Vishnu, and Shiva were not the major gods venerated in the Rig Veda. The answer is that Agni and Indra were downgraded to lesser gods in the later Hindu scriptures. The number of Hindu religious writings is vast. There are the oldest Vedas and then the younger Upanishads and Puranas, which attempt to embellish and interpret the Vedas.
There are two great Hindu epic sagas in Hinduism. These are the Mahabharata and the Ramayana. The Mahabharata describes the epic Mahabharata War which took place in Northern India in at least 1000 BCE. Two clans of relatives go to battle for the throne of the kingdom and the Mahabharata describes the details of this war. Associated with the books of the Mahabharata is the Bhagavad Gita, which is perhaps the most famous of Hindu writings. The Bhagavad Gita describes a lengthy discussion between one of the warriors, Arjuna, and his charioteer, Krishna, while they sit in the chariot between the two warring camps prior to the major battle. Krishna, who is in actuality a manifestation of the God Vishnu, instructs Arjuna about many truths of existence. The second major epic is the Ramayana, which is said to have been written in about 500 BCE by Maharishi Valmiki. It describes the life, travels, and events of the Indian prince Rama in a time that is believed to predate the Mahabharat War. Rama is said to be an incarnation of the God Vishnu.
Existence of life outside the Earth is revealed in many parts of Vedic Scriptures. One prominent verse is taken from the Padma Purana:
There are 900,000 species living in the water. There are also 2,000,000 non-moving living entities (sthāvara) such as trees and plants. There are also 1,100,000 species of insects and reptiles, and there are 1,000,000 species of birds. As far as quadrupeds are concerned there are 3,000,000 varieties, and there are 400,000 humanoid species.
The Valmiki Ramayana, Sundara Kanda Section, Chapter 8, Verse 6 vividly mentions an alien race called the bhutaganas who controlled Ravana’s flying machine:
Those wonderful vimana air crafts roamed the sky with extremely high speed, controlled by thousands of evil creatures with big round eyes, with helmets on their heads.
The vimanas in Hindu literature are of significant interest since they might represent extraterrestrial craft associated with extraterrestrials that were interacting with humans. Here is a description of a vimana in the Ramayana:
The Pushpaka Vimana that resembles the Sun and belongs to my brother was brought by the powerful Ravana; that aerial and excellent Vimana going everywhere at will ... that chariot resembling a bright cloud in the sky ... and the King [Rama] got in, and the excellent chariot at the command of the Raghira, rose up into the higher atmosphere.
This is a description of a vimana associated with the Mahabharata War:
Gurkha flying in his swift and powerful Vimana hurled against the three cities of the Vrishis and Andhakas a single projectile charged with all the power of the Universe. An incandescent column of smoke and fire, as brilliant as ten thousands suns, rose in all its splendour. It was the unknown weapon, the Iron Thunderbolt, a gigantic messenger of death which reduced to ashes the entire race of the Vrishnis and Andhakas.
And here is yet another vimana reference in the account of the War:
Strong and durable must the body of the Vimana be made, like a great flying bird of light material. Inside one must put the mercury engine with its iron heating apparatus underneath. By means of the power latent in the mercury which sets the driving whirlwind in motion, a man sitting inside may travel a great distance in the sky. The movements of the Vimana are such that it can vertically ascend, vertically descend, move slanting forwards and backwards. With the help of the machines human beings can fly in the air and heavenly beings can come down to earth.
This is a depiction of a vimana that might have been employed in the Mahabharata War:
Ancient Hindu Vimana Craft
In terms of Hindu spirituality, all living entities were created by Brahman and all living entities are basically interrelated with each other. Thus, all living entities in different planets, whether they are demigods or demons, humans or animals, all originated from one spiritual quality. This spiritual quality is called atman, the spirit soul.
The Vedic scriptures describe spirit soul’s attributes and characteristics in vivid ways through elaborate depictions and examples in the Upanishads and Puranas. Since atman is superior to all material conditions, atman is unchanged by any material influences. Based on this substantial characteristic of atman, it is concluded that atmans can also exist within the hot sun, the cold moon, windy Saturn, high-pressure Venus, and dark Pluto.
The atman enters the physical body of a particular species according to its karma (activities) and guna (modes of nature which influence the pure spiritual state of the atman itself). Due to different gunas and karmas, each and every atman in this material universe can enter different material bodies of different compositions on different planets. Therefore, the Vedic Scriptures describe atman as existing anywhere in the universe. Based on this status, existence of life in other planets is undeniable according to Vedic Scriptures.
Buddhism:
Siddhartha Gautama, the Buddha, lived from 566-486 BCE. He was an Indian prince in the area of northern India and, as such, began his life as a Hindu. At the age of 29, he left his princely home (and his wife and young son) and became an extreme ascetic for about six years. After nearly dying of his extreme asceticism, he chose the Middle Way to spiritual development, adopting neither extreme asceticism nor extreme materialism. He became an expert in meditation, and, it is said, one day during a very deep meditative state underneath a tree, he achieved the state of “Enlightenment”. Thus enlightened, he became aware of the Four Noble Truths: 1. Suffering exists; 2. The source of suffering is Cravings; 3. Suffering is ended by the cessation of Cravings; 4. Cravings are ended by following the Eight-Fold Path. The Eight-Fold Path is: 1) Right view; 2) Right intention; 3) Right speech; 4) Right action; 5) Right livelihood; 6) Right effort; 7) Right mindfulness; 8) Right meditation. When all Cravings are ended, then one achieves the state of Nirvana.
The cosmology of Buddhism is as follows. In this vertical cosmology, the universe exists of many worlds (one might say "planes/realms”) which are stacked one upon the next in layers. Each world corresponds to a mental state or a state of being. The vertical cosmology is divided into thirty-one planes of existence and the planes into three realms, each corresponding to a different type of mentality. These three realms are the Ārūpyadhātu, the Rūpadhātu, and the Kāmadhātu.
The Arupyadhatu is a formless realm and the beings there do not exist within physical time and space. The Rupadhatu is a realm of form. Its inhabitants all have a location and bodies of a sort, although those bodies are composed of a subtle substance which is of itself invisible to the physical inhabitants of the Kāmadhātu. The Kamadhatu includes the physical human realm.
While nothing the Buddha said suggests that there could be life on other planets, there is nothing in his teachings, the Dhamma, which would prohibit this possibility.
Taoism:
Taoism (also called Daoism) was founded in approximately the 6th century BCE by Laozi, who was an archivist in the Zhou Dynasty court. It is an original religion of China, along with Confucianism. In fact, it is said that Laozi was a teacher of Confucius. Laozi was the author of the Daode Jing, the Scripture of the Way and its Power. Dao is the Way, which is considered to be the spontaneous source of the life of the universe. De is the Power which is contained in everything in the universe, which can bring a natural order and harmony if it is not disturbed by human influences.
In the Daode Jing, the Dao is described as the Mother of the Universe:
There is a being – in chaos yet complete.
It preceded heaven and earth.
Silent, it was, and solitary;
Standing alone, never changing.
Moving around, yet never ending.
Consider it the mother of heaven and earth.
I do not know its name.
To call it something, I say dao.
Forced to give it a name, I say great.
Great – says it departs.
Depart – says it is far.
Far away – says it returns.
Therefore dao is great, heaven is great,
Earth is great, humans too, are great.
In the universe there are four ‘greats’
And humans make their residence in the whole of them.
Humans are modeled on earth.
Earth is modeled on Heaven.
Heaven is modeled on dao
Dao is modeled on its own spontaneity.
This is as close as Taoism comes to describing a concept of God. The yin-yang symbol is the symbol of Taoism. It symbolizes the flow and harmony of opposites. Taoism also incorporates the concept of qi (chi) as the life energy that circulates within the body. Taoism says essentially nothing about the existence of extraterrestrials.
Reaction of the Major Religions to Extraterrestrial Spirituality:
Having gone through possible extraterrestrial aspects in the various major religions, the question now is: How would believers in these major religions react to the existence of extraterrestrials in view of their religious faith?
It is clear that all of the major religions would have to reconcile what they believe about spirituality with what the extraterrestrials might believe about spirituality. In other words, these religions would have to shift from being Earth-centric to being Universe-centric. Perhaps this will lead to a consolidation of the current religious truths into a more general spiritual framework. Would this be the end of the major religions as we know them? I think not, but they would certainly have to undergo major changes in order to come to terms with the reality of extraterrestrials.
It seems to me that, in general terms, the Eastern religions would be less impacted than the Western religions. Eastern religions have a more general view of the nature of God in relation to the universe. Hinduism in particular would seem to be quite receptive to the notion of extraterrestrial spirituality.
Western religions, on the other hand, are more rigid in the details of their religious beliefs. And the religion that would, in my view, have the most difficult time accepting the spirituality of extraterrestrials would be Christianity. The primary reason that I say this is that, unlike Judaism and Islam, Christians believe that Jesus was the Only Son of God. They believe that the Only Son of God was incarnated on Earth to save us from the Original Sin of humanity incurred by Adam and Eve. Christians then have to cope with the conundrum of whether or not this same Jesus incarnated on all the other planets in the universe with intelligent beings to save them from their Original Sins. Indeed, do extraterrestrials have any Original Sin as Earth humans are believed to have? Christians would have to radically change their view of who Jesus really was, and this would be very difficult for the devout.
Extraterrestrial Concepts of Spirituality:
At the present time, there are very few sources we can access for information about extraterrestrial concepts of spirituality. In this book, I have summarized the information provided in the few sources that I have found thus far. Obviously, when extraterrestrials decide to interact with Earth humans in a formal way, we will then know a great deal more about their spirituality concepts.
Emanuel Swedenborg:
Who was Emanuel Swedenborg? Swedenborg was an 18th century Swedish scientist who turned to focus on spirituality later in life. He was born in 1688 and died in 1772. He was a Christian and a Protestant Lutheran. Swedenborg began his scientific career in 1715, where he devoted himself to work on natural science and engineering projects for the Swedish government in the areas of geometry, chemistry, and metallurgy. In the 1730s, he shifted his focus to anatomy and physiology, where he became interested in the nature of the brain. And he also began developing an interest in spirituality aspects. He wanted to develop a theory of how matter interacts with spirit.
In 1745, Swedenborg was dining in a private room at a tavern in London. By the end of the meal, a darkness fell upon his eyes, and the room shifted character. Suddenly, he saw a person sitting at a corner of the room, telling him: "Do not eat too much!". Swedenborg, scared, hurried home. Later that night, the same man appeared in his dreams. The man told Swedenborg that he was the Lord, that he had appointed Swedenborg to reveal the spiritual meaning of the Bible and that he would guide Swedenborg in what to write.
Swedenborg began having out-of-body experiences where he said that he interacted with spiritual beings, both associated with the Earth as well as other locations in the Universe. Here is how Swedenborg described these interactions:
By the Lord's Divine mercy I have had my interior faculties, which belong to my spirit, opened, so that I have been enabled to talk with spirits and angels, not only those in the vicinity of our earth, but also with those near other worlds. Since therefore I was desirous of knowing whether there were other inhabited worlds, and what they and their inhabitants were like, I was allowed by the Lord to talk and mix with spirits and angels from other worlds. With some this lasted a day, with others a week, with yet others for months. I was informed by them about the worlds they came from and in the vicinity of which they were, about the life, behaviour and religious practices of their inhabitants, and other matters worth relating about them. Since I was allowed to gain my knowledge in this fashion, I can describe them from what I have heard and seen.
It needs to be known that all spirits and angels are from the human race; they are near their own world, and know what happens there; and they can inform someone whose interior faculties are open sufficiently to be able to talk and mix with them. A human being is in essence a spirit, and associates with spirits at the interior level. Consequently anyone whose interior faculties are opened by the Lord can talk with them, exactly as a man can with another man. I have been permitted to do this daily for the last twelve years.
Swedenborg wrote a book entitled “Other Planets”, where he described his out-of-body interactions with spiritual beings associated with other planets in our solar system, as well as planets in other solar systems in the Universe. These are some excerpts from his book:
The Lord has granted me opportunities to talk and interact with spirits and angels from other planets. It is important to know that all spirits and angels are human and that they remain close to their planet of origin. After all, in our essence we too are spirits and in our deeper levels we are already among other spirits.
Further, I have talked with spirits about the fact that if people consider how incredibly vast the starry heaven is and how incalculably huge the number of stars in it is—and each star is a sun in its own realm, has its own solar system, and is much like our sun, though it may vary from it in magnitude—they can come to believe there is more than one inhabited world in the universe.
It’s interesting that Swedenborg in the 18th century had the realization that there were myriads of extra-solar planets in the universe. Modern scientists only came to discover this near the end of the 20th century, through the dimming of a star’s radiance as a result of planet transit across the face of the star. Present scientific understanding is that almost all stars in the universe have planets surrounding them.
Here is some of what Swedenborg said about his out-of-body interactions with spirits associated with the Planet Mercury:
Some spirits came to me, and I was told by a heavenly source that they were from the planet closest to the Sun, which in our world is called Mercury. The spirits from Mercury possess far more knowledge than other spirits do, both about what is going on within our own solar system and also about what is happening on extrasolar planets. Spirits of the planet Mercury do not stay in one place, or linger among the communities of spirits from one world, but roam throughout the universe.
One of the questions our spirit asked the spirits from Mercury was, “Whom do you believe in?”. The spirits from Mercury replied that they believed in God; but when they were asked further questions about the God they believed in, they were unwilling to respond.
Now here is what Swedenborg had to say about spiritual beings associated with the planet Jupiter:
Spending a lot of time with spirits from Jupiter gradually made it plain to me that they are more upright than the spirits of many other planets. Uprightness comes across as gentleness and sweetness, gentleness because the upright fear doing harm, and sweetness because they love doing good.
Spirits of that planet do not want to be in the company of spirits from our planet because they are different in temperament and custom. They say that spirits from our planet are crafty, and quick and clever at evil schemes, but do not know much about what is good or give it much thought. Spirits from Jupiter are much wiser than spirits from our planet. They describe us as talking a lot and thinking very little.
As for their worship of God, it is all based on the acknowledgment of our Lord as the Highest, the one who rules heaven and earth. They call him “the Only Lord,” and since they acknowledge and worship him during their physical lives they seek him and find him after death. This is the same Lord we worship.
They did not know that their Only Lord was born as a human on our planet; but they said that knowing this does not matter to them— only that he alone is human and governs the universe. When I said that on our planet he is called Christ Jesus, “Christ” meaning “Anointed One” or “King” and “Jesus” meaning “Savior,” they said that they do not worship him as their King, because the notion of kingship feels too worldly to them, but that they do worship him as their Savior.
On one [earlier] occasion some doubt suddenly flowed into some spirits from Jupiter who were with me, doubt as to whether their Only Lord was the same as our Lord. These spirits were deeply moved and delighted to hear it said that their Only Lord is in fact the only human and that all people are referred to as human only because of what comes from him. We are human to the extent that we are images of him, that is, to the extent that we love him and love our neighbor, and therefore to the extent that we are devoted to doing what is good, since good that is done out of love and faith is the image of the Lord.
This is what Swedenborg said about his interactions with the spirits associated with the planet Mars:
The spirits from Mars are among the best of all spirits from the planets in our solar system.
The spirits from one planet are kept apart from the spirits of another planet because the spirits of each planet are associated with some particular district in the universal human and are therefore in a different state.
As for how the inhabitants of their planet view the Divine, they said that they acknowledge and revere our Lord, saying that he is the only God and that he rules both heaven and the universe. They said as well that all that is good comes from him and that he leads them, and also that
he often appears among them on their planet.
And here is what Swedenborg said about the planet Saturn:
The inhabitants of that planet are profoundly humble in their worship because in that context they think of themselves as nothing. They worship our Lord and acknowledge him as the only God. Further, the Lord sometimes appears to them in the form of an angel and therefore as human; and when this happens divinity shines forth from his face and moves their lower minds.
They said that sometimes spirits from our planet come to them and ask what God they worship. They reply that the ones posing this question must be crazy. There could be nothing more insane than to ask what God someone worships when there is only one God for everyone in the universe; and they are even more insane for not saying that the Lord is that only God.
Next, Swedenborg describes the spirits and beings of Venus.
There are two kinds of people on the planet Venus, of quite opposite dispositions. There are people who are gentle and humane, and there are people who are savage and almost feral. The gentle and humane ones appear [in the spiritual world] on the other side of that planet, while the
savage, feral ones appear on the side that faces our planet.
Some of the spirits who appear on the other side of that planet, the gentle and humane ones, came to me and stood where I could see them, just above my head. I talked with them about various subjects. They said, among other things, that when they were in the physical world they had acknowledged our Lord as their only God and that now their acknowledgment was even greater. They insisted that they had seen him on their planet and even represented for me how they had seen him.
I have not talked with the spirits from the side of Venus that faces our planet [in the spiritual world], the ones who are savage and almost feral. I have been told by angels, though, what they are like and where they get such a savage nature.
Swedenborg said that he had visited a number of extra-solar planets in other solar systems throughout the universe.
It is important to know that whatever planet people are from, the Lord acknowledges and accepts everyone who acknowledges and worships a God in human form, because God in human form is the Lord. Since the Lord appears to the inhabitants of various planets in an angelic form, which is a human form, when spirits and angels from those planets hear from spirits and angels of our planet that God is an actual human being, they accept this as the Word, acknowledge it, and rejoice that this is the case.
If you know nothing of heaven’s secrets, you might not be able to believe that anyone could see such distant planets or report anything about them on the basis of direct experience. Be aware, though, that spaces, distances, and consequently movement from place to place in the spiritual
world are, in their origins and first causes, inner changes of state, and that to angels and spirits, these spaces, distances, and movements appear in accordance with those inner changes. Further, spirits and angels can by this means appear to be taken from one place to another and from one planet to another, even to planets that are at the edge of the universe. The spirit of a person in this world can also do this, even while the person’s body remains in the same place.
Anyone can conclude that there are many solar systems from the fact that we can see so many stars in the universe. It is common knowledge in the learned world that each star is a sun in its own region, remaining fixed the way the sun of our planet does in its own position, and only
their great distance from us makes stars appear small. So we may conclude that like our sun, each star has planets around it that are worlds.
Angels who had been sent by the Lord took me to a particular extra solar planet, where I was allowed to observe the planet itself, but not to speak with its inhabitants—although I was allowed to speak with spirits who came from there. After their lives in the physical world come to an end, all the people who inhabit a given planet become spirits and remain in the general neighborhood of their planet. They are still able, therefore, to be a source of information about their planet and the state of the people who live there, because when we leave our bodies we take with us our
whole former life, including our whole memory.
Being taken to other planets in the universe does not mean being taken there in the body, but rather in the spirit, which is led through changes of the state of its inner life that seem like movement through space. As a result, a person’s spirit can be transported and brought to distant places while the person remains in the same place.
Extra-solar planet #1:
After we had some conversation on various subjects, I asked them what God they worshiped. They said that actually they worship a particular angel, an angel who looks to them like a divine person, radiant with light. This angel teaches them and helps them see how they should be living their lives. They know, they added, that God Almighty is in the sun of the angelic heaven and that although he does not appear to them, he does appear to their angel; but he is too powerful for them to dare to worship him.
Extra-solar planet #2:
When I got there I did not see the planet itself, but I did see some spirits from it, since as already noted the spirits of any planet can be seen in its vicinity. This is because they have a nature
similar to that of the planet’s inhabitants, they once lived there themselves, and the current inhabitants need their help.
Asked about what God they worshiped, they answered that they worshiped a God both visible and invisible—a visible God in human form and an invisible God in no form at all. Both from what they said and from thought images they shared with me, I learned that their visible
God was our Lord himself and that they too called him “the Lord.”
Later I saw some other spirits from that same planet who appeared in a place below the spirits just mentioned; I talked with them as well. They were idolaters; they worshiped a stone idol that looked more or less human, but was not pleasing to look at. It is important to know that the
religious focus of all who arrive in the other life is at first the same as it was in the world; they are weaned from it only gradually. This is because our whole religious orientation is deeply rooted in our inner life, and it takes time to uproot and remove it from that life.
Extra-solar planet #3:
Since that is the nature of the spirits from that planet, in the eyes of other spirits they do not appear in a clearly defined human form the way others do; instead they look more like clouds. Many of them look like black clouds with a shining, vaguely human shape showing through
here and there.
I asked them whether they had had the same low opinion of the body when they were people living in the physical realm. They said that the people of their planet attach no importance to their bodies, only to the spirit within the body, because they know that the body will die but
the spirit will go on living forever.
As to how they view the Divine, they said that they acknowledge God in human form—that is, our Lord. Anyone who acknowledges the God of the universe in human form is welcomed by our Lord and led by him. Others cannot be led by him because their thought about God has no focus. The inhabitants of their planet, they went on to say, are taught about matters of heaven by a form of direct contact with angels and spirits.
I asked what happens to those among them who are evil. They said that on their planet people are not allowed to behave immorally. If any of them think evil thoughts and do evil things, they are rebuked by a particular spirit who threatens them with death if they persist in what they
are doing; and if they do persist, they lose consciousness and die. This is how the people of that planet are protected from the spread of evil.
Extra-solar planet #4:
As I have already said several times, the only way spirits can be taken from place to place is by
changes in their inner state. To the spirits themselves, these changes look exactly like going from place to place, like traveling. I experienced changes like this steadily for about ten hours until I had left behind my own state of life and had come into theirs, meaning that I arrived there in
spirit.
Once there, I realized that in spirit I was somewhere among the stars far outside our solar system. This I could tell from the changes of state and from my seeming to have traveled continuously for almost ten hours. Eventually I heard some spirits talking near a planet that I later saw for myself.
I asked the spirits from that planet what their image of God was. They answered that they thought of God not as invisible but as visible in human form. They knew this not only on the basis of an inner perception but because God had actually appeared to them in human form.
Extra-solar planet #5:
On another occasion I was taken to a different planet in the universe outside our solar system, and again this required a succession of changes of state, this time lasting almost twelve hours continuously.
During our journey, our [spiritual] progression, it was granted to me to observe how vast the Lord’s heaven for angels and spirits is. From the areas that are not inhabited I could tell that heaven is so vast that if there were millions of planets each of which had as many people as there are on ours, to eternity there would still be enough room for everyone to live in, and it would never be filled.
So there we have Emanuel Swedenborg’s descriptions of the spirit inhabitants on planets both within our solar system and in other solar systems, and how they view God and spirituality. What are we to make of his accounts?
It would seem that Swedenborg’s ventures to other planets were made in an out-of-body non-physical state. Each of the planets he visited had spiritual entities that were located in the vicinity of the planet. These spiritual entities were, in their past, physical inhabitants of the planet, but were now in the spiritual realm. Swedenborg’s interactions were essentially with these spiritual entities, who told him about their viewpoints on God, and also described to him the characteristics of the physical planet inhabitants.
Swedenborg described inhabitants of the planets Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn in our solar system. In general, the physical inhabitants of these places are described as being physically similar to Earth human beings. In addition, the characteristics of the planet are said to be similar to those of Earth.
To me, this doesn’t make much sense. It is not at all clear why Swedenborg described the physical nature of our solar system planets the way he did. We know from our space probes that have been sent to all these locations that their physical characteristics are vastly different from those on Earth. Mercury is a barren planet with one hot side that faces the sun and one cold side that faces away from the sun. Venus appears to have a rather hellish environment with high temperatures and high pressures. Mars is a barren planet with a dry environment and a carbon dioxide atmosphere. Jupiter and Saturn are gas giant planets that may or may not have a solid core. Thus far, space probes have shown no signs of life on any of these celestial bodies.
One thing Swedenborg was right about was the vast number of extrasolar planets that exist in the universe. He was very much ahead of his time in this regard. We only began discovering exoplanets at the end of the twentieth century, and we now know that there are probably at least as many exoplanets as there are stars in the universe. As was the case with the solar system planets, the exoplanets are described by Swedenborg as being Earth-like in nature.
It's interesting that all of the physical civilizations described by Swedenborg seemed to be of a relatively simple nature, without the technology associated with present-day Earth. In his time, however, many of the peoples of the Earth were essentially still in an agrarian state, and this appears to have carried over into his descriptions.
In terms of how the inhabitants of other planets think of spirituality and God, Swedenborg was communicating with non-physical spiritual entities, so clearly this was a common factor. In terms of God, all the inhabitants had a belief in God, and some of them thought that God had a physical presence on their planet. It seems clear that Swedenborg was filtering this information through his lens of the God of Christianity.
The Urantia Book:
It’s quite fair to say that the “Urantia Book” is the most puzzling book I have ever read. I first came across it quite by chance in a footnote of another book that I had been reading. At that time, I had never even heard of the Urantia Book, it was a complete unknown to me. I looked up some information about it and found that it was purported to be an extensive body of revelation that was imparted to mankind by superhuman entities. So, intrigued, I ordered a copy.
When my copy of the Urantia Book arrived, it was indeed a very large and extensive volume – 2097 pages of densely written material! And no human author but rather the book was authored by a group of non-physical entities. Believe me, there is no way that one can speed-read the Urantia Book.
The cover of the Urantia Book says that it is a Revelation that covers three general areas. The first general area is God and Universe Destiny, covering such topics as Deity, the cosmos, life after death, and angels and other celestial personalities. The second general area is the History of Earth, covering topics such as evolution, Adam and Eve, the development of civilization, and spirituality. The third general area is the Life of Jesus, which deals with topics such as the human and divine Jesus, the missing years, and His teachings. No wonder the Urantia Book is 2097 pages of fine print! What a vast panorama of topics! The Urantia Book effectively describes in enormous detail the Kingdom of God, both within you and without you.
Because the Urantia Book was so thick, my first reading of it was more of a skimming exercise, with closer focus only on particular sections that interested me the most. After I was finished with this first reading, my overall reaction was “this is too bizarre to be true”, and I put the book in a dark corner of my bookshelf. However, a few years later I was preparing for a combined business/pleasure trip to India for three weeks, and I wanted something to read on the long plane flights and also while there. For some reason, the thought of re-reading the Urantia Book popped into my mind, and I took it to India and read it again, this time more slowly and with the benefit of the first reading. That second reading was greatly beneficial to my understanding of the concepts that were being presented.
Something I found quite unusual about the Urantia Book is the significant amount of “scientific” discussion contained within it regarding cosmology, fundamental physics, the origin of Urantia (the Book’s term for the Earth), and life on Urantia. Much of the “science” in the Urantia Book might certainly be described as early 20th century thinking by the present scientific community on Earth. However, it is interesting to note that the “authors” specifically state in the Book that their scientific discussions were purposely couched in early 20th century terms so as to be understandable by the Book’s initial human recipients at the time the Book was communicated to them in the early 20th century. They also state that the meaning of what they present will become clearer as mankind’s scientific knowledge increases.
Perhaps you might scoff at this, but then ask yourself how you might go about explaining something like quantum mechanics to an aborigine. Clearly, the cosmology and basic physics presented in the Urantia Book are significantly different from present scientific thinking. Yet, consider the state of scientific thought at the time of Copernicus as compared to today. I would suggest that you view the “science” presented in the Urantia Book from the perspective of the time frame in which the scientific discussion in the Book was generated, namely 1911-1935, and what was known scientifically at that time.
Some might say that the science in the Urantia Book is nothing more than science fiction. If it is just science fiction, then the Urantia Book is science fiction that even the most skilled science fiction writer would be hard pressed to formulate in any coherent way.
I have no intention of summarizing the vast content of the Urantia Book here. The only way one can deal with the overall content of the Book is to read it oneself. What I will do is give a brief description of its history – the little history that is known, at least – and then present some of its content that may have a bearing on extraterrestrial spirituality.
History of the Urantia Book:
The history of the Urantia Book has been elaborated in detail in the book “A History of the Urantia Papers” by Larry Mullins. I will now summarize this history.
The key figure in the Urantia Book is Dr. William Samuel Sadler. William Sadler was born on June 14, 1875 in Spencer, Indiana. He married his wife, Lena Kellogg, in 1897. Sadler was a psychiatrist and indeed a very distinguished one of his time. He obtained his M.D. from the University of Chicago, and studied with Freud in 1911. He was the Director and Chief Psychiatrist of the Chicago Institute of Research and Diagnosis, and was a Fellow of the American College of Surgeons, the AMA, the AAAS, and the American Psychiatric Association. His office was located in Chicago at 533 Diversey Parkway and this location is currently still the headquarters of the Urantia Foundation. Sadler was also the author of many books during his medical career. It is clear that William Sadler was a man of significant academic and medical credentials.
Sadler’s wife, Lena, was also a medical doctor. In addition, she was a member of the famous Kellogg family of Battle Creek, Michigan. This Kellogg family is the one that invented Kellogg’s Corn Flakes in the late 19th century.
Dr. William Sadler was a severe critic of the spiritualists of his time. He was involved in activities to debunk many of the fraudulent mediums. In 1929, he published a book entitled “The Mind at Mischief: Tricks and Deceptions of the Subconscious and How to Cope with Them”. This book discusses a number of these fraudulent mediums. However, in the appendix of the book, Sadler stated the following:
In discussions of fraudulent mediums or self-deceived psychics, the reader of this book has several times encountered the statement that there were certain exceptions to the general indictments there made, and was referred to this appendix. It now becomes my duty to explain what I had in mind when those footnotes were inserted. ….
The other exception has to do with a rather peculiar case of psychic phenomena, one which I find myself unable to classify, and which I would like very much to narrate more fully; I cannot do so here, however, because of a promise which I feel under obligation to keep sacredly. In other words, I have promised not to publish this case during the lifetime of the individual. I hope sometime to secure a modification of that promise and to be able to report this case more fully because of its interesting features. I was brought in contact with it, in the summer of 1911, and I have had it under my observation more or less ever since, having been present at probably 250 of the night sessions, many of which have been attended by a stenographer who made voluminous notes.
A thorough study of this case has convinced me that it is not one of ordinary trance. While the sleep seems to be quite of a natural order, it is very profound, and so far we have never been able to awaken the subject when in this state; but the body is never rigid, and the heart action is never modified, though respiration is sometimes markedly interfered with. The man is utterly unconscious, wholly oblivious to what takes place, and, unless told about it subsequently, never knows that he has been used as a sort of clearing house for the coming and going of alleged extra-planetary personalities. In fact, he is more or less indifferent to the whole proceeding, and shows a surprising lack of interest in these affairs as they occur from time to time.
In no way are these night visitations like the séances associated with spiritualism. At no time during the period of eighteen years observation has there been a communication from any source that claimed to be the spirit of a deceased human being. The communications which have been written, or which we have had the opportunity to hear spoken, are made by a vast order of alleged beings who claim to come from other planets to visit this world, to stop here as student visitors for study and observation when they are enroute from one universe to another or from one planet to another. These communications further arise in alleged spiritual beings who purport to have been assigned to this planet for duties of various sorts.
Eighteen years of study and careful investigation have failed to reveal the psychic origin of these messages. I find myself at the present time just where I was when I started. Psychoanalysis, hypnotism, intensive comparison, fail to show that the written or spoken messages of this individual have origin in his own mind. Much of the material secured through this subject is quite contrary to his habits of thought, to the way in which he has been taught and to his entire philosophy. In fact, of much that we have secured, we have failed to find anything of its nature in existence. Its philosophic content is quite new, and we are unable to find where very much of it have ever found human expression.
Much as I would like to report details of this case, I am not in a position to do so at present. I can only say that I have found in these years of observation that all the information imparted through this source has proved to be consistent within itself. While there is considerable difference in the quality of the communications, this seems to be reasonably explained by a difference in state of development and order of the personalities making the communications. Its philosophy is consistent. It is essentially Christian and is, on the whole, entirely harmonious with the known scientific facts and truths of this age. In fact, the case is so unusual and extraordinary that it establishes itself immediately, as far as my experience goes, in a class by itself, one which has thus far resisted all my efforts to prove it to be of auto-psychic origin. Our observations are being continued and, as I have intimated, I hope sometime in the near future to secure permission for the more complete reporting of the phenomena connected with this interesting case.
Sadler stated in the appendix to his 1929 book “The Mind at Mischief” that he had encountered in 1911 “a case is so unusual and extraordinary that it establishes itself immediately, as far as my experience goes, in a class by itself, one which has thus far resisted all my efforts to prove it to be of auto-psychic origin.” He stated that a subject in a trance-like sleep produced “communications … made by a vast order of alleged beings who claim to come from other planets to visit this world, to stop here as student visitors for study and observation when they are enroute from one universe to another or from one planet to another. These communications further arise in alleged spiritual beings who purport to have been assigned to this planet for duties of various sorts.”
What Sadler is saying here is absolutely remarkable, if it is indeed true. And who was the sleeping subject? Sadler never revealed his name before he died, nor did anyone else closely associated with the origin of the Urantia Book. But circumstantial evidence strongly suggests that the sleeping subject was Wilfred Kellogg, Sadler’s brother-in-law and a member of the Kellogg family.
The people who were in close contact with the sleeping subject during the evolution of the Urantia Book were called the “Contact Commission”. This very small group was composed of Dr. William Sadler, his wife Dr. Lena Kellogg Sadler, Wilfred Kellogg, his wife Anna Bell Kellogg, Emma Louise Christensen (Christy) who was a pseudo-family member of the Sadlers, and Bill Sadler Jr., Sadler’s son (once he was old enough). So the “Contact Commission” was a group of only six very close-knit people.
In about 1923, Sadler and his wife Lena began to have friends over to their home at 533 Diversey Parkway in Chicago on a regular basis on Sunday afternoons for tea and philosophic discussions. At that time, discussions about the sleeping subject’s revelations were conducted by this Sunday group, which later became known as the “Forum”. The people in the Forum were from all walks of life and diverse backgrounds. Each was personally screened by Sadler. The member turnover of the Forum was relatively high, so from 1923 to the final Forum meeting in 1942, there were a total of 486 Forum members.
Sadler would read the communications of the sleeping subject to the Forum members, and these communications would be discussed by the group. The early Forum members began to put forward questions to pose to the sleeping subject, which were answered by the personality (personalities?) that was being channeling through the subject. But at one point this personality provided the following admonition:
If you only knew what you are in contact with you would not ask me such trivial questions. You would rather ask questions as might elicit answers of supreme value to the human race.
Having been given this challenge, in 1924 the Forum produced a list of 181 profound questions. The first was: “Is there really a God? And, if so, what is He Like?” Then, a few weeks later after a night of sleep, it is said that there appeared in the bedroom of the sleeping subject a 500 page handwritten manuscript that addressed all of these 181 questions! The wife of the sleeping subject (presumably Anna Bell Kellogg) stated that this manuscript was not present in his room before he went to sleep, and she had no idea where it came from. She did not think that her husband had written it, and when he was asked this question, he said that he had not.
Sadler and the Forum were said to be astonished at the appearance of this 500 page manuscript, seemingly virtually overnight, and also the high quality, cohesion, and consistency of its lofty intellectual content. Now the sleeping subject, presumably Wilfred Kellogg, did not seem to have anywhere near the intellectual capacity to write such a manuscript. He only had a sixth-grade education and began his career as a bookkeeper in Battle Creek, Michigan. Furthermore, Sadler indicated that the handwriting of the manuscript was not the handwriting of the sleeping subject. Finally, the sleeping subject was never observed by any member of the Contact Commission to have ever written anything, despite close observation by them.
So how did this initial 500 page manuscript, essentially the beginning of the Urantia Book, come to be? Here is how Bill Sadler Jr., a member of the Contact Commission, described it:
This is the theory I accept. I want you to visualize several points in space … we’ll call them point A, point B, point C, and point D. I think the Papers were dictated, or conceived, at point A. And I think if we could have been present at point A when any one of these Papers were being written, we would have seen absolutely nothing. At point A was perhaps this Divine Counselor who signs Paper One.
Now, you’d have something to see at point B, but it would be very dull. It would be a man asleep, some ordinary looking guy, just asleep, doing nothing. Now, if you could get to point C, this would be exciting! You remember the day of the resurrection, the soldiers saw the stone roll away, apparently by itself? Now, that stone was being pushed … by Secondary Midwayers who are non-corporeal beings who can deal with physical substances. At point C, I think you would have seen a very exciting phenomenon, a pencil moving over paper with no visible means of propulsion. That’s where the physical writing was consummated.
Bill Sadler Jr. theorized that the manuscript was written by a non-corporeal being! It should be noted that none of the Contact Commission indicated that they had ever actually observed the writing of this manuscript, and subsequent Urantia papers, themselves.
In his critical commentary book “Urantia: The Great Cult Mystery”, Martin Gardner states that there are only three possibilities for the origin of the Urantia Papers:
1. Wilfred Kellogg was a charlatan. Like other phony direct-voice mediums and automatic writers, his ego derived enormous and secret satisfaction from counterfeiting trances during which he pretended to channel material he had consciously concocted over a long period of reading and thinking.
2. Wilfred belonged to a small class of sincere, honest persons who, for causes not well understood, experience spells of deep trances during which they channel information fabricated by secondary personalities who are part of their unconscious.
3. Wilfred actually was chosen by supermortals to transmit a new revelation to humanity.
William and Lena Sadler had the 500 page handwritten manuscript typed by Christy, and brought the typed manuscript to the Forum meeting on 18 January 1925. The Forum members read and discussed the manuscript in detail, and provided additional questions and clarifications to be posed to the sleeping subject. It is said that Wilfred Kellogg was the only member of the Forum who never made a comment or asked a question.
The Forum members and the sleeping subject interacted as follows to generate the content of the Urantia Book from a series of Urantia papers provided through the sleeping subject, as told by a member of the Forum:
The procedure was as follows: They were to read a paper each Sunday afternoon. It was ordinarily read to them by one of the Contact Commission, usually Dr. Sadler. They were to write down any questions that came to mind and hand them in each week. Mr. Kellogg was generally responsible for collecting them. Answers to their questions were then considered by the superhuman revelators. The answers were incorporated into a subsequent paper or an editing of the original paper. In this way, one paper about God eventually mushroomed into five papers about God – the first five in the book. Other parts likewise expanded as the superhumans monitored the human reaction to their material.
This process initially took approximately five years and then consisted of 57 papers. But the process does not stop there. The book advanced another generation in human understanding between 1929 and 1935. After years of reading papers, the first draft of Parts I-III (of the Urantia Book), the Forum was told approximately: “With your increased understanding derived from reading and study of the material, you can now ask more intelligent questions. We are going to go through the book again.” And so the book was edited and expanded week by week and year by year as the Forum members learned and grew.
It had been reported by several Forumites that some revelatory material was recalled – either because it was just too incomprehensible to the human mind or because it was deemed best not to reveal the information to the future readership. Very little explanation was given beyond the fact that it was their decision to withdraw the paper. Other papers were edited after being read to the Forum. For instance, one of the papers stated that the apostle Nathaniel had a good sense of humor for a Jew. At this comment the members of the Forum chuckled. The next time they got this paper from the safe, they discovered the phrase “for a Jew” was deleted. Human reaction to the material was obviously monitored closely. At least one Forumite believed that several of the most difficult papers would not have been included in The Urantia Book without the questions formulated by William S. Sadler, Jr. The Urantia Book bears the birthmark of the collective mind of the people who composed the Forum during the birth phase.
Dr. Sadler said in one paper that about 150 people participated in this creative process. In another, he mentions 300 people while citing the total Forum membership as 486. The original charter membership numbered 30. Then as now, there was a mix of people including the very committed, the indifferent, and even a few with negative reactions to the whole business. They came from diverse backgrounds. In the march of human events over the years, some dropped out, some moved out of town, some moved on to the mansion worlds.
By 1934 and 1935, the process was essentially complete for the first three parts of the book. A third and final creative round was undertaken between 1935 and 1942 to clarify concepts and remove ambiguities. This apparently resulted in only minor editing by the superhuman revelators.
About 1935, the Forum received the Jesus papers from the midwayers who had waited for approval from Uversa before undertaking the story. The final round of clarification and editing between 1935 and 1942 seems to have included Part IV. Part IV is undated. No one has said why. I believe it is because Parts I to III contain cosmology that will become dated and eventually need revision. Part IV on the other hand contains “historic facts and religious truths” which should “stand on the records of the ages to come.” Its date need not be fixed.
It is said that the original handwritten manuscripts of the Urantia papers were kept in a locked safe by Sadler. However, it is claimed by Sadler and the other members of the Contact Commission and the Forum that these original manuscripts literally disappeared from the interior of the safe after their typed version had been generated! The claim is that the superhuman beings who wrote them caused them to dematerialize. Furthermore, the Contact Commission subsequently destroyed the typewritten versions of the Urantia papers that were typed by Christy, for unknown reasons.
The First Edition of the Urantia Book was published in 1955. Soon thereafter, the Contact Commission received this final message from the superhuman revelators: “You are now on your own”. Sadler, the key person associated with the Urantia Book commented: “They didn’t even say goodbye”. This 1955 First Edition is considered to be the definitive copy of the Urantia Book, given the fact that the handwritten and the typed versions of the original Urantia papers no longer exist.
Of the members of the Contact Commission, Lena Sadler died in 1939, Wilfred Kellogg in 1956, his wife Anna Kellogg in 1960, Bill Sadler Jr. in 1963, William Sadler in 1969, and “Christy” Christensen died in 1982.
So there you have it. The history of the Urantia Book, such as it is. It is indeed a very puzzling and incomplete history to say the least. There would seem to be only two possibilities to explain this history:
1. William Sadler led a conspiracy with the Contact Commission and Forum members to collectively formulate and write the Urantia Book.
2. The Urantia Book’s authors were superhuman beings who channeled its content through the sleeping subject, Wilfred Kellogg.
In his critical commentary, Martin Gardner surmises the following:
1. The sleeping subject, Wilfred Kellogg, was transmitting communications from his subconscious mind, rather than from superhuman beings.
2. William Sadler and his wife Lena were devout Adventists until the turn of the 20th century, when they became disillusioned with the Adventist religion and its then-leader Ellen White.
3. Over a period of years, the Sadlers came to believe that Wilfred Kellogg was God’s conduit for a new revelation that would be superior to Adventism, a revelation that would be essentially a new and better form of Christianity. Sadler believed that he was chosen as the messenger to bring this new utopia to humanity.
4. Sadler wrote or plagerized most of the content of the Urantia Book, with Forum members providing the rest.
There are only two possibilities. Either the Urantia Book was written by superhuman beings or it was written largely by William Sadler. After reading both the Urantia Book and Gardner’s critique in detail, I honestly cannot definitively decide between one or the other. The motivation and evidence for the Sadler authorship appears weak and speculative, but there is also little evidence of superhuman authorship, other than the highly unusual content of the Urantia Book itself.
In concluding this brief history of the Urantia Book, the only thing I can say is that you should read the Urantia Book in detail, and the other books on it that I have cited, and then try and decide for yourself. We now proceed to a summary of the relevant content of the Urantia Book.
Content of the Urantia Book:
As was mentioned, the Urantia Book is a total of 2097 pages of very dense and difficult reading. I have read the Urantia Book twice, cover-to-cover. It took me two readings, the first cursory and the second in-depth, in order to sufficiently understand the Urantia Book’s content, and even with that I still do not fully comprehend all the concepts that are being presented.
I also observed, as has the most important skeptic Martin Gardner, the remarkable consistency of the Book throughout its entire length. One has to wonder how such consistency was achieved by whoever wrote it. What I will do now is to try and summarize the aspects of the Urantia Book content that are most relevant to our current topic. For the most part, selected actual content of the Urantia Book will be employed for this purpose, since this is the best way to convey to the reader the character and nature of the material that the Book puts forth. These selections were made so as to convey the important concepts in as succinct a manner as possible. Each of these concepts is developed in considerably greater detail in the Urantia Book itself, and the Book also provides a wealth of other detailed information that is not presented here. I will restrict this summary to Parts I, II, and III only, and will not summarize Part IV, The Life and Teachings of Jesus, as you can read this for yourself, if you wish.
The Foreward to the Urantia Book (author listed as a Divine Counselor) begins as follows:
In the minds of the mortals of Urantia – that being the name of your world – there exists great confusion respecting the meaning of such terms as God, divinity, and deity. Human beings are still more confused and uncertain about the relationships of the divine personalities designated by these numerous appellations. Because of this conceptual poverty associated with so much ideational confusion, I have been directed to formulate this introductory statement in explanation of the meanings which should be attached to certain word symbols as they may be hereinafter used in those papers which the Orvonton corps of truth revealers have been authorized to translate into the English language of Urantia.
It is exceedingly difficult to present enlarged concepts and advanced truth, in our endeavor to expand cosmic consciousness and enhance spiritual perception, when we are restricted to the use of a circumscribed language of the realm. But our mandate admonishes us to make every effort to convey our meanings by using the word symbols of the English tongue. We have been instructed to introduce new terms only when the concept to be portrayed finds no terminology in English which can be employed to convey such a new concept partially or even with more or less distortion of meaning. …..
Your world, Urantia, is one of many similar inhabited planets which comprise the local universe of Nebadon. This universe, together with similar creations, makes up the superuniverse of Orvonton, from whose capital, Uversa, our commission hails. Orvonton is one of the seven evolutionary superuniverses of time and space which circle the never-beginning, never-ending creation of divine perfection – the central universe of Havona. At the heart of this eternal and central universe is the stationary Isle of Paradise, the geographic center of infinity and the dwelling place of the eternal God.
Deity and God:
The universe of universes presents phenomena of deity activities on diverse levels of cosmic realities, mind meanings, and spirit values, but all of these ministrations – personal or otherwise – are divinely co-ordinated.
Deity is personalizable as God, is prepersonal and superpersonal in ways not altogether comprehensible by man. Deity is characterized by the quality of unity – actual or potential – on all supermaterial levels of reality; and this unifying quality is best comprehended by creatures as divinity. ….
Divinity is the characteristic, unifying, and co-ordinating quality of Deity. Divinity is creature comprehensible as truth, beauty, and goodness; correlated in personality as love, mercy, and ministry; disclosed on impersonal levels as justice, power, and sovereignty. ….
Evolving mortal creatures experience an irresistible urge to symbolize their finite concepts of God. Man’s consciousness of moral duty and his spiritual idealism represent a value level – an experiential reality – which is difficult of symbolization.
Cosmic consciousness implies the recognition of a First Cause, the one and only uncaused reality. God, the Universal Father, functions on three Deity-personality levels of subinfinite value and relative divinity expression:
1. Prepersonal – as in the ministry of the Father fragments, such as the Thought Adjusters.
2. Personal – as in the evolutionary experience of created and procreated beings.
3. Superpersonal – as in the eventuated existences of certain absonite and associated beings. The absonite level of reality is characterized by things and beings without beginnings or endings and by the transcendence of time and space. Absoniters are not created; they are eventuated – they simply are.
GOD is a word symbol designating all personalizations of Deity. The term God always denotes personality. Deity may, or may not, refer to divinity personalities. The word GOD is used, in these papers (i.e. in the Urantia Book), with the following meanings:
1. God the Father – Creator, Controller, and Upholder. The Universal Father, the First Person of Deity.
2. God the Son – Coordinate Creator, Spirit Controller, and Spiritual Administrator. The Eternal Son, the Second Person of Deity.
3. God the Spirit – Conjoint Actor, Universal Integrator, and Mind Bestower. The Infinite Spirit, the Third Person of Deity.
4. God the Supreme – the actualizing or evolving God of time and space. Personal Deity associatively realizing the time-space experiential achievement of creature-Creator identity. The Supreme Being is personally experiencing the achievement of Deity unity as the evolving and experiential God of the evolutionary creatures of time and space.
5. God the Sevenfold – Deity personality anywhere actually functioning in time and space. The personal Paradise Deities and their creative associates functioning in and beyond the borders of the central universe and power-personalizing as the Supreme Being on the first creature level of unifying Deity revelation in time and space. This level, the grand universe, is the sphere of the time-space descension of Paradise personalities in reciprocal association with the time-space ascension of evolutionary creatures.
6. God the Ultimate – the eventuating god of supertime and transcending space. The second experiential level of unifying Deity manifestation. God the Ultimate implies the attained realization of the synthesized absonite-superpersonal, time-space-transcended, and eventuated-experiential values, coordinated on final creative levels of Deity reality.
7. God the Absolute – the experientializing god of transcended superpersonal values and divinity meanings, now existential as the Deity Absolute. This is the third level of unifying Deity expression and expansion. On this supercreative level, Deity experiences exhaustion of personalizable potential, encounters completion of divinity, and undergoes depletion of capacity for self-revelation to successive and progressive levels of other-personalization. Deity now encounters, impinges upon, and experiences identity with, the Unqualified Absolute.
Reality:
Reality, as comprehended by finite beings, is partial, relative, and shadowy. The maximum Deity reality fully comprehensible by evolutionary finite creatures is embraced within the Supreme Being. Nevertheless there are antecedent and eternal realities, superfinite realities, which are ancestral to this Supreme Deity of evolutionary time-space creatures. Attempting to portray the origin and nature of universal reality, we are forced to employ the technique of time-space reasoning in order to reach the level of the finite mind. Therefore must many of the simultaneous events of eternity be presented as sequential transactions.
As a time-space creature would view the origin and differentiation of Reality, the eternal and infinite I AM achieved Deity liberation from the fetters of unqualified infinity through the exercise of inherent and eternal free will, and this divorcement from unqualified infinity produced the first absolute divinity-tension. This tension of infinity differential is resolved by the Universal Absolute, which functions to unify and coordinate the dynamic infinity of Total Deity and the static infinity of the Unqualified Absolute.
In this original transaction the theoretical I AM achieved the realization of personality by becoming the Eternal Father of the Original Son simultaneously with becoming the Eternal Source of the Isle of Paradise. Co-existent with the differentiation of the Son from the Father, and in the presence of Paradise, there appeared the person of the Infinite Spirit and the central universe of Havona. With the appearance of coexistent personal Deity, the Eternal Son and the Infinite Spirit, the Father escaped, as a personality, from otherwise inevitable diffusion throughout the potential of Total Deity. Thenceforth it is only in Trinity association with his two Deity equals that the Father fills all Deity potential, while increasingly experiential Deity is being actualized on the divinity levels of Supremacy, Ultimacy, and Absoluteness.
The concept of the I AM is a philosophic concession which we make to the time-bound, space-fettered, finite mind of man, to the impossibility of creature comprehension of eternity existences – nonbeginning, nonending realities and relationships. To the time-space creature, all things must have a beginning save only the ONE UNCAUSED – the primeval cause of causes. Therefore do we conceptualize this philosophic value-level as the I AM, at the same time instructing all creatures that the Eternal Son and the Infinite Spirit are coeternal with the I AM; in other words, that there never was a time when the I AM was not the Father of the Son and, with him, of the Spirit.
The qualities of universal reality are manifest in Urantian human experience on the following levels:
1. Body. The material or physical organism of man. The living electrochemical mechanism of animal nature and origin.
2. Mind. The thinking, perceiving, and feeling mechanism of the human organism. The total conscious and unconscious experience. The intelligence associated with the emotional life reaching upward through worship and wisdom to the spirit level.
3. Spirit. The divine spirit that indwells the mind of man – the Thought Adjuster. This immortal spirit is prepersonal – not a personality, though destined to become a part of the personality of the surviving mortal creature.
4. Soul. The soul of man is an experiential acquirement. As a mortal creature chooses to “do the will of the Father in heaven”, so the indwelling spirit becomes the father of a new reality in human experience. The mortal and material mind is the mother of this same emerging reality. The substance of this new reality is neither material nor spiritual – it is morontial. This is the emerging and immortal soul, which is destined to survive mortal death and begin the Paradise ascension.
Personality. The personality of mortal man is neither body, mind, nor spirit; neither is it the soul. Personality is the one changeless reality in an otherwise ever-changing creature experience; and it unifies all other associated factors of individuality. The personality is the unique bestowal which the Universal Father makes upon the living and associated energies of matter, mind, and spirit, and which survives with the survival of the morontial soul.
Morontia is a term designating a vast level intervening between the material and the spiritual. It may designate personal or impersonal realities, living or nonliving energies. The warp of morontia is spiritual; its woof is physical.
Cosmology of the Universe of Universes:
According to the Urantia Book, the absolute center of the Universe of Universes (there are more than just one) is the Isle of Paradise. Paradise is the dwelling place of Deity, and has always been His dwelling place, and will always be His dwelling place. In addition, the Isle of Paradise is the only universally fixed location in the Universe of Universes. It is the fixed center of everything. Since it is fixed and does not move, it constitutes an absolute center of reference and directions for the rest of the Universes.
The Urantia Book states that vast regions of space surround the Isle of Paradise, in both the vertical and the horizontal directions. Space in the horizontal direction with respect to Paradise is called “pervaded space”. It is in pervaded space that all the current space-time elements of the grand universe exist. “Unpervaded space” exists in the vertical direction with respect to the Paradise Isle. In unpervaded space, none of the forces, energies, powers, and presences are present that exist in pervaded space. Essentially, nothing but space exists there. Unpervaded space can also be thought of as a “space reservoir” with respect to the characteristic of space respiration.
Space respiration has a two billion year cycle. During the first billion years, the pervaded space expands (with an associated contraction of the unpervaded space). During the second billion years, the pervaded space contracts. According to the Urantia Book, pervaded space (our space) is presently in an expansion mode.
The Urantia Book suggests visualizing pervaded space by imagining “a finite, but inconceivably large, V-shaped plane situated at right angles to both the upper and lower surfaces of Paradise, with its point nearly tangent to peripheral Paradise, and then visualize this plane in elliptical revolution about Paradise, its revolution would roughly outline the volume of pervaded space”.
The Grand Universe
Proceeding outward from Paradise through the horizontal extension of pervaded space, the master universe is existent in six concentric ellipses, the space levels encircling the central Isle:
1. The Central Universe – Havona
2. The Seven Superuniverses
3. The First Outer Space Level
4. The Second Outer Space Level
5. The Third Outer Space Level
6. The Fourth and Outermost Space Level
Havona, the central universe, is not a time creation; it is an eternal existence. This never-beginning, never-ending universe consists of one billion spheres of sublime perfection and is surrounded by the enormous dark gravity bodies. At the center of Havona is the stationary and absolutely stabilized Isle of Paradise, surrounded by its twenty-one satellites. Owing to the enormous encircling masses of the dark gravity bodies about the fringe of the central universe, the mass content of this central creation is far in excess of the total known mass of all seven sectors of the grand universe.
The Paradise-Havona System, the eternal universe encircling the eternal Isle, constitutes the perfect and eternal nucleus of the master universe; all seven of the superuniverses and all regions of outer space revolve in established orbits around the gigantic central aggregation of the Paradise satellites and the Havona spheres.
The Seven Superuniverses are not primary physical organizations; nowhere do their boundaries divide a nebular family, neither do they cross a local universe, a prime creative unit. Each superuniverse is simply a geographic space clustering of approximately one seventh of the organized and partially inhabited post-Havona creation, and each is about equal in the number of local universes embraced and in the space encompassed. Nebadon, your local universe, is one of the newer creations in Orvonton, the seventh superuniverse.
The Grand Universe is the present organized and inhabited creation. It consists of the seven superuniverses, with an aggregate evolutionary potential of around seven trillion inhabited planets, not to mention the eternal spheres of the central creation. But this tentative estimate takes no account of architectural administrative spheres, neither does it include the outlying groups of unorganized universes. The present ragged edge of the grand universe, its uneven and unfinished periphery, together with the tremendously unsettled condition of the whole astronomical plot, suggests to our star students that even the seven superuniverses are, as yet, uncompleted.
The Outer Space Levels. Far out in space, at an enormous distance from the seven inhabited superuniverses, there are assembling vast and unbelievably stupendous circuits of force and materializing energies. Between the energy circuits of the seven superuniverses and this gigantic outer belt of force activity, there is a space zone of comparative quiet, which varies in width but averages about four hundred thousand light-years. These space zones are free from star dust – cosmic fog. Our students of these phenomena are in doubt as to the exact status of the space-forces existing in this zone of relative quiet which encircles the seven superuniverses. But about one-half million light-years beyond the periphery of the present grand universe we observe the beginnings of a zone of an unbelievable energy action which increases in volume and intensity for over twenty-five million light-years. These tremendous wheels of energizing forces are situated in the first outer space level, a continuous belt of cosmic activity encircling the whole of the known, organized, and inhabited creation.
Still greater activities are taking place beyond these regions, for the Uversa physicists have detected early evidence of force manifestations more than fifty million light-years beyond the outermost ranges of the phenomena in the first outer space level. These activities undoubtedly presage the organization of the material creations of the second outer space level of the master universe.
The central universe is the creation of eternity; the seven superuniverses are the creations of time; the four outer space levels are undoubtedly destined to eventuate/evolve the ultimacy of creation. And there are those who maintain that the Infinite can never attain full expression short of infinity; and therefore do they postulate an additional and unrevealed creation beyond the fourth and outermost space level, a possible ever-expanding, never-ending universe of infinity. In theory we do not know how to limit either the infinity of the Creator or the potential infinity of creation, but as it exists and is administered, we regard the master universe as having limitations, as being definitely delimited and bounded on its outer margins by open space.
All units of cosmic energy are in primary revolution, are engaged in the execution of their mission, while swinging around the universal orbit. The universes of space and their component systems and worlds are all revolving spheres, moving along the endless circuits of the master universe space levels. Absolutely nothing is stationary in all the master universe except the very center of Havona, the eternal Isle of Paradise, the center of gravity.
Grand Universe Organizational Structure
Only the Universal Father knows the location and actual number of inhabited worlds in space; he calls them all by name and number. I can give only the approximate number of inhabited or inhabitable planets, for some local universes have more worlds suitable for intelligent life than others. Nor have all projected local universes been organized. Therefore the estimates which I offer are solely for the purpose of affording some idea of the immensity of the material creation.
There are seven superuniverses in the grand universe, and they are constituted approximately as follows:
The System. The basic unit of the supergovernment consists of about one thousand inhabited or inhabitable worlds. Blazing suns, cold worlds, planets too near the hot suns, and other spheres not suitable for creature habitation are not included in this group. These one thousand worlds adapted to support life are called a system, but in the younger systems only a comparatively small number of these worlds may be inhabited. Each inhabited planet is presided over by a Planetary Prince, and each local system has an architectural sphere (i.e. a constructed planet that does not revolve around a sun) as its headquarters and is ruled by a System Sovereign.
The Constellation. One hundred systems (about 100,000 inhabitable planets) make up a constellation. Each constellation has an architectural headquarters sphere and is presided over by three Vorondadek Sons, the Most Highs. Each constellation also has a Faithful of Days in observation, an ambassador of the Paradise Trinity.
The Local Universe. One hundred constellations (about 10,000,000 inhabitable planets) constitute a local universe. Each local universe has a magnificent architectural headquarters world and is ruled by one of the coordinate Creator Sons of God of the order of Michael. Each universe is blessed by the presence of a Union of Days, a representative of the Paradise Trinity.
The Minor Sector. One hundred local universes (about 1,000,000,000 inhabitable planets) constitute a minor sector of the superuniverse government; it has a wonderful headquarters world, wherefrom its rulers, the Recents of Days, administer the affairs of the minor sector. There are three Recent of Days, Supreme Trinity Personalities, on each minor sector headquarters.
The Major Sector. One hundred minor sectors (about 100,000,000,000 inhabitable worlds) make one major sector. Each major sector is provided with a superb headquarters and is presided over by three Perfections of Days, Supreme Trinity Personalities.
The Superuniverse. Ten major sectors (about 1,000,000,000,000 inhabitable planets) constitute a superuniverse. Each superuniverse is provided with an enormous and glorious headquarters world and is ruled by three Ancients of Days.
The Grand Universe. Seven superuniverses make up the present organized grand universe, consisting of approximately seven trillion inhabitable worlds plus the architectural spheres and the one billion inhabited spheres of Havona. The superuniverses are ruled and administered indirectly and reflectively from Paradise by the Seven Master Spirits. The billion worlds of Havona are directly administered by the Eternals of Days, one such Supreme Trinity Personality presiding over each of these perfect spheres.
Practically all of the starry realms visible to the naked eye on Urantia belong to the seventh section of the grand universe, the superuniverse of Orvonton. The vast Milky Way starry system represents the central nucleus of Orvonton, being largely beyond the borders of your local universe.
Uversa is the headquarters of Orvonton. Uversa is the spiritual and administrative headquarters for approximately one trillion inhabited or inhabitable worlds. The glory, grandeur, and perfection of the Orvonton capital surpass any of the wonders of the time-space creations.
Urantia:
Your world is called Urantia, and it is numbered 606 in the planetary group, or system, of Satania. This system has at present 619 inhabited worlds, and more than two hundred additional planets are evolving favorably toward being inhabited worlds at some future time.
Satania has a headquarters world called Jerusem, and it is system number twenty-four in the constellation of Norlatiadek. Your constellation, Norlatiadek, consists of one hundred local systems and has a headquarters world called Edentia. Norlatiadek is number seventy in the universe of Nebadon. The local universe of Nebadon consists of one hundred constellations and has a capital known as Salvington. The sovereign of Nebadon is a Creator Son of the Paradise order of Michael. The universe of Nebadon is number eighty-four in the minor sector of Ensa.
The minor sector of Ensa consists of one hundred local universes and has a capital called Uminor the third. This minor sector is number three in the major sector of Splandon. Splandon consists of one hundred minor sectors and has a headquarters world called Umajor the fifth. It is the fifth major sector of the superuniverse of Orvonton, the seventh segment of the grand universe. The headquarters world of Orvonton is Uversa. Thus you can locate your planet in the scheme of the organization and administration of the universe of universes.
The Satania system of inhabited worlds is far removed from Uversa and that great sun cluster which functions as the physical or astronomical center of the seventh superuniverse. From Jerusem, the headquarters of Satania, it is over 200,000 light-years to the physical center of the superuniverse of Orvonton, far, far away in the dense diameter of the Milky Way. Satania is on the periphery of the local universe, and Nebadon is now well out towards the edge of Orvonton.
The grand universe number of your world, Urantia, is 5,342,482,337,666. That is the registry number on Uversa and on Paradise, your number in the catalogue of the inhabited worlds.
5,000,000,000 years ago your sun was a comparatively isolated blazing orb, having gathered to itself most of the nearby circulating matter of space, remnants of the recent unheaval which attended its own birth.
4,500,000,000 years ago the enormous Angona system began its approach to the neighborhood of this solitary sun. The center of this great system was a dark giant of space, solid, highly charged, and possessing tremendous gravity pull.
As Angona more closely approached the sun, at moments of maximum expansion during solar pulsations, streams of gaseous material were shot out into space as gigantic solar tongues. At first these flaming gas tongues would invariably fall back into the sun, but as Angona drew nearer and nearer, the gravity pull of the gigantic visitor became so great that these tongues of gas would break off at certain points, the roots falling back into the sun while the outer sections would become detached to form independent bodies of matter, solar meteorites, which immediately started to revolve about the sun in elliptical orbits of their own.
As the Angona system drew nearer, the solar extrusions grew larger and larger; more and more matter was drawn from the sun to become independent circulating bodies in surrounding space. This situation developed for about five hundred thousand years until Angona made its closest approach to the sun; whereupon the sun, in conjunction with one of its periodic internal convulsions, experienced a partial disruption; from opposite sides and simultaneously, enormous volumes of matter were disgorged. From the Angona side there was drawn out a vast column of solar gases, rather pointed at both ends and markedly bulging at the center, which became permanently detached from the immediate gravity control of the sun. This great column of solar gases which was thus separated from the sun subsequently evolved into the twelve planets of the solar system.
2,500,000,000 years ago the planets had grown immensely in size. Urantia was a well-developed sphere about one tenth its present mass and was still growing rapidly by meteoric accretion.
1,000,000,000 years ago is the date of the actual beginning of Urantia history. The planet had attained approximately its present size. And about this time it was placed upon the physical registries of Nebadon and given its name, Urantia.
900,000,000 years ago witnessed the arrival on Urantia of the first Satania scouting party sent out from Jerusem to examine the planet and make a report on its adaptation for a life-experiment station. This commission consisted by twenty-four members, embracing Life Carriers, Lanonandek Sons, Melchizedeks, seraphim, and other orders of celestial life having to do with the early days of planetary organization and administration.
After making a painstaking survey of the planet, this commission returned to Jerusem and reported favorably to the System Sovereign, recommending that Urantia be placed on the life-experiment registry. Your world was accordingly registered on Jerusem as a decimal planet, and the Life Carriers were notified that they would be granted permission to institute new patterns of mechanical, chemical, and electrical mobilization at the time of their subsequent arrival with life transplantation and implantation mandates.
550,000,000 years ago the Life Carriers corps returned to Urantia. In cooperation with spiritual powers and superphysical forces we organized and initiated the original life patterns of this world and planted them in the hospitable waters of the realm.
1,000,000 years ago Urantia was registered as an inhabited world. A mutation within the stock of the progressing Primates suddenly produced two primitive human beings, the actual ancestors of mankind.
The Nature and Destiny of Human Beings:
Thought Adjusters:
Although the Universal Father is personally resident on Paradise, at the very center of the universes, he is also actually present on the worlds of space in the minds of his countless children of time, for he indwells them as the Thought Adjusters. The eternal Father is at one and the same time farthest removed from, and most intimately associated with, his planetary mortal sons.
The Adjuster is an absolute essence of an infinite being imprisoned within the mind of a finite creature which, depending on the choosing of such a mortal, can eventually consummate this temporary union of God and man and veritably actualize a new order of being for unending universe service. The Adjuster is the divine universe reality which factualizes the truth that God is man’s Father. The Adjuster is man’s infallible cosmic compass, always and unerringly pointing the soul Godward.
Since Thought Adjusters are of the essence of original Deity, no one may presume to discourse authoritatively upon their nature and origin; I can only impart the traditions of Salvington and the beliefs of Uversa; I can only explain how we regard these Mystery Monitors (i.e. Thought Adjusters) and their associated entities throughout the grand universe.
Though there are diverse opinions regarding the mode of the bestowal of Thought Adjusters, there exist no such differences concerning their origin; all are agreed that they proceed direct from the Universal Father, the First Source and Center. They are not created beings; they are fragmentized entities constituting the factual presence of the infinite God. Together with their many unrevealed associates, the Adjusters are undiluted and unmixed divinity, unqualified and unattenuated parts of Deity; they are of God, and as far as we are able to discern, they are God.
Can you really realize the true significance of the Adjuster’s indwelling? Do you really fathom what it means to have an absolute fragment of the absolute and infinite Deity, the Universal Father, indwelling and fusing with your finite mortal natures? When mortal man fuses with an actual fragment of the existential Cause of the total cosmos, no limit can ever be placed upon the destiny of such an unprecedented and unimaginable partnership.
We know that Thought Adjusters are spirits, pure spirits, presumably absolute spirits. But the Adjuster must also be something more than exclusive spirit reality. In addition to conjectured mindedness, factors of pure energy are also present. If you will remember that God is the source of pure energy and of pure spirit, it will not be so difficult to perceive that His fragments would be both. It is a fact that the Adjusters traverse space over the instantaneous and universal gravity circuits of the Paradise Isle.
Thought Adjusters are not personalities, but they are real entities; they are truly and perfectly individualized, although they are never, while indwelling mortals, actually personalized. Thought Adjusters are not true personalities; they are true realities, realities of the purest order known in the universe of universes – they are the divine presence. Though not personal, these marvelous fragments of the Father are commonly referred to as beings and sometimes, in view of the spiritual phases of their present ministry to mortals, as spirit entities.
If Thought Adjusters are not personalities having prerogatives of will and powers of choice, how then can they select mortal subjects and volunteer to indwell these creatures of the evolutionary worlds? This is a question easy to ask, but probably no being in the universe of universes has ever found the exact answer. Even my order of personality, the Solitary Messengers, does not fully understand the endowment of will, choice, and love in entities that are not personal.
We have often speculated that Thought Adjusters must have volition on all prepersonal levels of choice. They volunteer to indwell human beings, they lay plans for man’s eternal career, they adapt, modify, and substitute in accordance with circumstances, and these activities connote genuine volition. They have affection for mortals, they function in universe crises, they are always waiting to act decisively in accordance with human choice, and all these are highly volitional reactions. In all situations not concerned with the domain of the human will, they unquestionably exhibit conduct which betokens the exercise of powers in every sense the equivalent of will, maximated decision.
Why then, if Thought Adjusters possess volition, are they subservient to the mortal will? We believe it is because Adjuster volition, though absolute in nature, is prepersonal in manifestation. Human will functions on the personality level of universe reality, and throughout the cosmos the impersonal – the nonpersonal, the subpersonal, and the prepersonal – is ever responsive to the will and acts of existent personality.
Throughout a universe of created beings and nonpersonal energies we do not observe will, volition, choice, and love manifested apart from personality. Except in the Adjusters and other similar entities we do not witness these attributes of personality functioning in association with inpersonal realities. It would not be correct to designate an Adjuster as subpersonal, neither would it be proper to allude to such an entity as superpersonal, but it would be entirely permissible to term such a being prepersonal.
To our orders of being these fragments of Deity are known as the divine gifts. We recognize that the Adjusters are divine in origin, and that they constitute the probable proof and demonstration of a reservation by the Universal Father of the possibility of direct and unlimited communication with any and all material creatures throughout his virtually infinite realms, and all of this quite apart from his presence in the personalities of his Paradise Sons or through his indirect ministrations in the personalities of the Infinite Spirit.
There are no created beings that would not delight to be hosts to the Mystery Monitors, but no orders of beings are thus indwelt excepting evolutionary will creatures of finaliter destiny.
The Adjusters cannot invade the mortal mind until it has been duly prepared by the indwelling ministry of the adjutant mind-spirits and encircuited in the Holy Spirit. Creature mind must exhibit the worship outreach and indicate wisdom function by exhibiting the ability to choose between the emerging values of good and evil – moral choice. Adjusters reach their human subjects on Urantia, on the average, just prior to the sixth birthday.
The higher forms of intelligent intercommunication between human beings are greatly helped by the indwelling Adjusters. Animals do have fellow feelings, but they do not communicate concepts to each other; they can express emotions but not ideas and ideals. Neither do men of animal origin experience a high type of intellectual intercourse or spiritual communion with their fellows until the Thought Adjusters have been bestowed, albeit, when such evolutionary creatures develop speech, they are on the highroad to receiving Adjusters. Animals do, in a crude way, communicate with each other, but there is little or no personality in such primitive contact.
The Thought Adjuster and the Soul:
The concept of a soul and of an indwelling spirit is not new to Urantia; it has frequently appeared in the various systems of planetary beliefs. Many of the Oriental as well as some of the Occidental faiths have perceived that man is divine in heritage as well as human in inheritance. The feeling of the inner presence in addition to the external omnipresence of Deity has long formed a part of many Urantian religions. Men have long believed that there is something growing within the human nature, something vital that is destined to endure beyond the short span of temporal life.
In the conception of the atman the Hindu teachers really approximated an appreciation of the nature and presence of the Adjuster, but they failed to distinguish the copresence of the evolving and potentially immortal soul. The Chinese, however, recognized two aspects of a human being, the yang and the yin, the soul and the spirit.
The human personality is identified with mind and spirit held together in functional relationship by life in a material body. This functioning relationship of such mind and spirit does not result in some combination of the qualities or attributes of mind and spirit but rather in an entirely new, original, and unique universe value of potentially eternal endurance, the soul.
There are three and not two factors in the evolutionary creation of such an immortal soul. These three antecedents of the morontia human soul are:
1. The human mind and all cosmic influences antecedent thereto and impinging thereon.
2. The divine spirit indwelling this human mind and all potentials inherent in such a fragment of absolute spirituality together with all associated spiritual influences and factors in human life.
3. The relationship between material mind and divine spirit, which connotes a value and carries a meaning not found in either of the contributing factors to such an association. The reality of this unique relationship is neither material nor spiritual but morontial. It is the soul.
During the life in the flesh the evolving soul is enabled to reinforce the supermaterial decisions of the mortal mind. The soul, being supermaterial, does not of itself function on the material level of human experience. Neither can this subspiritual soul, without the collaboration of some spirit of Deity, such as the Adjuster, function above the morontia level. Neither does the soul make final decisions until death or translation divorces it from material association with the mortal mind expect when and as this material mind delegates such authority freely and willingly to such a morontia soul of associated function. During life the mortal will, the personality power of decision-choice, is resident in the material mind circuits; as terrestrial mortal growth proceeds, this self, with its priceless powers of choice, becomes increasingly identified with the emerging morontia-soul entity; after death and following the mansion world resurrection, the human personality is completely identified with the morontia self. The soul is thus the embryo of the future morontia vehicle of personality identity.
Personality Survival:
The evolutionary planets are the spheres of human origin, the initial worlds of the ascending mortal career. Urantia is your starting point; here you and your divine Thought Adjuster are joined in temporary union. You have been endowed with a perfect guide; therefore, if you will sincerely run the race of time and gain the final goal of faith, the reward of the ages shall be yours; you will be eternally united with your indwelling Adjuster. Then will begin your real life, the ascending life, to which your present mortal state is but the vestibule. Then will begin your exalted and progressive mission as finaliters in the eternity which stretches out before you. And throughout all of these successive ages and stages of evolutionary growth, there is one part of you that remains absolutely unaltered, and that is personality – permanence in the presence of change. Personality is changeless in the presence of change. It can make a gift to God – dedication of the free will to the doing of the will of God. It is characterized by morality – awareness of relativity of relationship with other persons.
Personality is unique, absolutely unique: It is unique in time and space; it is unique in eternity and on Paradise; it is unique when bestowed – there are no duplicates; it is unique during every moment of existence; it is unique in relation to God – He is no respecter of persons, but neither does He add them together, for they are unaddable – they are associable but nontotalable.
Personality may survive mortal death with identity in the surviving soul. The Adjuster and the personality are changeless; the relationship between them (in the soul) is nothing but change, continuing evolution; and if this change (growth) ceased, the soul would cease.
The Phenomenon of Death:
Urantians generally recognize only one kind of death, the physical cessation of life energies; but concerning personality survival there are really three kinds:
1. Spiritual (soul) death. If and when mortal man has finally rejected survival, when he has been pronounced spiritually insolvent, morontially bankrupt, in the conjoint opinion of the Adjuster and the surviving seraphim, when such coordinate advice has been recorded on Uversa, and after the Censors and their reflective associates have verified these findings, thereupon do the rulers of Orvonton order the immediate release of the indwelling Monitor. But this release of the Adjuster in no way affects the duties of the personal or group seraphim concerned with that Adjuster-abandoned individual. This kind of death is final in its significance irrespective of the temporary continuation of the living energies of the physical and mind mechanisms. From the cosmic standpoint the mortal is already dead; the continuing life merely indicates the persistence of the material momentum of cosmic energies.
2. Intellectual (mind) death. When the vital circuits of higher adjutant ministry are disrupted through the aberrations of intellect or because of the partial destruction of the mechanism of the brain, and if these conditions pass a certain critical point of irreparability, the indwelling Adjuster is immediately released to depart for Divinington. On the universe records a mortal personality is considered to have met with death whenever the essential mind circuits of human will-action have been destroyed. And again, this is death, irrespective of the continuing function of the living mechanism of the physical body. The body minus the volitional mind is no longer human, but according to the prior choosing of the human will, the soul of such an individual may survive.
3. Physical (body and mind) death. When death overtakes a human being, the Adjuster remains in the citadel of the mind until it ceases to function as an intelligent mechanism, about the time that the measurable brain energies cease their rhythmic vital pulsations. Following this dissolution the Adjuster takes leave of the vanishing mind, just as unceremoniously as entry was made years before, and proceeds to Divinington by way of Uversa.
After death the material body returns to the elemental world from which it was derived, but two nonmaterial factors of surviving personality persist: The pre-existent Thought Adjuster, with the memory transcription of the mortal career, proceeds to Divinington; and there also remains, in the custody of the destiny guardian, the immortal morontia soul of the deceased human. These phases and forms of soul, these once kinetic but now static formulas of identity, are essential to repersonalization on the morontia worlds; and it is the reunion of the Adjuster and the soul that reassembles the surviving personality, that reconsciousizes you at the time of the morontia awakening.
Upon death the Thought Adjuster temporarily loses personality, but not identity; the human subject temporarily loses identity, but not personality; on the mansion worlds both reunite in eternal manifestation. Never does a departed Thought Adjuster return to earth as the being of former indwelling; never is personality manifested without the human will; and never does a dis-Adjustered human being after death manifest active identity or in any manner establish communication with the living beings of earth. Such dis-Adjustered souls are wholly and absolutely unconscious during the long or short sleep of death. There can be no exhibition of any sort of personality or ability to engage in communications with other personalities until after completion of survival. Those who go to the mansion worlds are not permitted to send messages back to their loved ones. It is the policy throughout the universes to forbid such communication during the period of the current dispensation.
When the more spiritually and cosmically advanced mortals die, they proceed immediately to the mansion worlds; in general, this provision operates with those who have had assigned to them personal seraphic guardians. Other mortals may be detained until such time as the adjudication of their affairs has been completed, after which they may proceed to the mansion worlds, or they may be assigned to the ranks of the sleeping survivors who will be repersonalized en masse at the end of the current planetary dispensation.
There are two difficulties that hamper my efforts to explain just what happens to you in death, the surviving you which is distinct from the departing Adjuster. One of these consists in the impossibility of conveying to your level of comprehension an adequate description of a transaction on the borderland of the physical and morontia realms. The other is brought about by the restrictions placed upon my commission as a revelator of truth by the celestial governing authorities of Urantia. There are many interesting details which might be presented, but I withhold them upon the advice of your immediate planetary supervisors. But within the limits of my permission I can say this much:
There is something real, something of human evolution, something additional to the Mystery Monitor, which survives death. This newly appearing entity is the soul, and it survives the death of both your physical body and your material mind. This entity is the conjoint child of the combined life and efforts of the human you in liaison with the divine you, the Adjuster. This child of human and divine parentage constitutes the surviving element of terrestrial origin; it is the morontia self, the immortal soul.
This child of persisting meaning and surviving value is wholly unconscious during the period of death to repersonalization and is in the keeping of the seraphic destiny guardian throughout this season of waiting. You will not function as a conscious being, following death, until you attain the new consciousness of morontia on the mansion worlds of Satania.
During the transit of surviving mortals from the world of origin to the mansion worlds, whether they experience personality reassembly on the third period or ascend at the time of a group resurrection, the record of personality constitution is faithfully preserved by the archangels on their worlds of special activities. These beings are not the custodians of personality (as the guardian seraphim are of the soul), but it is nonetheless true that every identifiable factor of personality is effectually safeguarded in the custody of these dependable trustees of mortal survival. As to the exact whereabouts of mortal personality during the time intervening between death and survival, we do not know.
The situation which makes repersonalization possible is brought about in the resurrection halls of the morontia receiving planets of a local universe. Here in these life-assembly chambers the supervising authorities provide that relationship of universe energy – morontial, mindal, and spiritual – which makes possible the reconsciousizing of the sleeping survivor. The reassembly of the constituent parts of a onetime material personality involves:
1. The fabrication of a suitable form, a morontia energy pattern, in which the new survivor can make contact with nonspiritual reality, and within which the morontia variant of the cosmic mind can be encircuited.
2. The return of the Adjuster to the waiting morontia creature. The Adjuster is the eternal custodian of your ascending identity; your Monitor is the absolute assurance that you yourself and not another will occupy the morontia form created for your personality awakening. And the Adjuster will be present at your personality reassembly to take up once more the role of Paradise guide to your surviving self.
3. When these prerequisites of repersonalization have been assembled, the seraphic custodian of the potentialities of the slumbering immortal soul, with the assistance of numerous cosmic personalities, bestows this morontia entity upon and in the awaiting morontia mind-body form while committing this evolutionary child of the Supreme to eternal association with the waiting Adjuster. And this completes the repersonalization, reassembly of memory, insight, and consciousness – identity.
And when you thus awaken on the mansion worlds of Jerusem, you will be so changed, the spiritual transformation will be so great that, were it not for your Thought Adjuster and the destiny guardian, who so fully connect up your new life in the new worlds with your old life in the first world, you would at first have difficulty in connecting the new morontia consciousness with the reviving memory of your previous identity. Notwithstanding the continuity of personal selfhood, more of the mortal life would at first seem to be a vague and hazy dream. But time will clarify many mortal associations.
The Thought Adjuster will recall and rehearse for you only those memories and experiences which are a part of, and essential to, your universe career. If the Adjuster has been a partner in the evolution of aught in the human mind, then will these worth-while experiences survive in the eternal counsciousness of the Adjuster. But much of your past life and its memories, having neither spiritual meaning nor morontia value, will perish with the material brain; much of the material experience will pass away as onetime scaffolding which, having bridged you over to the morontia level, no longer serves a purpose in the universe. But personality and the relationships between personalities are never scaffolding; mortal memory of personality relationships has cosmic value and will persist. On the mansion worlds, you will know and be known, and more, you will remember and be remembered by, your onetime associates in the short but intriguing life on Urantia.
The mistakes of mortal mind and the errors of human conduct may markedly delay the evolution of the soul, although they cannot inhibit such a morontia phenomenon when once it has been initiated by the indwelling Adjuster with the consent of the creature will. But at any time prior to mortal death this same material and human will is empowered to rescind such a choice and to reject survival. Even after survival the ascending mortal still retains this prerogative of choosing to reject eternal life; at any time before fusion with the Adjuster the evolving and ascending creature can choose to forsake the will of the Paradise Father. Fusion with the Adjuster signalizes the fact that the ascending mortal has eternally and unreservedly chosen to do the Father’s will.
The human personality can truly destroy individuality of creaturehood, and though all that was worthwhile in the life of such a cosmic suicide will persist, these qualities will not persist as an individual creature. The Supreme will again find expression in the creatures of the universes but never again as that particular person; the unique personality of a non-ascender returns to the Supreme as a drop of water returns to the sea.
Such fused beings are twofold in their universe reactions: They are discrete morontia individuals not altogether unlike seraphim, and they are also beings in potential on the order of the Paradise finaliters.
On the mansion worlds, the resurrected mortal survivors resume their lives just where they left off when overtaken by death. When you go from Urantia to the first mansion world, you will notice considerable change, but if you had come from a more normal and progressive sphere of time, you would hardly notice the difference except for the fact that you were in possession of a different body; the tabernacle of flesh and blood has been left behind on the world of nativity.
Though you have morontia bodies, you continue, through all seven of these (morontia) worlds, to eat, drink, and rest. You partake of the morontia order of food, a kingdom of living energy unknown on the material worlds. Both food and water are fully utilized in the morontia body; there is no residual waste. Pause to consider: Mansionia number one is a very material sphere, presenting the early beginnings of the morontia regime. You are still a near human and not far removed from the limited viewpoints of mortal life, but each (morontia) world discloses definite progress. From (morontia) sphere to sphere you grow less material, more intellectual, and slightly more spiritual. The spiritual progress is greatest on the last three of these seven progressive worlds.
The present known destiny of surviving mortals is the Paradise Corps of the Finality; this is also the goal of destiny for all Thought Adjusters who become joined in eternal union with their mortal companions. At present the Paradise finaliters are working throughout the grand universe in many undertakings, but we all conjecture that they will have other and even more supernal tasks to perform in the distant future after the seven superuniverses have become settled in light and life, and when the finite God has finally emerged from the mystery which now surrounds this Supreme Deity.
You have been instructed to a certain extent about the organization and personnel of the central universe, the superuniverses, and the local universes; you have been told something about the character and origin of some of the various personalities who now rule these far-flung creations. You have also been informed that there are in process of organization vast galaxies of universes far out beyond the periphery of the grand universe, in the first outer space level. It has also been intimated in the course of these narratives that the Supreme Being is to disclose his unrevealed tertiary function in these now uncharted regions of outer space; and you have also been told that the finaliters of the Paradise corps are the experiential children of the Supreme.
We believe that the mortals of Adjuster fusion, together with their finaliter associates, are destined to function in some manner in the administration of the universes of the first outer space level. We have not the slightest doubt that in due time these enormous galaxies will become inhabited universes. And we are equally convinced that among the administrators thereof will be found the Paradise finaliters whose natures are the cosmic consequence of the blending of creature and Creator.
What an adventure! What a romance! A gigantic creation to be administered by the children of the Supreme, these personalized and humanized Adjusters, these Adjusterized and eternalized mortals, these mysterious combinations and eternal associations of the highest known manifestation of the essence of the First Source and Center and the lowest form of intelligent life capable of comprehending and attaining the Universal father. We conceive that such amalgamated beings, such partnerships of Creator and creature, will become superb rulers, matchless administrators, and understanding and sympathetic directors of any and all forms of intelligent life which may come into existence throughout these future universes of the first outer space level.
I have to say that there are some things about the Urantia Book that make me a bit uneasy about its content. First, there is the use of biblical-like names in the Book, names like Satania, Lucifer, Edentia, Jerusem, Havona, Seraphim, Ancient of Days, Melchizedeks, Salvington, Divinington, and Isle of Paradise. The use of these biblical-like names seems strange to me given the fact that the Urantia Book is not associated with the Bible of Christian religion. Another thing that disturbs me is the vast, vast numbers and levels of bureaucratic beings that are involved in the organization of the structure of the Urantia Book reality. It unfortunately seems that bureaucracy is inherent to the functioning of both physical and non-physical realms.
But perhaps the major conceptual difficulty I have with the Urantia Book is associated with the concept of the “I”. My spiritual intuition tells me that my “I” is essentially a differentiated “little bit” of the essence of God and that my “I” constitutes my immortal soul that is associated with my physical body and personality ego in this lifetime. It tells me that my “I” is both a “little bit” of God as well as the entirety of God, simultaneously. A physical analogy for this would be a wave in the ocean. The wave appears to be a differentiated unit from the ocean, but it is also the entire ocean itself at the same time. My “I” is a differentiated consciousness unit that is also connected to Universal Consciousness, which is my concept of God.
But there is also a larger “I” that is associated with my present “I” soul in this current physical lifetime. This “I” is my higher spiritual self. My “I” soul and my current physical ego personality are only a small portion of my higher spiritual “I” self, most of which always resides in the non-physical realm. My “I” higher self is a larger “bit” of Universal Consciousness. At death of the physical body, my “I” soul returns to the higher “I” self. My higher spiritual self strives for spiritual growth so that it can eventually be re-absorbed completely into Universal Consciousness. Such spiritual growth involves both experiencing many physical lifetimes via the mechanism of physical reincarnation of the “I”, followed by the “I” experiencing increasing higher levels in the non-physical realms once physical reincarnations are no longer necessary.
However, the Urantia Book speaks of the immortal Thought Adjuster, which is said to be without personality and without any “I-ness”. There is no “My” associated with the Thought Adjuster, until it conjoins itself with a personality. According to the Urantia Book, existence of a personality begins with birth into a physical life. Sometime after birth, the human personality forms by the conjoining of the physical mind/body with infusion of the Thought Adjuster. The human personality then develops as a result of the experiences and interactions it has during the lifetime and the free will choices that it makes in association with these experiences and interactions. Through a single lifetime on Earth, the conjoined physical mind/body and infused Thought Adjuster act in concert to develop a human personality, which the Urantia Book calls the non-physical “soul”.
At physical death, the personality soul and the Thought Adjuster are separated from each other, and a bureaucratic decision is made as to whether or not the personality soul that was developed in that lifetime is worthy of continued non-physical existence. If the personality soul is judged worthy of continued existence, it is re-united with its Thought Adjuster and the two then form an immortal personalized spirit which can continue up the various levels of non-physical growth and development. It is this joining by which a Thought Adjuster becomes personalized.
If the personality soul is not judged worthy of continued existence, it is not re-united with the Thought Adjuster and does not undergo any further development, although information about it is retained in the cosmic “database”. If this happens, the Thought Adjuster is what reincarnates into physical form again, for the development of a completely new personality soul that hopefully will be judged worthy of soul survival after physical death.
So the Urantia Book says that reincarnation of a non-physical soul into the physical realm does not occur. It says that there is no soul that undergoes increasing levels of spiritual growth through many physical reincarnations. It says the only thing that reincarnates is the non-personal Thought Adjuster which is already a little bit of the essence of God, and is perfect and has no need for spiritual growth. It says that the soul is formed in the first physical incarnation and upon physical death can only continue its existence and spiritual growth only if the personality associated with that soul is deemed worthy of continued non-physical survival so that it can fuse with its Thought Adjuster.
My spiritual intuition has a problem with this because it tells me that physical reincarnation of the soul for its spiritual development is a reality. Of course, there is also the possibility that my spiritual intuition in this current physical lifetime is incorrect. Whether or not the Urantia Book is correct about this is something that will reveal itself upon my physical death.
Pleiadian Interactions with Billy Meier:
Beginning in January 1975, Billy Meier had regular contacts and extensive discussions with a Pleiadian woman by the name of Semjase. Semjase appeared to Meier as an attractive Nordic-looking woman in her early 30s. She spoke to Meier in perfect German. Given below is their conversation upon first meeting, as remembered by Billy Meier and recorded in the book “Message From the Pleiades: The Contact Notes of Billy Meier” by Wendelle Stevens.
Billy Meier recorded very extensive contact notes about his many conversations with Semjase. He found that his word-for-word conversations with Semjase were coming into his mind just as if they had been recorded on a tape recorder. He later discovered that these conversations were indeed being recorded by the Pleiadians and then being played back into his mind from a computer-like device on their spacecraft. He could then write down (and later type down on a typewriter) a perfect record of his interactions with Semjase.
Semjase told Meier that in Earth years, she was 330 years old, although she physically appeared to be only about 32 years old. She said the average lifetime of Pleiadians was 1000 years.
Semjase then told Meier about the nature of her mission in contacting him:
Semjase:
You are a fearless human being.
Billy:
I have unlearned the anxiety and have become objective.
Semjase:
I know, as we have been studying you for years.
Billy:
Very nice, and why?
Semjase:
Because we would like to clarify some things through you.
Billy:
Isn’t someone else suitable for that?
Semjase:
Certainly, but we have kept an eye on you, because you have been preoccupied with these problems in other personalities for many thousands of years, and because you think and act in a real and honest way, and because you have already often carried out such a mission in your former lives, even though great mysteries surround this for us.
Billy:
Thanks for the “flowers”.
Semjase:
No need to, because they are your own merit.
Billy:
Fine, but who are you, really?
Semjase:
You can just call me you, like I do too.
Billy:
Thanks – but now, who are you?
Semjase:
I am called Semjase and I come from the Pleiades.
Already for a long time we have felt the urge to get in touch with a human being on the Earth who wants to be helpful in honesty and very real to our task. This attempt has already been made very often, but the chosen human beings were not knowing and willing enough, and there was often also a lack of honesty and loyalty. Those whom we could have engaged in our efforts, however, were afraid and remained silent about our appearance. They claimed that they would be insulted for spirit-illness and that attempts would be made through official and foolish human intrigues to destroy them and accuse them of lying.
Instead, however, very many human beings seeking renown appeared, who claimed to have contact with us and even to have flown in our beamships. But they are nothing other than charlatans and deceivers, who want to bask in dubious glory and capitalise on it. The Earth-humans have entire organisations that deal with reconnaissance of our beamships, but among them all, there is only very little material that is really genuine. They are in possession of very many photos, which, however, depict nothing more than some lights and light phenomena of natural origin or quite deliberate counterfeits. Only very few of these photographic proofs are genuine and really show our beamships. Most of the photos are just montages or forged recordings made by deceivers and charlatans, whose names thereby became known worldwide. Their books and their writings written in this way represent also only an evil fraud for the purpose of seeking renown or charlatanry.
On the other hand, however, many dare to associate us with the human religion, with which we have nothing to do and also never want anything to do. Your so-called sectarians do not even shy away from this step and are themselves deceiving their fellow human beings with the belief. These infamous and tentatively primitive machinations should be stopped before the world is completely gripped by them. If the deceivers and charlatans were actually linked to us and, thus, were standing or have stood in contact with us, then we would have given them the opportunity to create very clear photo evidence of our beamships. But since they are dishonest human beings, we have not given them this opportunity.
As proof for this fact, we gave you the opportunity to take clear pictures of one of our beamships. But we will also continue to give you such opportunities to create even better and clearer picture evidence. The Earth-human calls us "extraterrestrials" or "star people" or whatever he/she likes. He/she imputes supernaturality to us and does not know us in the least. In reality, we are human beings just like the Earth-humans, except that our knowledge and our essence of wisdom are far superior to theirs, so also from a technological point of view.
It is true that the Earth-human has taken the first very small step towards outer space flight, but that means nothing more than the first rather primitive attempts.
Even though he/she has reached the moon with rockets, he/she still hasn't reached the outer space yet. He/she would also never reach it in the present form; what is needed for this is a propulsion system capable of penetrating hyperspace and causing the unending distances to collapse. Space and time are not overcome by space and time, but by the spaceless and the timeless, which means that space and time collapse in themselves and become equally directed to null time. As a result, a few fractions of a second can suffice to rush through millions of light years, practically without a loss of time, because null time paralyzes space and time.
Many deceivers and charlatans claim that they would be in contact with planetary human beings of your solar system and that they have even flown with or in their beamships. That is nothing more than a lie, as for the most part, the stars mentioned by them and their planets are so inhospitable that human life would be impossible.
Other planets, on the other hand, have long since died out of life, or they are only in the developmental stages. Other solar systems, however, harbour a variety of lives, not just human ones. The forms of life are diverse – human as well as animal. Also, many animal or even plant life forms have developed to highly advanced level of life. So there are species who have attained great knowledge and have freed themselves from their spheres of life, who travel outer space and also come to your Earth every now and then.
Many of them, however, are unpleasant contemporaries and live in a certain barbarism, which is often almost as bad as that of the Earth-human. One must watch out for them because they often combat and destroy everything that gets in their way. Already often they have destroyed entire planets or forced their inhabitants into barbaric slavery. This is one of our tasks: To warn the Earth-human about these creatures.
Another task is aimed at the sects and religions and the underdevelopment of human consciousness associated with these. Above all there is only one thing that possesses the power over life and death of every creature. This is the Creation alone, who has laid out her laws over everything – laws that are irrefutable and that have eternal validity. The human being can recognise them in nature, if he/she strives for it. They show him/her the path of life and the path to the spiritual and consciousness-based greatness, which represent the life-determination. But as the human being indulges in his/her religions, and thus in evil irrational teachings, his/her consciousness atrophies more and more and leads ultimately to a bottomless abyss. The human being may realise that a god can never assume the role of the Creation or determine the destiny of the human being. A god is only a ruler and moreover a human being, who mightily exercises rule or tyranny over his fellow human beings. God is not the Creation, but only a creature of her, like all creatures dependent on the Creation. However, the human being chases after his/her religious irrational belief and claims that God is the Creation herself.
Semjase says that she is on a two-fold mission. The first is to make humans aware that they are part of a vast universe of life that exists in many forms. The vast distances between the stars are traversed by ships that operate through hyperspace, which she says is non-space and non-time. Vast distances can be traversed in minute amounts of time. Semjase warns about extraterrestrials who are not friendly and might seek to subjugate Earth humans.
The second part of her mission is to reveal to human beings the true nature of spirituality. Semjase says that God is really Creation, and that all the present human religions are incorrect in their views about God. Interestingly, she refers to Creation using the feminine “she”. Furthermore, Semjase specifically says that Jesus Christ was a highly spiritual Earth human, but not the Son of God as Christianity believes.
Semjase conveyed information about Earth and human history to Meier. She said that there was indeed a “great flood”, which happened about 10,000 years ago. The source of this worldwide calamity was the close passage of a giant comet, which she called the Destroyer. The comet came very close to the Earth and actually altered its orientation and rotational rate. It altered the orbit of Earth and changed its orientation and rotational period from 40 hours to the present 24 hours. Because of this, there were tremendous cataclysms, such as earthquakes, volcano eruptions, and gigantic tsunamis which constituted the “great flood”. Semjase said that this Destroyer comet periodically encounters the Earth and has a period of 575 years. It was last here in 1680 and will appear again in the year 2255. The last major effects encounter was 3500 years ago, but these effects were not as catastrophic as those 10,000 years ago.
Semjase also had some interesting things to say about the planet Venus. She said that Venus was originally located a vast distance from the Sun, but was caught up in the gravitational field of the Destroyer comet, causing it to be repositioned between Mercury and the Earth.
Semjase stated that 50,000 years ago, a group of 70,000 advanced human beings from another solar system in the universe migrated to Earth. She said that these advanced humans procreated the primal human races of the Earth, and that we Earth humans are their descendants. This is apparently the reason that Semjase and the Pleiadians look so similar to we humans.
Semjase provided insights into the developmental life of a human consciousness, which involved both physical and non-physical existences over truly vast periods of time:
1. Primary life:
1) Primary development of the intellect and the consciousness.
2) Primary intellectual and consciousness-based thinking.
3) Primary intellect-based thinking.
4) Primary use of intellect and consciousness-power.
5) Primary intellectual actions.
6) Primary willful thinking and acting.
7) Intellectual conduct of the life.
Life forms in these stages are designated by already rationality-endowed beings as mentally ill (ill in consciousness), as idiots etc., whose consciousness and intellect, however, are in reality simply not yet developed in knowledge-based terms (new spirit, who has to first form itself through learning and experience etc.).
2. Rationality-based life:
1) Primary development of rationality.
2) Effective realisation of the rationality and its use.
3) Primary recognition and acknowledgement of higher influences.
4) Belief in higher influences without having knowledge.
5) Belief in higher powers, deluded belief, fear of evil, veneration of what is good, etc. and so on. Germination time for religions etc.
Present stage of the average Earth-human.
6) Primary recognition of the real reality. Stage of knowledge-based development. Research, first spiritual cognitions and their use: "spiritual healing”, telepathy, etc. etc.
7) Primary development of knowledge and essence of wisdom.
3. Intellect-based life:
1) High-level development of the intellect. High technology, second use of spiritual power with first cognitions. Primary procreation of life forms. Present stage of the educated Earth-human = scientists, etc.
2) Realisation and use of knowledge, truth and essence of wisdom. Slow reduction of belief-assumptions.
3) First utilisation of knowledge and essence of wisdom.
4) Recognition and utilisation of the laws of nature. Creation of hyper technology. Second procreation of life forms.
5) Natural use of knowledge and essence of wisdom in recognition of spiritual powers. Further reduction of belief-assumptions.
6) Life in the knowledge of the essence of wisdom, truth and the logic.
Present stage of some few borderline and humanities scholars
7) Primary recognition of the reality as real Absolutum.
4. Real life:
1) Clear knowledge about the reality as real Absolutum.
2) Recognition of the spiritual knowledge and the spiritual essence of wisdom.
3) Utilisation of the spiritual knowledge and the spiritual essence of wisdom.
4) Recognition of the reality of the Creation and her laws.
5) Life according to the creational laws. Clarification of the spirit and the intellect. Recognition of the real task and power of the spirit. Total reduction of all belief-assumptions.
6) Deliberate and directed utilisation of spiritual and consciousness-based powers.
7) Procreation of first viable life forms.
5. Creational life:
1) Procreation and direction of life forms.
2) Creation of machine/apparatus-based viable life forms.
3) Development of spiritual and consciousness-based power for the control of material and organic life forms. Present stages of our races.
4) Willful control of the life and all its forms and species.
5) Stage of recognitions. Recollections of past lives, etc.
6) Essence of wisdom kingship = JHWH. The second to last highest might-knowledge.
7) Recognition of the spiritual peace, the universal love, and the creational harmony.
6. Spiritual life:
1) Acknowledgment and realisation of the spiritual peace, the universal love and the creational harmony.
2) Life in purely spiritual forms.
3) Spiritual creations.
4) Disembodiment of the spirit from organic bodies.
5) First spiritual existence.
6) Final spiritual existence.
7) Transition into the Creation.
7. Creation-life:
1) Twilight sleep over seven periods (eternities).
2) Awakening and beginning of creating in the Creation as Creation, during seven periods/eternities.
3) Creating of life forms.
4) Creating of new spirit in the relative absolute fulfilment of the Creation.
5) Creation of spiritual greatness in the Creation.
6) Relative absolute fulfilment of the Creation in the Creation.
7) Last attaining of highest absolutely full development of the seventh period/eternity.
The twilight sleep of the Creation outlasts 7 periods/eternities/great times (311,040,000,000,000 years amount to one period/eternity/great time). By the twilight sleep of the Creation, all life and the entire universe cease to exist. Only after her newly awakening does she begin to create everything anew. During her twilight sleep there is neither space nor time; there is only the nothing, since they lie asleep in the unending womb of the Creation and the null time. If there is no creating thought, then there is also no power, no time, and no space; there is only duration in the nameless nothing.
The description that Semjase provided about the seven stages of human development are interesting. The first stage, Primary life, would represent the cave man type of prehistory level. She indicates that the present stage of the average Earth human is the second, Rationality-based life. Current advanced human thinkers are said to be at the Intellect-based life level. The next Real life level is one that Earth humans are on the verge of attaining. The Creational life is the level the Pleiadians are presently at. One should note that this level seems to be associated with the creation of life forms, both biological and android-type. Semjase said that the Pleiadians have not yet attained the next two higher levels, Spiritual life and Creation life levels, which are associated with non-physical forms of existence. She said that the Pleiadians have only limited knowledge of these types of existence.
At the end of the highest Creation level, Semjase indicated that Creation goes into a “sleep” mode that lasts approximately seven times 311,000,000,000,000 years. During this sleep period, the universe and all life ceases to exist, and there is only the Nothing. Interestingly, in the Hindu religion, there is the “sleep of Brahma”, which is also said to last 311 trillion years. Scholars have always been puzzled as to how such a large number came to be in the Hindu theology. After the sleep, Creation awakes and a new universe with new life is created.
Billy Meier asked Semjase to explain to him the “world of spirits”. Here is Semjase’s description:
A "world of spirits," as you called it, does not exist. There are only the fine-fluidal worlds in this regard. These are worlds that are located in other dimensions and harbour bodiless spirit forms.
When a spirit leaves a material body, then it cannot simply settle down anywhere; it must inhabit a body again, i.e. it enters a fine-fluidal world, thus a world of spirit forms, of which there are countless ones. There, the spirit lives as its own form for so long, until it returns again into a newly created host body. This means that every spirit form normally has a residence (body) that is specially tailored to it, in which it lives through its life in material form.
Over an entire main period one can thus observe that the facial features of the host body are not always alike and that they therefore change very noticeably. This applies until a high spiritual level is reached. Not with very low, but with very high spiritual levels the faces of all host bodies of the various spirit beings begin to resemble each other.
So when a guest body has died then the spirit leaves it and normally enters a fine-fluidal world. There too it has to live through certain periods again, before it can call upon a host body anew. But if a host body is due to some circumstances destroyed with Gewaltsamkeit and prematurely, before it is brought to life by the spirit on the 21st day, then it can happen that the spirit in question does not as soon as possible look for another host body and inhabits it, but that it remains in the realm of the other world. So it won't then penetrate into bodies that are already occupied. Therefore, this won't have as a consequence that two spirits live in a single host body and cause serious confusion. There are thus no possibilities for that. So the normal process is that the spirit re-enters the fine-fluidal world and in turn while learning spends another period there.
The overall consciousness-blocks, which enter fine-fluidal worlds like the spirit forms themselves, are no further along in their knowledge than they were in their material life. Untruth and lies and very deliberate deception are still characteristic of them as well. Therefore the materially living ones should not want to get in touch with them, because they could be lied to on a large scale. It would be better for the living ones to increase their knowledge through their own consciousness-work than to aim to acquire it in this way, because in many cases they would only be led into the unreal. Of course, there are also overall consciousness-blocks that would be able to respond in an honest mentality. However, there are few of them, and they live in higher spheres because they are further developed consciousness-wise.
Semjase described the spirit world as being the “fine-fluidal” world. This world is composed of energy and not matter, as our three-dimensional world is. Matter is essentially compressed energy, which she terms as coarse material. She said there are many of these fine-fluidal worlds and they exist in dimensions other than our current three-dimensional state. Interestingly, she indicated that the process of entering the fine-fluidal world upon death does not make the spirit increase in its spiritual development at the time that it died. Spiritual growth requires continuous cycles of learning and experience.
Semjase explained to Meier in general terms how energy and matter were created by The Creation:
The principle is very simple; however, I'm not allowed to tell it. However, it is a fact that any energy can be converted into solid forms. It is only necessary to highly focus and highly concentrate the respective energy, whereby it can be converted into solid material. In this way the elementary building blocks of the solid substance of the material are created; neutron, proton and electron. From these, the atoms and the variety of the chemical compounds form, which then in their three (3) different states of aggregation form the solid external casing, which is nevertheless known to your scientists.
Solid material as well as ur-kind of energy are in every respect of equal value. That is to say that ur-kind of energy is absolute material, just as ur-kind of material is absolute energy. That means that without exception anything in the universe consists of material or energy. The two terms, energy and material, represent fundamentally one and the same, but they specify their two different forms: the coarse-substantial and the fine-fluidal. Coarse-substantial means material; fine-fluidal means energy.
Material is the embodiment of an idea. As energy, material is fine-fluidal, and as mass, it is just highly concentrated and condensed. Both types can be produced by apparatus, which you too are already practicing in various forms. Normally, however, they are produced completely naturally, namely through spiritual power, which is preceded by the idea. Fundamentally, the Creation is responsible for this; a tremendous spiritual form, a factor that, in turn, embodies ur-kind of energy. It is from the Creation that the idea arises. The power of the spirit (which, in turn, embodies energy) then condenses and concentrates the idea into fine-fluidal energy, which is then condensed by even greater concentration into the coarse-substantial, into the material.
Meier asked Semjase what the vast spiritual formation of The Creation was. She replied that it consists of Idea, condensed in Itself towards Itself to originate spiritual energy. She said that the Pleiadians do not know much more than this.
Semjase gave Meier a further description of the prehistory of Earth humans:
At our fifth contact I finished the history of humankind at the time when 50,000 years ago according to the earthly calendar our homeworlds found freedom and peace. Before that time, 70,000 human beings fled under the leadership of the scientist Pelegon. With spaceships, which they had seized, they fled through the space out of another configuration of space and time into the one of the Milky Way of the DERN universe and settled on the Earth.
Pelegon's leadership, there were 200 sub-leaders; scientists who were each responsible for a specific field of knowledge. Pelegon was unanimously recognized and respected by them and all others as king of essence of wisdom (JHWH / God). In the course of the millennia they built large cities and inhabited all continents of the Earth. Unfortunately, this only went well for barely 10,000 years before lust for might regained the upper hand and a deadly war raged over the world. Everything without residue was destroyed, and only a few thousand human beings were able to survive, while others fled again into the outer space and into the old space-time configuration and settled on distant worlds.
For the next 7,000 years the Earth was no longer flown to, during which time those who stayed behind became completely wild and degenerated. After that the descendants of those who had settled on distant worlds returned. Again they were led by to YHWH. Under such a kind of JHWH command, the distant descendants later built Atlantis and Mu. Two huge cities on two different continents.
For thousands of years, they lived in complete friendship and in peace, until some scientists again succumbed to the greed for might and wanted to seize the rule. However, having become tired of the constant wars, the peoples rose against them, hence they seized spacecrafts and fled into the outer space; according to earthly calendar about 15,000 years ago.
For two millennia they and their descendants lived in a neighboring solar system. Two millennia during which they had become very evil and were only able to uphold a certain regulation under the strictest discipline. Through mutations and researches they achieved a very long life span, which to more than three thousand years.
Obsessed with imperiousness, they left their world about 13,500 Earth-years ago and came back to the Earth. Their supreme leader was the scientist ARUS, who was also called "The Barbarian." As already JHWH Pelegon nearly 50,000 years ago, he also had 200 leaders or subleaders, who were each responsible for a specific field of knowledge. They settled in two parts in the far north and in today's America (Florida), whereby they constantly forged ahead to Atlantis and Mu, in order to invade them with war. And only a few millennia after their renewed requisitioning of the Earth, they succeeded in completely destroying Mu and Atlantis.
Few survivors went into servitude, while great scientists were able to flee and returned to the original homeworlds in the Pleiades. But thousands of years before that point in time, the new intruders spread across the Earth, and JHWH ARUS ruled with a firm and bloody hand. But also his subleaders usurped all kinds of things and made themselves more and more independent. Within only three decades, they acted largely at their own discretion, even though they feared the punishments of the JHWH ARUS. They pushed very far away from them the codex of preserving their own race pure under all circumstances and not allowing it to fall prey to mutations.
Forbidden and secretly, they went out and captured earth-created life-forms; but so also turned wild or mutated beings, which were very distant descendants of former human beings from the outer space. The female creatures, beautiful in their wildness, were tamed and copulated with or fertilized with genetic manipulation by the leaders who called themselves celestial sons. Case by case depending on their own races, they thus created mutated creatures; Completely new life forms that were of dwarfish stature, very gigantic or similar to animal forms.
Semjasa, the supreme leader of all subleaders, copulated with an EVA; a female creature who, according to his understanding, was still preserved as the most human-like and also quite beautiful one. The descendant of this act was of male gender and a human being in good form. Semjasa called him Adam, which is tantamount to HUMAN BEING OF EARTH.
Another copulation of the same kind brought forth a female creature, and in later years Semjasa determined that these two Adams had to mate together. In the meantime, however, many other creatures of the same kind were conceived, who banded together into large groups and tribes. From them today's humankind developed, which was already at its ur-beginning according to its races distributed to the most different continents.
According to Semjase, 50,000 years ago 70,000 Pleiadians fled from their home world in the Pleiades and settled on Earth. They built large cities and occupied all areas of the Earth. But unfortunately, there was a world war amongst the groups of these Pleiadians that took place 40,000 years ago, and all of them were destroyed except for a few thousand of the Pleiadian human beings. During the next 7000 years, these survivors descended into a barbaric state, and probably became cave-type men. But then, new settlers from the Pleiades arrived on Earth. These new settled built the civilizations of Atlantis and Mu.
About 15,000 years ago, a splinter group the Pleiadians left the Earth and settled in a neighboring solar system. This group then returned to the Earth 13,500 years ago, and went to war with Atlantis and Mu, subsequently destroying these civilizations. These new Pleiadians began copulating with some of the barbaric Earth females, and produced giant-type species. However, the leader of these Pleiadians copulated with a beautiful Earth female, and produced Adam and Eve. Adam and Eve’s descendants populated the Earth as the current homo sapiens, while the other gigantic species died out.
One intriguing thing in this account of Semjase’s is that it bears a certain resemblance to the account in the Book of Enoch about the “Sons of God” coming to Earth and having children with the “daughters of men”.
Now, Semjase instructed Meier about the spiritual development of Earth humans. This represents the essence of her spiritual teaching (Tenth Contact, “Message From the Pleiades”):
It is now time to speak about things that are very important in the sense of the development of the consciousness and of the spirit of the human being of Earth.
The human being is bearer of a spirit that does not die and that, even in deepest sleep of the human being, never sleeps, that records all thoughts and impulsations, that tells the human being whether his/her thoughts are right or wrong, if he/she has learned to pay attention to it. This spirit within the human being is the bearer of the creational realm, and it is characteristic of all human beings.
It is incomprehensible that the human being speaks of a heaven and of a kingdom of heaven in him- or herself and does not simply content with just saying: Creation, truth, knowledge, essence of wisdom, spirit, consciousness and existence. The human yearning lies in the joy that remains, in the immortal life, the lasting peace, the spiritual and consciousness-based richness that never passes and lasts eternally. Firmaments and Earth will pass away, but truth, knowledge, essence of wisdom and spirit will never be variable or pass away.
In the dream the human being is able to create worlds of miracles, just as the Creation consciously creates the worlds. For the human being this ability grows out of his/her consciousness, which in the existence is present in him/her, in the same way as all miracles are present in him/her. He/she himself/herself is the kingdom of heaven, the kingdom of the creational. That is why the ancient philosophers of the Earth spoke of the human being as the microcosm in the macrocosm, because everything that is contained in the universe is also present in the human being.
The dimensions of the inner within the human being are endless. The image of the Creation, the spirit in him/her, the existence that is dimensionless, it includes all dimensions in it and at the same time transcends all dimensions. Hence everything comes from within.
The human being may be externally old, but this is only a transitional matter. Fifty years ago he/she was not old yet and will also no longer be old in fifty years when his/her body is dead, because only it can become old and frail. The spirit, however, remains eternally young and is never subject to signs of aging. The age is something like the youth or the childhood, like worries, grief or problems, something that passes, in the same way as all external conditions and experiences of the world pass.
What is lasting is the existence of the spirit, the truth, the knowledge, the essence of wisdom, the reality. If the human being recognises the existence of his or her spirit, then the old age can no longer inflict anything on him/her. No worries, no grief, no problem, no changes and no vicissitudes of the life and the surroundings, the environment and the world will still be able to cast him into sorrow.
Essence of wisdom is the characteristic of a human being who has recognised the existence of his or her spirit and of the material consciousness and who works with it based on the laws of the Creation. Essence of wisdom is consciousness-unfolding as well as use of consciousness-power and use of spiritual power. Essence of wisdom and spirit as well as consciousness and truth are each two things that constitute one, just as the sunlight and the Sun are two things. The sunlight only results from the warmth of the Sun, which it first has to generate through its processes.
But so, too, there is an all-creating existence in the universe, which existence creates, by virtue of own powers, powers, which, following certain creational laws, follow as truth, knowledge, and essence of wisdom the endless aeons constantly and unswervingly according to a given equal guideline, and give life. This powerful existence, however, is the Creation. And therefore there is only one existence which rules everywhere in the universe – only one Creation, only one truth, one knowledge, and one essence of wisdom, which are equally directed and remaining the same for eternal times. The eternal truth is not subject to any fluctuations or any changes, and its laws never have to be revised and, therefore, never have to be adapted to a new time.
It is a sign of human weakness when religions and sects and their irrational teachings are portrayed as instruments of the creational, and the essence of wisdom thereby becomes unreal. The human being is then looking elsewhere for power, freedom, joy and light, just not where they really are. A human being who is filled with love is also rich in essence of wisdom, and a human being who is rich in essence of wisdom is also full of love.
A human being is no real human being until s/he has recognized and created the truth, the knowledge and the essence of wisdom, even if s/he does not use the word Creation, since essence of wisdom is also love in best form. Thus, s/he always finds that enlightenment and recognition are knowledge and also essence of wisdom and love, and where there is love there is also essence of wisdom. Love and essence of wisdom belong together, because the Creation and the laws of Creation are love and essence of wisdom at the same time. Where there is essence of wisdom and knowledge, there is love and cognition, and where there is cognition and love, there is the Creation.
The path of the consciousness-power and the spiritual power goes beyond the cognition of the truth, the knowledge, the essence of wisdom and the love. Sense and task of the spiritual teaching therefore are to spread truth, knowledge, essence of wisdom and love. If the teaching fails to do so due to misuse or false interpretation, then it is no longer a help, but instead becomes an evil cult that enslaves the material consciousness through irrational teachings and creates unknowledgeness, as is the case with the irrational teachings of the sects and religions. But if it exercises the function of the consciousness-widening and the spiritual knowledge-widening, then it is a mightful instrument of the creational regulation. The spiritual teaching is about the spreading of the cognition, the truth, the knowledge, the essence of wisdom and the love, the eternal, the immortal, the everlasting that overcomes the death and spreads light, that manifests the equalisedness of the essence of wisdom and the love in itself, the peace that surpasses all understanding.
Every human being believes to know what is meant by peace, by the way s/he knows it according to human experience. But to understand the wise peace of the unending existence, of the spirit, of the immortal Creation, that quite simply surpasses his/her human understanding. This is because s/he is chained to religious irrational teachings and to human-material things which deprive him/her of an understanding according to inner experience. The experience, which forms the true key to the true cognition and essence of wisdom.
Miracles upon miracles are contained in the kingdom of the spirit. The visible universe, with which the human being is concerned, is but a small spot in this wonderful, unending, spiritual intelligence of the Creation. Universes like this one are contained in countless thousand millions in the unending spiritual intelligence of the Creation. What is visible to the physical eyes of the human being means only a small iota in the endlessness.
What is not visible to his/her eyes is unmeasurable, uncomprehensible, and unthinkable, confusing, and unimaginable to his/her unspiritual human intelligence and comprehension. All the universe, which s/he sees, is but one single space of many, which must be measured by myriads, because there are universes in universes, universes beyond universes, universes beneath universes, universes above universes, and universes outside the universes in this ur-mighty, tremendous, and all-creational spiritual intelligence of the existence Creation. And the human being is connected with this immense spirit, with these ur-kind powers of the existence, of the Creation, of the spiritual intelligence, because a part-piece of this spirit-intelligence of the Creation dwells as spirit in the human being and gives life to him/her.
The spiritual intelligence is enlightened by law-based spiritual principles and is directed toward the creational inner core nature, the absolutely full development, and the power of the creational itself. This is in contrast to the human intelligence, because the human material consciousness is generally concerned only with individual things of the material world. But this has the consequence that the human being is constrained and hindered in every direction, indeed even captured, oppressed, plagued, and tortured by all possible forms of mishappening, weaknesses, and enslavements of all kinds.
Hence, a self-analysis of the individual human being is one of the most essential methods for finding the truth and for going the way of the consciousness-based and spiritual evolution. Thus, it is necessary that the human being continuously checks his/her thoughts and sees what kind they really are. S/he has to make sure that s/he is ultimately always guided, led and destined by creational-philosophical principles and realities, by creational-natural laws. In the human being the constant conscious feeling should reign, that s/he belongs to the creational, with his/her actual spiritual breath, his/her actual spiritual BEING.
Consciousness-based it shall be clear to him/her that his/her actual spiritual BEING is inseparably one with the creational, so as to overcome the material outer world in this consciousness. May the human being therefore be a practical philosopher and mystic and perceive the reality in the changeable passing forms. After all, what is a human being? S/he is only a figure and a name. If one takes away the name and the figure, what is still left of him/her? There remains the fundamental essence, the existence – the spirit and the overall consciousness-block.
The human being, who truthfully lives in accordance with the spiritual laws of the Creation, sees and recognises the creational all around in every life-form, in everything, in every thought and action, in every human being, in all the activity of the nature and also in all imaginable circumstances and occurrences.
The spirit, the source of all unending creational upbuilding, is itself the innermost inner core nature of the human being. The human outer nature, however, is full of limitations, because it is not the inner core nature itself, but only its shell, its material body, a limitation, a matter leading into delusion, the source of hardship and pain, limited in cognition and will, in readiness to make sacrifices, in freedom, love and happiness. If the human being views his/her fellow human beings only externally, materially, then s/he sees nothing but the form and shape, the material of this particular human being. If, however, s/he sees the fellow human being with the consciousness-based and spiritual eyes of the cognition and knows that this all-witnessing consciousness in him/her is also present in all others, even if it is unrecognised by them, then the way in which s/he sees his/her fellow human being changes fundamentally.
S/he then no longer simply sees a man, a woman, a girl or a child, but sees the fellow human being as bearer of a creational spirit, which knows about itself, about its existence and wishes to reveal itself through everyone, if only the opportunity to do so would be offered to it. The one who knows the truth sees the fellow human being based on this knowledge and cognition, because s/he sees the creational in him/her.
So the human being should constantly be conscious of this creational, without which s/he would be unable to do any breath, to conceive any conscious thought, without which s/he would neither be able to recognise, see, hear nor experience. That is why the great wise ones of all times say: "The creational spirit is closer to the human being than the own breath."
It, the spirit, is able to live without the light of the physical eyes, just as it is able to live without hearing, arms, legs, and even without the outer intellect of the outer material consciousness. However, there is always still something present that enables it to continue living, namely its own creational power. This self-consciousness, this all-observing and all-registering spiritual consciousness in the human being, which looks at and considers his/her thoughts and impulsations and is behind all his/her thinking, which tells him/her whether s/he is knowing or unknowing, that is the creational, the spiritual consciousness. To ponder again and again that the spirit is all-mighty, ever-present, all-knowing, and beyond that, unending happiness, unending beauty, unending value, the value of all things altogether, lets the word Creation become the absolute significance for the human being and brings forth evolution-based developmental changes in him/her.
Each human being carries within him/herself the whole kingdom of the spirit, but it is covered over by the unused material consciousness and struck by unknowledgeness, erroneous assumptions, not absolutely full development, bad things, errors and limitations of all kinds, which must be transformed into the opposite through the recognition and acceptance of the truth. All these bad things must be dissolved and cleared up, by the human being consciously developing abilities, which are opposite to everything negatively perverted and lead to a neutral equalisation.
The path of the experience of the spirit is accelerated through the unfolding of the consciousness and the conscious searching as well as the gathering of knowledge of the truth, and this unfolding leads to the true and all-embracing, cosmic-wide essence of wisdom and love, due to the cognition that the Creation is present in everything. The human being is one with everything in the Creation, in the truth, essence of wisdom and love, in the kingdom of the spirit. S/he is to see him/herself everywhere in the space and in the times and in all things. S/he him/herself is to be everything and is to awaken the creational in everything and bring it in this way into recognition and experience. Because the Creation is in all and everything is animated by its spirit, wherethrough everything is one in all.
S/he will identify with all things and all life-forms of the world and the universes. A human being full of creational-spiritual essence of wisdom, full of knowledge, truth, love and cognition, who knows that everything came out of, comes out of and will for eternal times come out of the truth. Hence, s/he identifies with everything and everyone. In his/her consciousness-based being he/she will at the innermost level always be one with everything and everyone.
All unreal suggestions and human imaginations become corrected by the human being realising: "I am a part of the Creation, which animates me as a part-piece, as spirit." But the knowledge that all things are imaginations and illusions, except the creational-spiritual power, truth and reality, will by no means diminish the keenness which the human being unfolds in the life, but rather propel him/her to unexpected heights
Only that which is true, and which will remain truth, can be regarded as truth; something on which one can rely in eternal times and which is never and under no circumstances ever in need of revision. Truth never has to be adapted to another and a new time, because it is permanent for all times. It is eternally remaining the same and always sounds the same, even if it is spoken in other words. It is the rock upon which one can build in eternal times and in all spaces. The truth was before the life, and the truth is also after it. Creation and truth are always the same, today and tomorrow, they are always remaining the same and of eternally equal value. They do not change, neither by name nor by form, as the Creation and the truth are nameless and formless. The truth is that which is immortal, like the Creation as such, it is that which is eternal in time, that which is relatively absolutely fully developed, that which is worth all energies and the total investment of will by the human being, because with it the human being does not fall prey to any deception.
The creational is full of endless peace, full of endless cognition, and relatively most total absolutely full development. It is the source of all miracles of the highest spiritual consciousness, which is present all around – inside like outside.
The Creation-thinking human being does not consider the future to be the time to experience the Creation and his/her spirit dwelling in him/her, but rather the immediate present, wherethrough however s/he lives in the eyes of the normal human being, who is poor in consciousness, already in the most distant future – often completely misunderstood. For the true Creation-thinking human being, the time is not someday, but always in the immediate present. For him/her, it is not necessary to see physically to see the truth. S/he begins to search in him/herself, and the truth becomes ever more real to him/her, because for his/her material consciousness his/her spirit is after all the all-seeing presence. The great, the spiritual, is for him/her present in his/her innermost, because in the cognition of the truth the unending dwells in the finite.
And in every human being the unending has its seat, something that however only very few are able to recognise. Because awakening the unending requires rational logic and a state of being free of unreal teachings. But awakening the unending and letting it become effective is the culmination-point of the life – the relatively highest possible consciousness-based and spiritual relative absolute fulfilment. Those who are rich in the consciousness become the instrument by which the Creation expresses the spiritual realm. It is this excellence of the Creation that causes the firmament to arise. The ones who are rich in the consciousness are free of all boundaries of a restriction and of the material selfish ego-consciousness, and therefore in constant contact with the Creation as such.
With the human beings the difficulty of the material principle still prevails. However, in not too distant a time, the earthly science will discover the principle of the creational in the material This is because the Creation is included in everything created; in everything that unfolds and further develops itself. When essence of wisdom and truth dawn in in the human being and his/her consciousness-based as well as spiritual knowledge increases, when universal love leads him/her and his/her life becomes prosperousness for him/her and others, then the cognition of the truth has matured in him/her. Then s/he will become conscious of the part of the Creation in him/her, of the spirit – of the spiritual realm. The Creation is present in spiritual love and essence of wisdom. Whoever strives for spiritual light and spiritual love, will have the gate to the Creation to open to him/her.
The heart of Semjase’s spiritual teaching is that the essence of each human being is the inner spiritual, which is a “little bit” of The Creation. Everything is a part of The Creation, and we are One with All. Semjase says that there are almost an infinite number of universes within The Creation, both physical and non-physical. We on Earth are living in one of those universes. The great truths of The Creation are Wisdom and Love.
When a human being dies physically, it is only the physical body that dies. The essence of the spirit, being a little bit of The Creation, does not die. Rather, it proceeds onward towards spiritual development, which may involve other lifetimes in both the physical and non-physical universes.
Semjase’s spiritual teachings re-affirm the truth that “the Kingdom of God is within you”.
Semjase took Billy Meier on an interstellar trip to what she described as the “ancient home planet of our human races”. This planet is said by Semjase to be in the Lyra constellation called the Ring Nebula of Lyra. Semjase said that it would require a 30 hour trip to get there, including traveling in the hyperspace mode. She first transported Meier to a “great spacer” ship located a far distance from Planet Earth. This ship was in the form of a large sphere and according to Semjase embodied all the technologies know to the Pleiadians.
Semjase indicated that the Pleiadian technology was thousands of years ahead of Earth’s. There were also android-like beings on the great spacer ship. It was essentially a small planetoid, and she said it contained an inhabited city of 144,000 resident Pleiadians, as well as an unspecified number of androids. The great spacer had a diameter of approximately 2.2 kilometers. Semjase introduced Meier to the captain of the great spacer and said that he was her father. He said his name was Ptaah.
The great spacer had to be far from any star before jumping through hyperspace. On the first hyperspace jump, which seemed like it took only an instant of local “time”, Semjase said that they had traversed 500 light years and were in the vicinity of the Pleiades. Then a second instantaneous jump was taken that put the ship 1800 light years from Earth and in the vicinity of the Orion nebula.
Semjase told Meier that they were now going to make a very long hyperspace jump of about seven minutes. She reminded Meier that hyperspace is essentially a condition of no-time and no-space, so he would be able to experience “eternity”. Before the jump Semjase put a helmet on Meier’s head that would record his thoughts while he experienced hyperspace.
Here is Meier’s account of what he experienced during this very long hyperspace jump:
Ptaah and Semjase manipulate the apparatus, and now I can see again how the fantastic heavens and stars change. In a fraction of a second they are nothing more than a whitish milky mass, a shining mass, as I have already seen in other hyper-leaps. But now suddenly as well, this milky whitish shining is gone and there is darkness.
But now what is this? Suddenly all is merging into a golden color, and now everything is like silver. But – my dear – this glistening light, this beaming shining splendor! Everything is merged into glistening light – only the glistening light. It is stronger than all the suns of the Universe.
Dear, oh dear, this glistening light, and it does not hurt the eyes! Dear, this must be eternity, the glistening light of the eternal … but see, there is nothing besides the eternity; man alive, how marvelous! Marvelous? Man alive, that is itself marvelous. Eternity and marvelousness are one and the same.
Only why do I separate it? Why do I put the eternity into terms of time? Time does not exist, and the eternity is marvelous. Man, just what is this? This tranquility, this peace – what is it? How could I have achieved this? Love, oh that deep all encompassing love. Nothing is there, but LOVE: wonderful, marvelous. Oh yes, I am, but I am not. Everything is so deep, and full of love.
Of course, I am eternity, and I am inside of eternity. How could I ever forget this? Oh yes, I am a human being, how can I … why do I forget that? I am only a guest in eternity – and those loving voices, calling for me, from where is it coming? I can see nothing, only the glistening light, comforting. Who is calling me?
I see nothing; man alive, I am nothing any more. I can’t see myself. I am eternity, in the eternity. Oh, how is that, but I don’t see with my eyes, still I see everything. And I am not listening with my ears, yet I hear everything.
Yes, the love, how powerful it is, how immense, infinite and wonderful. Everything is love and splendor; why doesn’t the human being understand this?... The calling comes out of the light. Is it the call of eternity?
Oh how hard it is … to not think that I am only a guest in eternity, that I am only a human being. How painful it is, this being a human. I do no more want to be. I want to remain here as eternity inside of eternity … this deep. Yes, I want to stay here. Never again do I want to return. Here is the existence, the real existence … How can I feel strange having to return to the material world? I belong here … Pain, why are you shaking me? What is it?
Semjase shakes Meier back into material awareness, now that the long jump is over. She tells him that he and they have all been inside the timelessness, and that they all indeed would like to stay there. But she says that “we are not ready to stay, because we have to absolve the way of evolution step-by-step”.
Grey Extraterrestrial Spirituality:
A book entitled “Alien Interview” was published by Lawrence Spencer in 2008. This book describes the contents of a file of documents that Spencer received, unsolicited, in the mail in 2007. These documents were labeled Top Secret and were the notes made by a Matilda O’Donnell MacElroy who, in the cover letter that accompanied them, said that she was an Army nurse who had conducted a series of interviews with a living extraterrestrial survivor of the Roswell UFO crash on July 7, 1947. This survivor said that her name was Airl and seemed to project to Matilda that she had a female gender.
Matilda told Spencer that she was now in her 80s and wanted to make this classified information public before she died. Matilda O’Donnell MacElroy is currently deceased. In the Disclaimer at the beginning of his book, Spencer makes it clear that he cannot verify the authenticity of the documents that he received from Matilda. In fact, he never met her personally and only spoke to her once over the phone. The documents were posted from the location of Navan, Ireland where Matilda said she was presently living. They consisted of handwritten notes, as well as typed notes on a manual typewriter. Here is what Matilda wrote to Spencer in her letter to him:
As you know in July, 1947, the Roswell Army Air Field (RAAF)issued a press release stating that personnel from the field's 509th Bomb Group had recovered a crashed “flying disc" from a ranch near Roswell, New Mexico, sparking intense media interest. Later the same day, the Commanding General of the Eighth Air Force stated that Major Jesse Marcel, who was involved with the original recovery of the debris, had recovered only the tattered remnants of a weather balloon. The true facts of the incident have been suppressed by the United States government since then.
You may not know that I was enlisted in the U.S. Women's Army Air Force(WAC)Medical Corp which was a part of the US Army back then. I was assigned to the 509th Bomb Group as a Flight Nurse at the time of the incident. When the news that there had been a crash was received at the base, I was asked to accompany Mr. Cavitt, the Counter Intelligence Officer, to the crash site as the driver of his vehicle, and to render any needed emergency medical assistance to any survivors, if necessary. Therefore, I briefly witnessed the wreckage of an alien space craft, as well as the remains of the several alien personnel aboard the craft who were already dead.
When we arrived, I learned that one of the personnel on board the craft had survived the crash, and was conscious, and apparently uninjured. The conscious alien was similar in appearance, but not the same as, the others. None of the other personnel present could communicate with the survivor, as the being did not communicate verbally or by any recognizable signs. However, while I examined the "patient" for injuries I immediately detected and understood that the alien being was attempting to communicate with me by "mental images", or "telepathic thought", which projected directly from the mind of the being. I immediately reported this phenomenon to Mr. Cavitt.
As no other person present could perceive these thoughts, and the alien seemed able and willing to communicate with me, it was decided, after a brief consultation with a senior officer, that I would accompany the surviving alien back to the base. This was partly due to the fact that I was a nurse, and could attend to the physical needs of the alien, as well as serve as a non-threatening communicator and companion.
After all, I was the only woman at the site and the only one who was not armed. I was thereafter assigned permanently to serve as a "companion" of the alien at all times. My duty was to communicate with and interview the alien and to make a complete report of all that I discovered to command authorities. Subsequently, I was supplied with specific lists of questions provided to me by military and non-military personnel, which I was to "interpret" for the alien, and record the responses to the questions provided. I also accompanied the alien at all times during medical testing and the many other examinations to which the alien was subjected by staff from numerous government agencies.
I was given a promotion in rank to Senior Master Sergeant to improve my security rating, and to increase my pay grade from $54.00 a month to $138.00 a month, for this very unusual assignment. I performed these duties from July 7th through August,1947, at which time the alien "died" or departed the "body", as you will read about in my notes.
Our communication did not consist of "spoken language", in the conventional sense. Indeed, the "body" of the alien had no "mouth" through which to speak. Our communication was by telepathy. At first, I could not understand Airl very clearly. I could perceive images, emotions and impressions, but it was difficult for me to express these verbally. Once Airl learned the English language, she was able to focus her thoughts more precisely using symbols and meanings of words I could understand. Learning the English language was done as a favor to me. It was more for my own benefit than hers.
Matilda described Airl as being a humanoid in appearance, about 40 inches tall, and said that she looked somewhat like a "doll". In stature and appearance, the body was quite short and petite. The head was disproportionately large, relative to the arms, legs and torso, which were quite thin. There were three fingers on each of the two hands and feet, and the head had no operational nose or mouth or ears.
Airl told Matilda that she was not really the "container" body, but that she was a spiritual being residing within and animating the "container". Airl said that the "container" was neither mechanical (i.e. robotic) nor biological (i.e. living). So, it would seem that the "container" was an artificially-created android. This would suggest that Airl survived the crash because her android container was more physically robust that the biological containers of the other members of the crew.
Airl said that she was from a race and civilization called the Domain, and that she was an officer, pilot, and engineer serving in the Domain Expeditionary Force. She said that her craft and crew were on Earth to "protect the property of the Domain", particularly as the Earth's ecosystem might be significantly damaged by the use of nuclear weapons.
Matilda taught Airl English, so that they might more easily communicate telepathically. Once this was done, Airl had quite a bit to say. I will only relate here what she told Matilda about her concepts of spirituality and the non-physical.
Airl said that all sentient beings throughout the universe are actually immortal spiritual beings, who she termed "IS-BE"s. She said that this descriptive term was used because the primary nature of an immortal being is that they live in a timeless state of "is", and the reason for their existence is that they decide to "be". Every sentient human living on Planet Earth is also an IS-BE.
This fact was vividly demonstrated to Matilda when Airl induced Matilda to have an out-of-body experience, where Matilda could directly experience that her consciousness was independent of her physical body. Airl seemed to indicate that the collection of all the IS-BEs that exist are part of an overarching Godhead. Each IS-BE is both a little bit of God and the entirety of God, simultaneously.
Here are further descriptions of IS-BEs that were told to Matilda by Airl:
Airl explained that IS-BEs have been around since before the beginning of the universe. The reason they are called "immortal", is because a "spirit" is not born and cannot die, but exists in a personally postulated perception of "is - will be". She was careful to explain that every spirit is not the same. Each is completely unique in identity, power, awareness and ability. The difference between an IS-BE like Airl and most of the IS-BEs inhabiting bodies on Earth, is that Airl can enter and depart from her "doll" at will.
Airl can also remember her "identity", so to speak, all the way back into the dim mists of time, for trillions of years! She says that the existing collection of suns in this immediate vicinity of the universe have been burning for the last 200 trillion years. The age of the physical universe is nearly infinitely old, but probably at least four quadrillion years since its earliest beginnings.
The physical universe itself is formed from the convergence and amalgamation of many other individual universes, each one of which were created by an IS-BE or group of IS-BEs. Originally, the interaction of IS-BE illusions or inventions created the very fabric of the physical universe -- the microcosm and the macrocosm. Every single particle of the universe has been imagined and brought into existence by an IS-BE. Everything created from an idea -- a thought with no weight or size or location in space.
The essence of creation and existence cannot be found through the lens of a microscope or telescope or by any other measurement of the physical universe. One cannot comprehend the perfume of a flower or the pain felt by an abandoned lover with meters and calipers. Everything you will ever know about the creative force and ability of a god can be found within you -- an Immortal Spiritual Being.
Immortal Spiritual Beings, which I refer to as "IS-BEs", for the sake of convenience, are the source and creators of illusions. Each one, individually and collectively, in their original, unfettered state of being, are an eternal, all-powerful, all-knowing entity. IS-BEs create space by imagining a location. The intervening distance between themselves and the imagined location is what we call space. An IS-BE can perceive the space and objects created by other IS-BEs.
IS-BEs are not physical universe entities. They are a source of energy and illusion. IS-BEs are not located in space or time, but can create space, place particles in space, create energy, and shape particles into various forms, cause the motion of forms, and animate forms. Any form that is animated by an IS-BE is called life. An IS-BE can decide to agree that they are located in space or time, and that they, themselves, are an object, or any other manner of illusion created by themselves or another or other IS-BEs. The entire back time track of IS-BEs is immeasurable, nearly infinite in terms of physical universe time. There is no measurable "beginning" or "end" for an IS-BE. They simply exist in an everlasting now.
An IS-BE can decide to agree that they are located in space or time, and that they, themselves, are an object, or any other manner of illusion created by themselves or another or other IS-BEs. The disadvantage of creating an illusion is that an illusion must be continually created. If not continually created, it disappears. Continual creation of an illusion requires incessant attention to every detail of the illusion in order to sustain it.
A common denominator of IS-BEs seems to be the desire to avoid boredom. A spirit only, without interaction with other IS-BEs, and the unpredictable motion, drama, and unanticipated intentions and illusions being created by other IS-BEs, is easily bored. What if you could imagine anything, perceive everything, and cause anything to happen, at will? What if you couldn't do anything else? What if you always knew the outcome of every game and the answer to every question? Would you get bored?
The entire back time track of IS-BEs is immeasurable, nearly infinite in terms of physical universe time. There is no measurable "beginning" or "end" for an IS-BE. They simply exist in an everlasting now. Another common denominator of IS-BEs is that admiration of one's own illusions by others is very desirable. If the desired admiration is not forthcoming, the IS-BE will keep creating the illusion in an attempt to get admiration.
One could say that the entire physical universe is made of unadmired illusions. The origins of this universe began with the creation of individual, illusionary spaces. These were the "home" of the IS-BE. Sometimes a universe is a collaborative creation of illusions by two or more IS-BEs. A proliferation of IS-BEs, and the universes they create, sometimes collide or become commingled or merge to an extent that many IS-BEs shared in the co-creation of a universe. IS-BEs diminish their ability in order to have a game to play. IS-BEs think that any game is better than no game. They will endure pain, suffering, stupidity, privation, and all manner of unnecessary and undesirable conditions, just to play a game. Pretending that one does not know all, see all and cause all, is a way to create the conditions necessary for playing a game: unknowns, freedoms, barriers and/or opponents and goals. Ultimately, playing a game solves the problem of boredom.
In this fashion, all of the space, galaxies, suns, planets, and physical phenomena of this universe, including life forms, places, and events have been created by IS-BEs and sustained by mutual agreement that these things exist. There are as many universes as there are IS-BEs to imagine, build and perceive them, each existing concurrently within its own continuum. Each universe is created using its own unique set of rules, as imagined, altered, preserved or destroyed by one or more IS-BEs who created it. Time, energy, objects and space, as defined in terms of the physical universe, may or may not exist in other universes. The Domain exists in such a universe, as well as in the physical universe. One of the rules of the physical universe is that energy can be created, but not destroyed. So, the universe will keep expanding as long as IS-BEs keep adding more new energy into it. It is nearly infinite.
Every IS-BE is basically good. Therefore, an IS-BE does not enjoy doing things to other IS-BEs which they themselves do not want to experience. For an IS-BE there is no inherent standard for what is good or bad, right or wrong, ugly or beautiful. These ideas are all based on the opinion of each individual IS-BE. The closest concept that human beings have to describe an IS-BE is as a god: all-knowing, all-powerful, infinite.
So, how does a god stop being a god? They pretend NOT to know. How can you play a game of "hide and seek" if you always know where the other person is hiding? You pretend NOT to know where the other players are hiding, so you can go off to "seek" them. This is how games are created. You have forgotten that you are just "pretending". In so doing, IS-BEs become entrapped and enslaved inside a maze of their own devising.
How does one create a cage, lock one's own self inside the cage, throw away the key, and forget there is a key or a cage, and forget there is an "inside" or "outside", and even forget there is a self? Create the illusion that there is no illusion: the entire universe is real, and that no other universe exists or can be created. On Earth, the propaganda taught and agreed upon is that the gods are responsible, and that human beings are not responsible. You are taught that only a god can create universes. So, the responsibility for every action is assigned to another IS-BE or god. Never oneself. No human being ever assumes personal responsibility for the fact that they, themselves -- individually and collectively -- are gods. This fact alone is the source of entrapment for every IS-BE.
Airl said that all sentient beings in both the physical and non-physical universes are in essence immortal spiritual beings termed IS-BEs. Every immortal IS-BE is individualized from all the other IS-BEs. No two IS-BEs are alike. The home of all IS-BEs exists in the non-physical, outside of physical time and space. Airl said that all IS-BEs exist within an overarching Godhead. However, she gave no indication as to whether or not there was a hierarchical structure of IS-BEs based upon their level of spiritual growth. The IS-BEs are both individualized entities as well as the total of All That Is, simultaneously.
The primary occupation of IS-BEs is the creation of illusionary realities such as physical reality. Collections of IS-BEs created our current illusionary physical universe, and can operate both within it and outside of it. There are myriads of both physical and non-physical realities that the vast number of IS-BEs create. The IS-BEs create because it pleases them to do so. IS-BEs are gods with a small “g”, but their sum total is contained within God with a large “G”.
According to Matilda, when Airl was attacked by government officials who wanted to experiment on her android body, her spiritual IS-BE essence chose to leave the android “container”, rendering the “container” effectively “dead”, and returned to its non-physical level of existence.
An Australian woman by the name of Judy Carroll has written a quite intriguing book entitled “Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth”, where she describes the spiritual beliefs of Grey extraterrestrials. In the book, she claims first-hand information about this topic since she says that she is the human reincarnation of a deceased Grey extraterrestrial being who died in the Roswell crash in 1940s. She indicates that she came to this realization at the age of 30 when she was visited in broad daylight by three Grey extraterrestrials, and during this contact she had the strong impression that she was meeting with “family”.
Carroll considers her soul to be composed of both human and Grey aspects. She describes herself as “human by day and Grey by night”. She says that at night her soul leaves her sleeping human body and travels to a Grey spacecraft where it enters into the physical body of an android “container”. In this android form, she performs a variety of work operations on the Grey craft. Then when these tasks are completed, her soul returns to her human body.
I know that Judy Carroll’s account may seem hard to believe. It was hard for me to believe initially, and there is no concrete scientific verification of what Judy writes in her book. However, I have had many direct discussions with her about the content of her book, and based on these interactions I believe that she is a well-grounded, intelligent, logical, and sincere person who firmly believes what she has written. Furthermore, my spiritual intuition resonates with the concepts she has put forth.
Here is her account of her situation:
I’ve had life-long contact with off-planet beings. In 1983, when I was 30, I had a conscious daytime encounter with beings whom people loosely call Greys. During this meeting I recognized them as “family,” and came to consciously understand that, like so many of us who have prepared for this mission, I have operated through a “dual” soul for several lifetimes. I carried this consciousness through the portal of “death” from the time that my Zeta soul container was made unusable after the crash of our ship in the 1940s. All of our crew chose to reincarnate on Earth in the 1950s.
In very simple terms, the original soul essence, what we all are at the core of our being, is comprised of pure source energy beyond racial, planetary or galactic identity. This soul essence is totally integrated in Oneness, omnipresent and omniscient. When the time comes for a soul essence to reincarnate into another life, it begins to attract energy frequencies to itself from the collective consciousness of whatever planetary culture it will be incarnating into. This choice is made with assistance from other souls such as spirit guides, teachers and other members of the soul family. One’s soul family may be likened to a molecule comprised of atoms which resonate in close synchronization with each other.
Since everything is energy, the frequencies required for life build up around the pure soul essence like the layers of an onion. In this way, the soul essence begins to individualize. It will be in synchronization with a particular planetary collective consciousness, a species consciousness on that planet, the racial identity and group mind-set that was chosen for the coming life.
Ones like myself, whose chosen mission is to be a “bridge” between various planetary groups, synchronize energetically with two rather than the usual one single planetary collective consciousness. This is necessary so that we can understand, connect with and help to integrate both groups. It also enables us to live a double life, in my case as an “Earth-human by day and a Zeta by night.”
Judy Carroll states that the Zeta-Grey viewpoint about God is that “God is not a physical being, but rather an omnipresent and omniscient Energy/Consciousness referred to by higher ET and interdimensional cultures as Source, Oneness or The Forever”.
She indicates that there are many different forms of extraterrestrials in the Universe, but that all these lifeforms are part of a Oneness within Source. The consciousness of all humans and extraterrestrials is derived from the Source. Our consciousness is the spirit contained within the physical body that we may have. Carroll refers to the physical body as a “container” for the immortal spirit which each being possesses. The spirit is the true reality and everything is really energy. Grey extraterrestrials believe that the Source energy permeates everything in the physical Universe, from the largest galaxy to the smallest sub-atomic particle.
Carroll says that there are a number of different types of extraterrestrials that have visited Earth, but the primary ones are the Greys from Zeta Reticuli, the Nordics from the Pleaides, and the Reptilians from Draco. She says that there is a basic humanoid form for extraterrestrials, which has a head with two arms and two legs connected to a central truck. However, all of these physical forms are essentially “containers”. She indicates that the Grey form is basically related to an insectoid-type physical stock.
Judy Carroll declares that all beings throughout the Universe are eternal spiritual entities that are differentiated little bits of the overarching Universal Consciousness that is the Source. She says that your true essence is your spiritual essence, and that this is true for human beings as well as Grey beings, and all other extraterrestrial beings.
When you are born, your spiritual essence takes up residence in the physical body “container”. At death, the physical body “container” dies, but the spiritual essence continues to exist at a higher vibrational level of existence than the three-dimensional physical realm. The purpose of living a three-dimensional life is to experience things in the third dimension, and learn from these experiences for the spiritual development of the soul, the spiritual essence. All spiritual beings, whether Earth human or extraterrestrial are all part of the Oneness of Universal Consciousness.
Judy indicates that the Greys have biological containers, but they also employ android containers in their operations. These androids are essentially functioning physical body forms that have been imbued with a Grey soul. They also have clones that are derived asexually from Grey donors. However, these clones have souls that are distinctly different from the soul of the donor.
Carroll speaks of the “Ladder” of human evolution, where human refers to both Earth humans and extraterrestrial humans. Here is how she describes it:
The Human Ladder is a path of evolution followed by all members of the human kingdom upwards through 10 levels of expanding conscious awareness from “animal human” to “cosmic human.” This journey actually begins even further back, at the mineral kingdom level, proceeds through the vegetable and animal kingdoms, and on to human and beyond.
The Human Ladder as depicted by Judy Carroll is given below (from her book “Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth”):
The Human Ladder
Basically, the rungs of this Ladder represent different frequencies of conscious awareness. The first three rungs all still involve three-dimensional reality, while rungs 4 and above are all non-physical and multi-dimensional. As one ascends this Ladder, the extent of conscious awareness increases towards the highest level of Oneness and Universal Consciousness awareness.
The first rung of the Ladder represents the conscious mind of physically-oriented three-dimensional Earth humans, as well as physically-oriented extraterrestrials. Essentially, it represents those whose vibrational frequencies are only attuned to the three-dimensional physical realm. One might say that Level 1 humans have the belief that the only reality is that of the physical reality, basically the materialist mentality.
Level 2 involves humans who have achieved a level of consciousness of about 20%, which allows them to know that they are in essence spiritual beings whose true existence is in non-physical realms. This means they have increased their level of vibrational frequency, so that they can leave their body at will and consciously. In other words, they can induce out-of-body experiences. Such people can also control some of their body functions at will, such as body temperature and respiration levels.
At Level 3, the human focus is on mind and spirit rather than bodily physicality. The body form may change into a simpler version. Also, the viewpoint here is that the physical body is merely a “container” for the mind and soul. The human spends more time out-of-body than in-body.
In Level 4, the human effectively ceases to exist in the physical but resides completely in the non-physical as an energy being of higher frequency. However, beings at this level and above, can lower their frequency to manifest on the physical level.
Level 4 and above is peopled by non-physical light beings, whose vibrational frequency and consciousness level progressively increases, until at Level 10, they attain Oneness with the Universal Consciousness. Carroll says that the Greys are currently in the Level 5-8 range, and serve as “Guardians” for human levels 1-3.
Level 9 is said to be peopled by “Angels”. These are beings who are at very high vibrational and consciousness levels, and can form a hierarchy of influence below the Oneness level. Angels can lower their vibrational levels even as low as Level 1, to interact with Level 1 humans. One might surmise that the great spiritual teachers such as Zoroaster, Krishna, Buddha, Jesus, and Muhammed might have been influenced in their teachings by Angelic entities.
Carroll says that in reality parts of our Higher Self exist in all the ten human levels simultaneously. However, our spiritual evolution requires that we work so that all of our Higher Self eventually unites in the Oneness at Level 10.
Physical death is just the demise of the functioning of the physical “container”. At this time the mind/soul continues to exist in the non-physical realm. Carroll indicates that there is a special level called the Astral Plane, which is where Level 1 humans reside during their times between physical incarnations.
Judy Carroll in her book “Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth” writes that there are 11 Universal Laws and 11 Spiritual Laws of the Cosmos. These are as follows:
The Universal Laws:
Free Will:
All "little bits" of Source that are sentient beings with the ability to make a choice have the freedom to choose between Love and Fear. Free will is the mechanism of spiritual growth.
Change:
Source, or The One just IS, but It needs to have experiences and reflections of Itself in order to know Itself, which is expressed in infinite ways. Each of us taking on some sort of form, or role, from the lower to the higher end of the scale, is an expression of The One, and by doing this, It can experience “Self”. Combine all the infinite possibilities, and you are left with infinite outcomes or expressions of what The One is. Out of this combination comes Omniscience and Oneness.
Movement and Balance:
If we don't have balance when we walk or do yoga, then we will fall down. Movement requires the controlling aspect of balance. This means that we must try and control our actions. It also refers to keeping our energy system in balance through some sort of spiritual practice.
Innocence, Truth and Family:
Little babies start out quite innocent, Love is their major modus operandi. But as they grow, they become less innocent and start to develop a combination of Love and Fear. For spiritual growth, we should strive for the innocence of unconditional love. We should strive for the Truth. The only ‘real’ reality/truth is the fact that, at our pure soul level, we are immortal spirits and an intrinsic aspect of Source/Oneness.
Symmetry:
Symmetry means Balance, which means keeping oneself in balance with Source Energy (as above, so below), which starts with keeping our own energy system in balance.
Life:
Life is Consciousness, and consciousness goes beyond what is perceived here on Earth as sentient life. Consciousness begins in the Mineral Kingdom, and is present in the Plant and Animal Kingdoms. All these things are composed of atoms and molecules, and so consciousness is present there too. DNA is life and it spans dimensions, so is way beyond just being physical. It is our soul blueprint.
Light, Sound and Vibration:
In the physical, Light is electromagnetic energy that we can detect with our sense of sight. However, with our scientific instruments, we can now see Light over a much wider frequency range. Our reality is that we are Beings of Light, that is our true nature.
Judgment:
After the death transition, there are no judgment other than our own self-judgment of our actions. We can open up to the more expanded conscious awareness of our Soul/Higher Self. From this perspective, we are more able to see/judge what we have learned from the past life, where imbalanced choices have been made, and what we need to experience in order to overcome those imbalances. From our Soul perspective, we are more able to see the bigger picture.
Nature:
There is physical Nature, but there is also non-physical Nature. We must appreciate both. As with everything, Nature is composed of multidimensional energy, and we ourselves are very much a part of Nature, both from a planetary and cosmic perspective.
Love:
Unconditional Love is an aspect of Source. For spiritual growth, we must strive to exhibit Love over Fear, and come to the understanding that Unconditional Love is high frequency energy, and fear is low frequency energy.
Perception:
In a physical lifetime, one is only able to directly perceive the physical world. However, by looking "Inward" during meditation, one can perceive some aspects of the non-physical world. As we evolve up through the Human Ladder, our perception deepens and expands, to enable us to access higher and higher energy frequencies, which is what evolution for humans is all about.
The Spiritual Laws:
Freedom of Man:
"Man" is all sentient beings, both humanoid and non-humanoid, both physical and non-physical, that have the freedom to choose between Love and Fear.
Growth of Man:
This is spiritual growth of the Soul Self up the Human Ladder towards Source. Here, growth refers to the right for every human being throughout the universe to evolve. At the top of the Ladder, our soul is absorbed into Oneness but nothing is lost. Our sense of individuality is retained, and this only adds to the omniscience aspect. Many people have a fear of losing their individuality, but in fact the higher up the Ladder we evolve, the more ‘self-realization’ we are able to access.
Strength, Health and Happiness:
In both the physical and the non-physical, one needs to promote strength, health and happiness. What is Happiness? One definition might be that happiness is the full satisfaction with the direction that one's existence is moving in. Happiness also operates through unconditional love, which is pure bliss, that leads to being consciously aware of our intrinsic connection to others.
Protection of Family:
One certainly is driven to try and protect his or her blood relative family. But our actual family is much, much greater than that. Our human Earth family is really all of the human beings on Earth as well as all of the lifeforms on the planet. Our extraterrestrial family is all of the sentient beings throughout the physical universe. And our non-physical family is all of the beings that inhabit the non-physical realms. We Are All One and We Are All Interconnected.
Equality:
Everyone is equal in the Eyes of Source, regardless of their level of spiritual advancement. We are all Children of Source. This applies on a universal level. No person or culture is ‘better’ or ‘worse.’ They are just different, and the differences should be celebrated.
Choice:
Using our free will, we have the ability to choose between Love and Fear. Spiritual growth involves making wise choices. This is the ‘Cosmic Key.’
Intuition:
Intuition is a non-logical way of Knowing. Intuition involves tapping into non-physical sources of information and truth.
Karma:
Karma is the process by which spiritual advancement occurs. Bad karma slows the advancement process, while good karma accelerates it. The Love you take is equal to the Love you make. It is all about Balance.
Protection of Man:
Protection of ‘man,’ meaning humankind, from themselves. We create our own reality through our thought patterns, so really, our protection would have to come from within.
Healing:
Healing involves treatment to resolve something that is not right, whether that something is physical or non-physical. Maladies with physical bodies require healing. Maladies with spiritual bodies also require healing.
Future Sight:
This is the realization that we really create our own future, based upon our choices.
These Laws apply across the entire universe, and reference to “Man” includes all humanoid-type people of all galactic cultures, not only Earth-human males. This does beg the question as to whether such laws also apply to non-humanoid-type galactic peoples. Presumably, “Man” also encompasses all sentient beings, regardless of their physical form. Carroll indicates that spirituality involves recognizing that the essence of Source is within your soul, and one should strive to express unconditional love for both Source as well as other living beings. In other words, the sum total of the Law is: Love Source and Love Others.
Reptilian Extraterrestrial Spirituality:
There is almost no information available that describes Reptilian views on spirituality. The only information I have been able to find is what is called the “Lacerta Files”. These Files discuss two encounters that a Swedish man, known only as Ole K., had with a female Reptilian being in Sweden in the Years 1999 and 2000. Unfortunately, I cannot speak to the authenticity of this Reptilian interaction, it is simply the only thing that we have to go on at the present time.
So with that qualification, here is Ole’s description of his first meeting with the Reptilian woman in 1999:
I certify that the following text is the absolute truth and no work of fiction. These are parts of a transcript of an interview I've made with a non-human and reptilian being in December 1999. This female being was already in contact with a friend of mine (whose name is given only with the abbreviation E.F. in the text) since some months. Let me declare, that I was all my life a sceptic about UFOs, aliens and other weird things and I thought that E.F. tells me just dreams or fictionous stories when he talked with me about his first contacts with the non-human being "Lacerta". I was still a sceptic when I met this being on December 16 last year (1999) in that small warm room in the remote house of my friend near to a town in the south of Sweden, despite the fact that I saw now with my own eyes that she was not human. She has told and shown me so many unbelievable things during that meeting that I can't deny the reality and the truth of her words any longer. This is not another of that wrong UFO papers which claim to tell the truth but tell in fact just fiction, I'm convinced that this transcript contains the only truth and therefore you should read it. I had talked with her for over 3 hours, so the following transcript shows you only shortened parts of the interview, because she asked me after the interview not to publish everything she had told me already now.
I certify furthermore, that various "paranormal" abilities of her species like telepathy and telekinesis (including the moving and dancing of my pencil on the table without touching and the flying of an apple around 40 centimetres over her hands) were shown to me during the 3 hours and 6 minutes of the meeting and I'm absolutely sure that these abilities were no tricks.
So Ole K. said that in 1999 he had a three hour conversation with a reptilian female. Here is some of that conversation, which is in a question and answer format:
Q: First of all, who are you and what are you? Are you an extraterrestrial species or can your origin be found on this planet?
A: As you could see with your own eyes, I´m not a human being like you and to be honest I´m no real mammal (despite my partly mammal-like body features, which are a result of evolution.) I´m a female reptile being, belonging to a very old reptilian race. We are the native terrans and we live on that planet since millions of years. We are native terrans. We had and have some colonies in the solar system, but we originate on this planet. It´s in fact our planet and not yours - it was never yours.
Q: Can you tell me your name?
A: Our language is very different from yours, but my name is - I will try to say it smoother by use of your human letters - something like "Sssshiaassshakkkasskkhhhshhh" with a very very strong pronounciation of the "sh" and "k" sounds. Please call me "Lacerta", this is the name I generally use when I´m among humans and talk with them.
Q: How old are you?
A: According to your human time scale I´m around 28 years old.
Q: What is your task? Do you have a "job" like us?
A: I´m a curious student of the social behaviour of your species. That´s why I´m here and talk to you, that´s why I have revealed my real nature to E.F. and now to you and that´s why I give you all that secret information and why I will try to answer all the questions on your many sheets of paper honestly.
Q: Can you describe yourself detailed?
A: Imagine the body of a normal human woman and you have at first a good imagination of my body. Like you, I have a head, two arms, two hands, two legs and two feet and the proportions of my body are like yours. As I´m female I have also two breasts (despite our reptile origin, we have started to give milk to our babies during the evolution process - this happened around 30 million years ago - because this is the best thing to keep the young alive. The external reproduction organs are for both sexes smaller than those of humans, but they are visible and they have the same function as yours. My skin is mainly of a green-beige colour - more pale green - and we have some patterns of brown irregular dots (each dot of the size of 1 - 2 centimetres) on our skin and in our face.
My eyes are a little bit larger then human eyes (for this reason, we can see better in the darkness) and usually dominated from the large black pupils, which are surrounded from a small bright-green iris (males have a dark-green iris). The pupil is slit and can change its size from a small black line to a wide-open egg-shaped oval, because our retina is very light sensitive and the pupil must compare this. We have external round ears but they are smaller and not so curved as yours, but we can hear better because our ears are more sensitive for sonic (we can also hear a wider range of sonic). There´s a muscle or "lid" over the ears which can completely close them (for example under water). Our nose is more pointed and there is a V-shaped curving between the nostrils, which enabled the ancestors to "see" temperature. We have lost most of this ability, but we can still feel temperature much better with this "organ". Our lips are shaped like yours (those of females a little bit larger than those of males) but of a pale brown colour and our teeth are very white and strong and a little bit longer and sharper than your soft mammal teeth. We have no different hair colours like you (but there is a tradition to colour the hairs in different ages) and the original colour is - like mine - a greenish brown. Our hairs are thicker and stronger than yours and they grow very slow. In addition, the head is the only part of our body where we have hairs.
Our body, arms and legs are similar in shape and size to yours, but the color is different (green-beige, like the face) and there are scale-like structures on the upper legs (over the knee) and upper arms (over the elbow). Our five fingers are a little bit longer and thinner then human fingers and our skin on the palm is plain, so we have no lines like you but again a combination of a scale-like skin structure and of the brown dots (both sexes have the dots on the palm) and we have no fingerprints like you. If you touch my skin, you will feel that it is smoother than your hairy skin. There are small sharp horns on the upside of both middle fingers. The fingernails are grey and generally longer then yours.
The following feature is very different from your body and part of our reptilian origin: if you touch the backside of my upper body you will feel a hard bony line through my clothing. This is not my spine but a very difficult shaped external plate-structure of skin and tissue following exactly our spine from the head to the hip. There is an extremely high number of nerves and large blood vessels in this structure and in the plates (which are around two or three centimetres long and very touch sensitive - this is the reason why we have always problems to sit in chairs with a back like this chair.) The main task of these small plates (beside a role in our sexuality) is simply the regulation of our body temperature and if we sit in natural or artificial sunlight, these plates become more bloodfilled and the vessels become wider and the sun is able to heat up our reptilioid blood (which circulates through the body and through the plates) for many degrees and that gives us a great pleasure. What else is different from your kind? Oh, we have no navel, because we were born in a different way to your mammal birth.
Unfortunately, Lacerta did not allow Ole to take her photograph. She said that she could disguise herself to appear to humans as a human woman if she wished to do so, through telepathic mental manipulation of the human observer. She indicated that her kind had been an evolutionary development from dinosaurian stock, and that the destruction of the dinosaurs 65 million years ago was not due to an asteroid strike, but rather a war between Nordic-type and reptilian-type extraterrestrials. The reptilians exploded some type of fusion device on the Earth, which wiped out the dinosaurs and much of the other plant and animal life. However, a small group of evolutionarily advanced reptilians survived, along with some small mammals.
Over millions of years after the war, this reptilian species continued to develop into highly intelligent beings. These reptilians live underground in deep, expansive caverns, where they have whole cities. These caverns are at depths of 2000-8000 meters. They have also developed spaceflight technologies and some of the UFOs reported by people are theirs. They very seldomly appear on the Earth surface and have very little contact with human beings. They consider themselves the species that actually “owns” the Earth, since they were there millions of years before mammalian humans developed from ape ancestors, something that she said was accelerated by another group of extraterrestrials who wanted to use the Earth humans as slave labor.
Lacerta had some interesting things to say about the nature of reality and the paranormal. The reality scenario she put forward is best described in her own words.
You have to be clear about some fundamental facts. The very first thing is that you must divide up the conception of the physical world because each existence consists of different layers; let’s say for simplicity’s sake that it consists of a material illusion and a sphere of influence. {TRANSLATOR’S NOTE: No legitimate translation exists for this word ‘Feldraum’; “Feld” means “field,” “Raum” means “space, room, expanse.” Therefore, I’m translating it as “sphere of influence.”} Certain physical conditions are associated only with the realm of the material {as in ‘concrete’}, while other and more complicated conditions are associated only with the sphere of influence of the material world. Your conception of the physical world is based upon a simple material illusion.
Is there a scientific substantiation for paranormal powers, as for example with your powers of thought?
Yes. In order to explain that, one has to acknowledge the physical reality of the sphere of influence {Feldraum}. I’ll try to do it…wait just a second…you are going to have to separate yourself mentally from the illusion that that which you see is the true nature of the universe. It is, at best, the surface of a side. Imagine for yourself that all the matter here —you, this table, this pencil, this technical device, this paper— does not really exist, but that it is rather only the result of a field oscillation and a concentration of energy. All matter that you see, every creature, every planet and star in this universe, has an “information-energy equivalent” in the sphere of influence which is located on a main field —the general level {of things}. Now, there is not only one level, but several. Last time, I had mentioned that highly-developed species which is capable of changing levels (which is something completely different from the simple bubble changing, for bubbles are a part of each and every level). Do you understand? Dimensions, as you call them, are a part of a solitary bubble, bubbles or universal foam are a part of a level, and levels are layers in the sphere of influence, while the sphere of influence, acting in the capacity of single physical size, is essentially unending; it is composed of innumerable information-energy layers and general levels.
Tangible matter on this side is mirrored in the sphere of influence {Feldraum} as a field with distinct layers. These layers contain information, as an example, about the simple structure of matter or the string frequency, but also there is stored information stemming from the development of matter. Are you familiar with the human concept of “morphogenetic fields?” One part of the layer could be designated as such. Now there is still another intermediary layer for which you unfortunately have no human concept, since the theory is not common in human thinking. Let’s call it a “para-layer,” for this layer is mainly responsible for everything which you call PSI and paranormal and which lies outside the boundaries of your primitive science. This para-layer lies between the layers of matter and the morphogenetic layers of a field in the sphere of influence. It can actively integrate with both. Your body, for example, is mirrored as a field in the sphere of influence {Feldraum}. That doesn’t mean that it does not also exist here as well —as flesh, blood, bones— in the form of matter strings or atoms, but not only that. Existence is always a duality. Some layers of the field contain simple information about the solid matter of your body and its frequency, while other layers {contain information about} your spirit, your consciousness or, speaking from a human-religious point of view, your soul. Awareness or consciousness in this case is a simple energy matrix, divided into different layers of your field in the sphere of influence —nothing more, nothing less. Genuine awareness can also exist here on the matter side, but only in the form of post-plasma {the fifth form of matter}. With the necessary physical knowledge and the corresponding technology, the consciousness/awareness matrix, or soul, can also be separated from its field of rest. It can, despite its removal, continue to exist in a self-sufficient manner for a certain amount of time. That has the strange occult name of “soul robbing.” But above all, we’re talking about science here, not about magic or dark forces.
Creatures with more powerful mental powers can have a direct influence on the para-layer by means of their consciousness/awareness fields. Now this layer is not limited only to the individual, but rather as a part of a general information layer —you could call it in a prosaic sense the community soul— that is connected with all animate and inanimate matter and all consciousness which exist on this main level. The biological cause for these abilities lies on the side of matter, by the way, in the pituitary gland, which always is in the position to generate the frequencies to actively control the sphere of influence {Feldraum}.
Everything that you call paranormal. As I said, this special layer lies in the sphere of influence {Feldraum} between the morphogenetic information layers and the matter layers and can interact with respect to both sides. That is to say, it can be interacted with solid matter as well as with mind or mental information, wherewith we can achieve everything that is generally designated as telekinesis and telepathy. The “connection absorption” with another consciousness/awareness is generally separate in the procedure from the simple influence of matter, since different consciousness/awareness fields work with different oscillations. A consciousness/awareness that sends or a consciousness/awareness that listens must first adapt itself to the other mind exactly, before any access is possible.
This explanation presumably sounds to you like —as you say— something esoteric or from the occult or magic. The reason for that is simply that you lack the basic understanding for seeing the background reasons. All paranormal phenomena have a purely scientific origination. None of this has anything to do with supernatural powers. We grow up with this kind of knowledge, we know how one makes use of these powers, and where they come from. We are acquainted with theory and practice. You are not. Therefore, you really don’t understand what happens in your world—you see only one side of existence, not the other (I mean here both that are physical). Everything paranormal is dualistic, and it exists in the space that matter inhabits as well as in the sphere of influence {Feldraum}. To be explained…it can only be explained by the acceptance of the latter, because the sphere of influence {Feldraum} is the basis.
Essentially, Lacerta said that everything in the physical universe was an illusionary part of a much larger “feldraum”. This “feldraum” was non-physical, and the physical material world existed within it, as an illusionary subset. She said that all of this was not mysticism, but rather science, based on a science which mammalian human beings on Earth presently had no knowledge of.
The translator of the Lacerta interaction translated “feldraum” as “field of influence”, but to my mind this may be off the mark. The German word “feld” means “field” and the German word “raum” means “space”. So I think the correct interpretation is “field space” or perhaps “space field”. I wonder if “feldraum” is essentially a non-physical field of consciousness. Lacerta seems to be saying that what we interpret as the physical reality is only an illusion, and that it essentially represents a subset of the consciousness field. She further indicates that there are various levels in the consciousness field. She says that “Some layers of the field contain simple information about the solid matter of your body and its frequency, while other layers {contain information about your spirit, your consciousness or, speaking from a human-religious point of view, your soul”. I get the impression that Lacerta may be saying that all things physical have their form established in the non-physical consciousness field.
Conclusions Regarding Extraterrestrial Spirituality:
What are we to conclude from our assessment of what is known about the aspects of spirituality for the Nordic, Grey, and Reptilian extraterrestrial species?
Nordics, Greys, and Reptilians all take a rather dim view of the current Earth religions. They essentially say that all Earth religions are incorrect. One abductee taken aboard an extraterrestrial craft asked the craft captain “what is the true religion?”, whereupon the captain responded to him “none of them”.
However, all of these extraterrestrial species appear to have a belief in an overarching, non-physical reality, and that our physical reality is derived from this non-physical reality. Terms like “Creation”, “Source”, and “Oneness” are used by the extraterrestrials (they consider the word God to be associated with too much Earth religious dogma).
The extraterrestrial view of reality appears to be both panentheistic and panpsychic. Everything is contained within an overarching non-physical reality, and this non-physical reality is All That Is. The physical reality is a subset of a much larger non-physical reality. Extraterrestrials clearly do not perceive All That Is as anything that can be conceived of in physical terms. Rather, All That Is seems to be viewed as an overarching Energy/Consciousness Field that is creating physical and non-physical entities and environments for Its own unknown purposes. All elements within this Field are associated with a Oneness. Everything, both physical and non-physical, is in essence part of this overarching Energy/Consciousness Field.
Extraterrestrials believe that there is a non-physical, spiritual reality that is the true essence of all extraterrestrial beings. The extraterrestrials often refer to the physical body as a “container” of the non-physical essence, the soul if you will. With the exception of the Urantia Book, there is a definite belief in some form of reincarnation into the physical by the non-physical soul. The soul evolves in its non-physical growth through these physical reincarnations, and eventually reaches a completely non-physical existence.
There appear to be many levels of existence in the non-physical. Some extraterrestrials refer to these levels as different dimensions. Others speak of “bubbles” of alternative levels. And some speak of a vast number of different universes.
The most extensive discussion of extraterrestrial spirituality is contained in the Urantia Book, but the Urantia Book gives no indication that it was written by physical extraterrestrials. Rather, the Book seems to have been compiled by non-physical extraterrestrial beings using a human channel, but it is not known if these beings were non-physical forms of Nordics, Greys, or Reptilians that have been visiting Earth in physical form. Basically, the extraterrestrial sources of the Urantia Book are not known in any Earth visitation context.
I find the transcendental experience that Billy Meier described during a long hyperspace jump in an extraterrestrial spacecraft to be most interesting. What Meier described was a condition of no-space and no-time that was higher dimensional and where he experienced a Oneness with the universe. His account suggests to me that extraterrestrials have the technological means to transition into higher, non-physical realms on a regular basis. Here on Earth such transcendental experiences can only be achieved through deep meditative states and out-of-body or near-death conditions. This clearly suggests that extraterrestrials are more evolved in a spiritual sense than present Earth humans.
Of the three types of extraterrestrial descriptions of spirituality concepts that have been explored in this book, the one I personally resonate with the most is the Grey spirituality that is described by Judy Carroll in her book “Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth”. The Grey concept of the physical body as merely a “container” for the non-physical soul is something that I agree with. The non-physical soul is your true essence, it is your “I”.
Greys conceive of God as a non-physical omnipresent and omniscient Energy/Consciousness that can be described as Source/Oneness. Everything both physical and non-physical is contained within Source/Oneness. Your soul is essentially a differentiated consciousness unit, a “little bit” of Source/Oneness, that has chosen to reside in a physical body for a lifetime, for the purpose of experiencing physical life for its spiritual development. Your soul reincarnates into many physical lives, which can be on Earth as well as other locations in the universe. After a sufficient number of physical reincarnations, the soul no longer reincarnates in the physical, but rather progresses up to higher and higher levels of spiritual existence, until it is completely reabsorbed into Source/Oneness. A central aspect of Source/Oneness is Unconditional Love and spiritual development of the soul involves the increasing expression of Unconditional Love.
All extraterrestrial beings within the universe are a part of Source/Oneness and, as such, all such beings, whether Nordics, Greys, Reptilians, or Earth humans, are interconnected. The reality is that we are all related.
Referenced Books:
“Message From the Pleiades: The Contact Notes of Eduard Billy Meier”, W.C. Stevens, Genesis III Publishing, Munds Park, Arizona, 1988.
“Other Planets”, Emanuel Swedenborg, originally published in Latin as De Telluribus in Mundo Nostro Solari, Quae Vocantur Planetae, et de Telluribus in Coelo Astrifero, deque Illarum Incolis, Tum de Spiritibus et Angelis Ibi: Ex Auditis et Visis, London, 1758.
“The Urantia Book”, Urantia Foundation, Chicago, Illinois, 1955.
“A History of the Urantia Papers”, Larry Mullins, Penumbra Press, Boulder, Colorado, c. 2000.
“Urantia: The Great Cult Mystery”, Martin Gardner, Prometheus Books, Amherst, New York, 1995.
“Alien Interview”, Lawrence Spencer, 2008.
“Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth”, Judy Carroll, Wild Flower Press, Columbus, North Carolina, 2018.
“The Lacerta Files”,
https://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/vida_alien/esp_vida_alien_52.htm
The U.S. Government has all but explicitly acknowledged that Earth is being visited by extraterrestrial beings. Since the likelihood is very high that extraterrestrials are here now on Earth, one should clearly strive to know as much as possible about them and what motivates them. What do they believe at their deepest roots? What do they seek for their development? Do they have a belief in some form of non-physical existence after death? And do they believe in some aspect of underlying Universality? This book summarizes what information is presently available about extraterrestrial viewpoints on spirituality and the non-physical.
This book is also available on AMAZON.
Dedication:
This book is dedicated to the people of Planet Earth. It is important for humans on Earth to have an appreciation of how extraterrestrials may view the true nature of reality from their larger perspective. We must come to realize that We Are All One.
Acknowledgements:
The author acknowledges his interactions with Judy Carroll in Australia, who provided valuable insights into the nature of Grey extraterrestrial concepts of the non-physical nature of reality. He is indebted to his wife, Blanche, his daughter, Michelle, and his son-in-law Adam for their familial support during the writing of this book.
Preface:
Why have I chosen to write a book on Extraterrestrial Spirituality? One might say that this subject seems quite like an off-the-wall topic. However, things have changed dramatically in recent times regarding the existence of extraterrestrials. The U.S. Government has all but explicitly acknowledged that the Earth is being visited by such beings. I have written five books on the subject of science and spirituality in the past, and this book seems to be a logical extension into the larger cosmos of my spiritual quest for understanding.
Since the likelihood is high that extraterrestrials are here now on Earth, one should clearly strive to know as much as possible about them and what motivates them. What do they believe at their deepest roots? What do they seek for their development? Do they have a belief in some form of non-physical existence after death? And do they believe in some aspect of underlying Universality?
In this book, I will summarize what information is presently available about extraterrestrial viewpoints on spirituality and the non-physical. I must note that the information on this topic is quite limited, and much of it cannot be fully verified in a scientifically satisfying manner. Yet it is all that we have to work with at the present time. If extraterrestrials choose to reveal more about themselves in the relatively near future, this may change. However, for now this is all we have.
Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth:
On June 25th 2021, the U.S. Department of Defense issued a truly remarkable report to the U.S. Congress that confirmed the existence of Unidentified Flying Objects (UFOs) that were being detected by military ships and airplanes. In this report, they refer to the UFOs as UAPs, or Unidentified Aerial Phenomena. This was the first time the U.S. Government has officially conceded that they were seeing craft in the sky that exhibited remarkable flight characteristics and which they could not identify. Some of these remarkable flight characteristics are: 1) no visible flight surfaces to provide lift against the force of gravity; 2) no obvious means of flight propulsion; 3) hypervelocity flight speeds; 4) instantaneous changes in flight directions; 5) visibility only in the infrared spectrum; 6) the ability to move from space-to air-to-underwater environments in a continuous path of motion. As of the date of the report, it said that there were 144 such craft observed by military personnel during the time period 2004-2021. The report stated that the U.S. government did not possess any secret, classified craft with the observed flight characteristics, and that it was unlikely that any other foreign governments did as well. But the report stopped short of declaring that the craft were of extraterrestrial origin.
From an informed perspective, it is abundantly clear that extraterrestrials from other places in the universe have been visiting Planet Earth for at least the past 75 years. In fact, the possibility exists that such beings have visited Earth for thousands of years in the past, if not millennia. It seems that such extraterrestrial contacts have been accelerating since the testing and use of nuclear bombs that first occurred in 1945.
What I will go through now are some of the most famous and well-documented cases of extraterrestrial events that have happened in the past 75 years. I will not be describing these cases in detail but rather in general, overview terms. Should the reader wish to learn more details, these are readily available on the Internet.
1947 Kenneth Arnold UFO Event:
The modern extraterrestrial history begins with the June 24, 1947 observation of unidentified aircraft by Kenneth Arnold. Arnold was flying his airplane near Mount Rainier in Washington State when he observed a group of nine shining Unidentified Flying Objects (UFOs) that appeared to be traveling at approximately 1200 miles per hour. Arnold also said that they seemed to move in a discontinuous manner, like thrown flat stones skipping over the water of a pond. The national press at the time coined the name for these craft as “flying saucers”, and thus flying saucers and UFOs entered the collective national lexicon.
1947 Roswell UFO Crash:
I first drove through the town of Roswell, New Mexico in the Spring of 1979. I had purchased a Volkswagen campmobile in 1978 and I, my wife, and our two-year old daughter were taking a trip down to Carlsbad Caverns. I remember driving past the park at the center of Roswell. In 1979, Roswell was still just another town in the State of New Mexico. My, how things have changed. Now, Roswell is the best-known location in New Mexico by people all over the world. How did this happen?
What really happened at Roswell did not become widely known until 1978. In that year, the UFO researcher Stanton Friedman interviewed an aged Jesse Marcel about what actually occurred outside Roswell in 1947. Marcel was getting up in years and wanted to reveal the truth about the event. So, the real story of Roswell had actually been hidden from the public for more than 30 years, most likely as a result of a government coverup that continues to the present day.
On the date of July 7, 1947 a local rancher by the name of William (Mac) Brazel discovered some strange debris on his ranch which was about 75 miles from Roswell. Brazel reported this discovery to the local sheriff, who subsequently reported it to Roswell Army Air Field personnel in Roswell. At the time, the Roswell Army Air Field was the only location in the world housing aircraft that were certified to carry atomic weapons. Roswell Field then assigned Major Jesse Marcel to investigate Brazel’s claim.
Marcel and Brazel went out to the crash site in a truck and found a large debris field. They loaded some of the debris into the truck and returned to Roswell. The next day, July 8th, the Roswell Air Field issued a public statement that they had recovered debris from a “flying disk” that had crashed in a violent storm the night before. This was released to the Roswell paper and the Roswell radio station, which immediately published it. Marcel took some of the debris back to his home and showed it to his wife and son. There was some metal-like foil that, when crumpled, immediately returned on its own to a flat condition. There was also a metal-like long strut that had hieroglyphic-type symbols written on it.
But on July 9th, the U.S. Army Air Corps stepped in and said that it was not a “flying disk” but rather an Army weather balloon that had crashed. They basically quelled the “flying disk” recovery story and quickly buried it. There is a famous photo of Major Jesse Marcel next to a piece of this supposed weather balloon wreckage.
The Army took Mac Brazel into its custody for a week on July 9th. After he came back into public view, he would not further discuss his experiences with the wreckage debris. I actually have some second-hand knowledge of this aspect. While I was working in Los Alamos, New Mexico, I used to watch the Albuquerque news channel. This channel had a fellow by the name of Frank Joyce on it who gave updates on the New Mexico fishing report, and I used to enjoy listening to him.
However, it turns out that Frank Joyce was a young employee of the Roswell radio station at the time of the Roswell incident. Joyce had direct contact with Mac Brazel before the Army took him into their custody, as well as when Brazel again appeared in public. Joyce asked Brazel after he was returned about the “little green men” and he said that Brazel told him “they weren’t green”. In addition, in mid-July, the radio station received a phone call from a very authoritative sounding person telling them to stop reporting about the Roswell incident, and if they did not do so, the station would be shut down. The Roswell radio station stopped their reporting completely.
It is said that the U.S. government put a very strict security clampdown on the entire Roswell incident under the justification of national security. The UFO debris was sent to Wright-Patterson Army Air Base in Dayton, Ohio. It is also said that there were dead extraterrestrial bodies, as well as one living extraterrestrial that were retrieved from the crash. The claim is that autopsies were performed on the dead extraterrestrials, while the live extraterrestrial was taken to Los Alamos and interred in a secret location at the Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory until 1952, when the extraterrestrial died.
It is said that as a result of the Roswell incident, US President Harry Truman formed a secret high-level working group called Majestic 12 to manage this interaction with extraterrestrials. The head of Majestic 12 was James Forrestal, the first US Secretary of Defense. Forrestal died under rather mysterious circumstances in 1949 by falling from the 16th floor of the Bethesda Naval Hospital in Washington DC. There are some people who say that he was murdered because he was about to divulge the extraterrestrial nature of the Roswell incident.
1952 UFO Overfly of Washington DC:
On the evening of Saturday July 19, 1952, the radar operator at Washington DC National Airport spotted seven unknown objects on his radar screen. Other radar operators in the airport control tower also had these objects on radar and also saw objects that appeared as bright lights visually, some of whom were slowly moving and then moving off at incredible speeds. Objects were also tracked on radar and seen by personnel at Andrews Air Force Base near Washington, as well as by a pilot of an aircraft at Washington National Airport that was sitting on the runway waiting to take off. The unknown objects were observed starting at 11:30 pm on July 19 and ending at 5:30 am on July 20.
Rather amazingly, these unknown objects again appeared over Washington DC the next weekend on July 26th and 27th. Again, objects were tracked on radar and observed visually by both airport personnel and Andrews AFB personnel. In this case, the Air Force send up two jet aircraft to engage with the objects. However, although these aircraft visually saw the objects, they were unable to get close to them because the objects were moving faster than the fastest speeds possible by the jets.
Large numbers of the public in Washington DC visually saw these UFOs. There was subsequently a public outcry that the government explain what was going on here. So, the military had a press conference where a General John Samford put forward the explanation that the radar and visual images of the objects were due to a “temperature inversion” in the sky above Washington. However, the radar operators and control tower personnel who tracked and saw the objects themselves did not agree with this “temperature inversion” explanation. Rather, they were adamant that what they tracked and saw were solid objects that performed maneuvers impossible for known aircraft and which exhibited speeds in excess of those possible with the jet aircraft of that time.
1961 Betty and Barney Hill UFO Abduction:
On September 19, 1961, Betty and Barney Hill were driving back to their home in Portsmouth, New Hampshire after a vacation trip. At 10:30 pm in the evening, the Hills noticed a bright star in the sky which grew brighter and brighter, and seemed to be approaching their car. The next thing that they consciously remembered, they were driving again down the road, but they were miles away from where they thought they should be. In addition, there were three hours of time that had passed that they could not account for.
The details of what Betty and Barney Hill experienced that night would only be revealed when they were both placed under hypnosis. To say the least, the details they put forth were indeed remarkable. They reported that a large UFO descended on their car, that extraterrestrials came up to the car, put them in some form of mental control, and took them inside the UFO. When inside, they were both given medical examinations. Betty reported that she had a conversation with one of the extraterrestrials, who spoke to her in English. When she asked him where they were from, the extraterrestrial showed her a star map, which she remembered under hypnosis and was able to draw. A number of years later this star system was identified as that of Zeta Reticuli which is located 39 light years from Earth. After the activities inside the UFO, the Hills were escorted back to their car and mentally directed to start driving home again. They both came out of a daze during the drive back to their home.
1964 Lonnie Zamora UFO Incident:
The 1964 Lonnie Zamora UFO incident occurred near the town of Socorro, New Mexico. Having lived in New Mexico for a number of years, I have had occasion to visit Socorro a number of times. Basically, Socorro is in the middle of nowhere in south-central New Mexico. It is about 100 miles south of Albuquerque and is essentially in a desert-like, desolate environment. Rather interestingly, Socorro is not very far from Trinity Site, the site of the very first atomic bomb test that took place in July 1945. At the time, the people of Socorro saw and heard the explosion, but were told by the U.S. government that a large ammunition depot had exploded.
Lonnie Zamora was a New Mexico state trooper who was considered to be very reliable and an excellent observer. On April 24, 1964, he was in the process of chasing down a speeding car, when he noticed a flame in the sky about a mile away. Thinking that something might have crashed or exploded, he broke off his chase and directed his police car to the location of the flame. When he arrived at that location, to his amazement, he saw a white egg-shaped craft with some red markings on it, and two “people” who were outside the craft, apparently collecting samples from the ground. However, when the beings saw him, they went back into the craft and it took off with a flame and roar.
Zamora called on his police radio for assistance and another officer came to the location. They observed that the desert bushes the craft was sitting on while on the ground were still burning. Furthermore, there were footprint tracks on the ground, and an array of ground indentations that were presumably related to the landing gear of the craft.
1975 Travis Walton UFO abduction:
Travis Walton was an American logger who said he was abducted by a UFO on November 5, 1975 while working with a logging crew in a national forest in northern Arizona. The abduction lasted for a period of five days and extensive search activities for him were conducted with no success. However, he was located when he himself phoned a friend from a phone booth at another location in Arizona far away from his abduction site.
Walton and the other members of his logging crew had finished their work for the day and were heading back home in their truck. At one point, they came into contact with what they described as a UFO that was about 8 feet high and 20 feet in diameter. This UFO was hovering off the ground at a remote location within the national forest. Walton jumped out of the truck and approached the UFO to more closely inspect it. However, when he came near it, he was struck by a beam of light with lifted him and threw him unconscious to the ground. Seeing this and assuming that he was perhaps killed by this light beam, his compatriots left the scene in a panic, but a bit later after thinking about deserting him like that, they returned and found no trace of him at the spot where he had been hit by the light from the UFO.
His compatriots returned home and informed the local sheriff as to what had happened, but the sheriff was highly skeptical of their story and thought perhaps they had murdered Walton. However, they were all given lie detector tests and passed them, so the sheriff had no choice but to believe their story. They searched for five days to try and find any trace of Walton. At the end of the five days, Walton was located because he called a friend from a phone at a service station that was a significant distance from where he was last seen. Here is what Travis Walton said about his experience.
Walton said that the UFO’s light knocked him unconscious and that when he awoke, he found himself lying on a bed and thought that he was in a hospital. However, he was shocked when he saw that he was surrounded by three extraterrestrial beings clad in orange jumpsuits. They were short with large eyes and thin lips, and he later said that they appeared to be the Grey-type extraterrestrials. Upon seeing them, he jumped up from the bed and picked up an item that was lying around and used it to try and protect himself. Upon seeing this, the Grey extraterrestrials retreated from the room. With them gone, Walton left this room, went down a hallway, and then into a spherical room that had a single chair at its center. He sat down in the chair and when he began fiddling with a lever that was located on it, the light dimmed and he was presented with a 360 degree view of a field of stars. When he moved the lever some more, this star field seemed to rotate in its orientation.
Walton decided to stop what he was doing since he had no idea of what was happening, so he got up from the chair and began searching for an exit door. At that time, he was confronted by a tall human figure that was wearing blue coveralls and a glass helmet. This human figure did not speak to him but guided him out of the spherical room and down a ramp. At the end of the ramp was a large hanger-like area which contained a number of other discs like the one he had just exited. Essentially, he was actually inside a much larger UFO craft. The human took him to another room where he was confronted by three other humans, two men and a woman. The woman put a mask over his face and he blacked out. When he awoke, he found himself at the gas station where he then made his phone call.
Was Travis Walton telling the truth about his UFO abduction? He was later given a lie detector test that seemed to indicate he was not truthful, but there is a lot of controversy about the quality of this lie detector test he was given. However, his compatriots passed their lie detector tests indicating that they had encountered a UFO. The fact is that Travis Walton has not changed any of the details of his story in the many years since the event.
1980 Rendlesham Forest UFO event:
The 1980 Rendlesham Forest UFO incident is a very interesting and important one because of the detailed observations that were made by highly qualified and credible military sources. The incident spanned three days in 1980. Rendlesham Forest is a large pine forest, east of Ipswich, in Suffolk, England. Nearby are the twin NATO air bases, RAF Bentwaters and RAF Woodbridge. At the time, both bases were being leased to the United States Air Force. In 1980, the Cold War was running hot, and as a result there were nuclear weapons stored by the U.S. Air Force on the base. This being the case, the military personnel stationed there were of the highest quality. It is interesting to note that we would not know of this incident were it not for a freedom of information act document, a report by the base deputy commander, Col. Charles Halt, that was released to the public in 1983.
The incident began of the evening of December 26, 1980. The security military personnel had observed some strange lights in the Rendlesham Forest area and thought that an aircraft might have crashed there. Security at the base was tight given the presence of nuclear weapons and so a small group of military personnel was dispatched to the suspect area to check it out.
The person in charge of the investigation team was Sgt. James Penniston. He and another soldier approached the area of interest in Rendlesham Forest and to their great astonishment observed an object on the ground that was completely foreign to their military experience and training. The object appeared to be some sort of craft that had landed. It was black in color, triangular in shape, and about three meters wide and two meters in height. It was definitely not any sort of aircraft that they knew of. Penniston sketched the craft in his notebook and took a series of photos of it. He then proceeded to approach the craft and actually physically touched it with his hands. He said that the craft surface felt like metal and was somewhat warm to the touch. He also noted a series of figures that were etched into the craft’s surface. When the craft started to light up, Penniston retreated, and the craft took off at what Penniston described in his notebook as an “impossible” speed. Penniston and the other solder then returned to the base and reported what they had seen.
The next evening, December 27th, guards reported to the base deputy commander, Col. Charles Halt, that the craft had returned. Halt decided to investigate this for himself and so he and another group of security people went into Rendlesham Forest. Halt expected that by doing so, he would lay this matter to rest. But that is not what happened. Instead, Halt and his men observed multiple unknown craft in the sky. At one point in his encounter, one of the craft shown a narrow, focused beam of light down at Halt’s group. Halt was astonished and could not believe what he was seeing.
Upon his return to base, Halt drafted a memo describing the UFO encounter. This was a classified memo that was sent to the British Base Commander, since the U.S. Air Force was occupying a British air base. The whole Rendlesham Forest UFO incident would have been unknown to the general public, had it not been for a Freedom of Information Act request by a UFO group that caused Halt’s memo to be made public in 1983. Halt and Penniston have steadfastly maintained that what they encountered in Rendlesham Forest was not something made by mankind, but was of an extraterrestrial nature.
1986 Airline Encounter with a UFO:
Japan Air Lines flight 1628 was a UFO incident that occurred on November 17, 1986 involving a Japanese Boeing 747 cargo aircraft. The aircraft was enroute from Paris to Tokyo. On the Reykjavík to Anchorage section of the flight, at 5:11 PM over eastern Alaska, the crew first witnessed two unidentified objects to their left. These abruptly rose from below and closed in to escort their aircraft. Each had two rectangular arrays of what appeared to be glowing nozzles or thrusters, though their bodies remained obscured by darkness. When closest, the aircraft's cabin was lit up and the captain could feel their heat on his face. These two craft departed before a third, much larger object started trailing them, causing the pilots to request a change of course. Anchorage Air Traffic Control obliged and requested an oncoming United Airlines flight to confirm the unidentified traffic, but when it and a military craft sighted JAL 1628 at about 5:51 PM, no other craft could be distinguished. The sighting of 50 minutes ended in the vicinity of Mt. McKinley.
The pilot on the Japan Air Lines flight was Captain Terauchi. He and his cockpit crew first observed two square-shaped objects that had light and dark rectangular features on them. These square objects maneuvered around his airplane in ways that seemed to defy the laws of inertia. Their movements were sharp, discontinuous, and rapid. After a while these two objects went away, but a bit later the Captain noticed a very large, spherically-shaped UFO that seemed to be tracking the movements of his aircraft. Captain Terauchi described this object as being “twice the size of an aircraft carrier”. The Captain made a 360 degree turn, but the UFO continued to maintain its position with respect to his aircraft. Eventually, he lost sight of it and landed his plane successfully at the Anchorage, Alaska airport.
Captain Terauchi reported his encounter with these UFOs to the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration. All the pertinent aircraft data, pilot reports, and associated radar scans were sent to John Callahan, the FAA Division Chief of the Accidents and Investigations branch. Callahan initially thought that the Japan Air Lines flight might have been interacting with a secret U.S. stealth aircraft.
A meeting was set up at FAA headquarters in Washington DC to discuss this event. The meeting was attended by representatives of the FBI, CIA and President Reagan’s Scientific Study Team, among others. Upon completion of the presentation, all present were told that the incident was secret and that their meeting "never took place". According to Callahan, the officials considered the data to represent the first instance of recorded radar data on a UFO, and they took possession of all the presented data. However, the FAA’s report on this incident stated that it was due to a “split radar image”.
1989 Bob Lazar Area 51 Account:
In 1989, Bob Lazar made contact with a news reporter by the name of George Knapp at a Las Vegas, Nevada television station, and conveyed to him a fantastic account of his activities back-engineering captured UFOs at the infamous Area 51 in Nevada. The reason he did this is because Lazar was recently terminated from his job at Area 51 due to the fact that he had let others view a UFO, and Lazar was frightened for his life. He was afraid that black ops personnel would terminate him.
The Bob Lazar story begins at Los Alamos, New Mexico. In the 1980s, Lazar had been hired as a contract technician to work at the Clinton P. Anderson Meson Facility at the Los Alamos National Laboratory. Interestingly, I was also working at Los Alamos at that same time. Although I didn’t have any direct contact with him, I do remember one day reading about a jet-powered car that he had built in the local paper, the Los Alamos Monitor. Also, Lazar was listed in the Los Alamos personnel directory of that time. So, Bob Lazar was definitely employed at Los Alamos and I personally know this to be true. Later in the 1980s, Lazar left Los Alamos and moved to Las Vegas, Nevada, where he established his own photo processing small business.
Now, how did Bob Lazar come to be working on UFOs at Area 51? It’s a very interesting story. Edward Teller, the developer of the hydrogen bomb and an original member of the Manhattan Project, would come to Los Alamos periodically to meet with the people there and he typically also gave a lecture talk to the overall Los Alamos personnel. On one of his visits, Lazar came to his lecture early and Teller, before the lecture, was reading a copy of the Los Alamos Monitor newspaper that featured the article about Lazar’s jet-powered car. Lazar took it upon himself to start up a conversation with Teller about his car, and apparently this meeting remained in the recesses of Teller’s memory.
In Las Vegas, Lazar was getting tired of his photo business and submitted an application for U.S. government employment. On his application, Lazar audaciously listed Edward Teller as a reference. Now it’s important to note that Teller was very well placed in the government’s scientific community. It was Teller, for example, who convinced President Ronald Reagan to begin the “Star Wars” initiative. And it is also quite possible that Teller had some involvement in Area 51.
A bit later, Lazar received a phone call from a government official who told him that he had been approved for a position at Area 51, and that his employer would be the Office of Naval Intelligence. Arrangements were made for Lazar to fly to Area 51 via a private, unmarked jet service called Janet Airlines, that flew Area 51 personnel to and from the Las Vegas McCarran airport. Thus, Lazar began his employment at Area 51.
Once at Area 51, Lazar was loaded into a bus with blacked-out windows and driven approximately 10 miles to a site called S-4. He was given a book to read which gave him background information on S-4 and the fact that extraterrestrial craft were located there and were being back-engineered. Lazar was hired to be a part of this back-engineering effort.
Lazar was then taken to the extraterrestrial craft that he would be working on. His job was to try and understand the power system and propulsion system of this craft. Lazar called the craft the “sport model”. It was saucer shaped on the outside and was about 30 feet in diameter. Lazar was allowed to go inside the craft. He found it had two levels, an upper deck that he entered into and a lower deck below it. There were two seats in the upper deck but they were the size of children’s seats. At the center of the craft was what he was told was the energy reactor of the craft.
Lazar came to know that the energy reactor was able to generate the tremendous amount of energy required to create gravity waves. These gravity waves were then directed into gravity amplifiers whose output was fed into gravity emitters that were located in the lower deck of the craft. These gravity emitters were mounted on some sort of mounts that allowed them to swivel in different directions. So, it was the generation of gravity waves that allowed the craft to lift off the ground, hover, and speed away at high speeds. The key to the generation of the gravity waves appeared to be based on a new physics which scientists do not understand at the present time. Lazar said that the gravity waves were produced by the bombardment of Element 115 with proton particles. According to him, gravitons were being produced within the nucleus of Element 115.
Lazar’s pronouncement of Element 115 in the year 1989 is quite interesting. At that time, Element 115 had not yet been discovered by Earth scientists. In fact, Element 115 was not discovered until the year 2003, when it was first synthesized by scientists from Russia and America. Since the synthesis took place at a laboratory in Russia, Element 115 was later named Moscovium. The Element 115 that was synthesized was unstable with an extremely short half-life. However, atomic scientists believe that there is an “island of stability” in the vicinity of heavy elements such as 115, where there might be found stable isotopes of Element 115.
Given these later developments, it has always intrigued me that Lazar would speak about Element 115 in the year 1989, when this element would not yet be discovered on Earth until 14 years later. Lazar has further gone on to say that he personally took a piece of Element 115 to the Los Alamos National Laboratory in 1989 to have it machined into a particular shape for use in the extraterrestrial craft. This is also quite interesting to me since I was at Los Alamos in 1989 and had some knowledge of a heavy metal penetrator anti-armor program that was being conducted there at the time. In fact, such heavy metal materials were routinely being machined in the very building I worked in. Given this, it would have been very easy for a piece of Element 115 to have been machined without the knowledge of the type of material that it actually was, this being performed under classified security conditions.
1990 Belgian UFO wave:
The 1990 Belgian UFO wave actually began in November 1989. One night, a triangular-shaped object with lights underneath it was observed to be hovering in the air above a Belgian town by two policemen on night patrol. Subsequently, in 1990 many members of the Belgian public began to report similar looking triangular objects. These craft had a span of about 120 feet and were seen to move very slowly in the sky, then accelerate at terrific speeds. One observer was a Belgian army colonel who was the director of military infrastructure at the time. He had no explanation concerning the nature of the triangular craft that both he and his wife observed one night.
In March 1990, Belgian air force pilots were scrambled to try and make contact with one of these triangular UFOs. However, they found themselves unable to do so. A Belgian general was assigned to look into the case and found that the only possible explanation could be an American black project advanced craft. However, the general was given assurances by the American government that no such American black project vehicles were associated with the Belgian sightings.
1997 Phoenix Lights Event:
The fascinating thing about the 1997 Phoenix lights event is the fact that the phenomenon was observed by literally thousands of people across the State of Arizona. The initial observation actually occurred in Henderson, Nevada at about 8 pm. A man reported seeing a V-shaped object in the sky with lights on it, which appeared to be about the size of a 747 commercial aircraft. The V-shaped craft continued to move to the south into the area of Prescott, Arizona. Observers there noted that it was moving slowly and silently. It appeared to pass over them at a height of about 150 feet and when it passed over, they knew it was a solid craft because it blotted out the images of the stars when it passed by. As the craft passed over the Phoenix area, there were many people who saw it and took pictures of the phenomenon.
Perhaps the most significant witness of the 1997 Phoenix lights event was the then-governor of Arizona, Fife Symington. Although initially at the time Symington appeared to discount the event as a UFO, a few years later he recanted and stated that he had personally seen the craft himself. Symington, a former Air Force pilot, said: "I'm a pilot and I know just about every machine that flies. It was bigger than anything that I've ever seen. It remains a great mystery. As a pilot and a former Air Force Officer, I can definitively say that this craft did not resemble any manmade object I'd ever seen.” So Symington was unable to identify the size, shape, and flight characteristics of the craft that he himself observed. And he was certain that it was not a military aircraft object.
However, somewhat after the fact, the U.S. Air Force put forward an explanation that what the public had observed was actually a training flight of military aircraft that was releasing flares. But when Governor Symington contacted the military in real time to try and determine what the lights were, the military response was “no comment”. The military flare explanation did not describe what a great many of the public observers saw and they scoffed at it. The actual observers were convinced that what they saw was a UFO.
2004 UFO Encounters with Aircraft Carrier Nimitz Navy Planes:
In November 2004, the aircraft carrier Nimitz and its support ships were conducting operational drills in the Pacific Ocean about 100 miles from San Diego. At this time, Navy radar ship personnel and Navy aircraft had encounters with UFOs that the Navy personnel could not identify. Rather interestingly, these events were kept secret from the public by the Navy until 2017, when an expose appeared in the New York Times.
The encounters began in early November 2004 when highly advanced radar tracking systems on the USS cruiser Princeton began tracking multiple unknown targets that kept appearing on their radar screens. The Princeton was equipped with the highly advanced Aegis radar system which was designed to protect the Nimitz from aerial threats. Multiple targets were observed that descended rapidly from 80,000 feet altitude down to 28,000 feet. The personnel on the Princeton thought that their system might have some glitches, so they had it thoroughly inspected. However, the unknown targets continued to appear.
On November 14th, the Nimitz had aircraft in the air as part of their training exercise at the same time the unknown targets were being observed by the Princeton. So, the commander of the Nimitz decided to send two jets over to the target position in order to determine what these targets were.
When the aircraft reached the target area, they observed a whitish object below the surface of the ocean that was about the size of a 737 aircraft. In addition, they also saw a small oblong white craft in the air about the size of a fighter jet. The oblong white craft was described by the pilots as a “tic-tac” because it looked like tic-tac candy. However, the “tic-tac” was flying very fast and in a highly erratic manner, stopping and starting abruptly and changing directions abruptly. It was making maneuvers that no Navy aircraft could make because of the G-forces that would kill the pilots. The military jets were clearly trying to intercept an unknown vehicle which was much faster and much more maneuverable than their own craft. The unknown craft had no flight surfaces and no apparent engines. It was observed to descend from 80,000 feet to 50 feet above the water in such a small amount of time that its speed was estimated to exceed 20,000 miles per hour. Yet no sonic boom was detected. In addition, the pilots were able to get infrared radar locks on the tic-tac. The pilots involved in the encounter said that the unknown craft were so strange that they were probably not of this Earth.
When the pilots returned to the Nimitz, they were met by the Nimitz commander and two unknown Air Force officers. They were forced to sign non-disclosure agreements about their encounter and told that the incident never happened. Additionally, the classified radar tapes of the entire incident were physically removed from the USS Princeton by unidentified civilian personnel at the request of the Princeton commander, and the radar operators were told to keep silent about the incident. These are the reasons why this 2004 incident was not revealed to the public until 2017, a full 13 years after the fact. As a result of the Nimitz UFO incident coming to light, the Navy has revised its guidance to its personnel to report any and all UFO incidents that may be encountered in the future.
2006 UFO Incident at O’Hare Airport in Chicago:
The O’Hare airport UFO incident took place on November 7, 2006 at about 4:30 pm. Ground crews and some pilots in airplanes at the airport saw a disc shaped craft about 24 feet in diameter and of a gray color hovering over airport Gate C-17. It was below an overcast cloud deck that was at about 1000 feet height. Over 12 witnesses saw this event, but people in the O’Hare tower did not, nor did the craft appear on their radar. After hovering stationary for about five minutes, the craft shot up vertically at very high speed, so fast that it punched a circular hole in the cloud deck through which blue sky could be observed.
Both United Airlines and the Federal Aviation Administration first denied to the Chicago Tribune newspaper that this event even happened. However, a freedom of information request by the Chicago Tribune eventually revealed that a call was made by a United supervisor to an FAA official about the UFO sighting. In the end, the FAA declined to investigate this UFO event further, stating that it was due to a weather-related phenomenon, something that was absolutely refuted by the actual event witnesses. To the present time, the 2006 UFO incident at O’Hare airport remains a mystery to those who experienced it.
2014 USS Teddy Roosevelt UFO Incident:
In 2014, the aircraft carrier USS Teddy Roosevelt was having a training mission off the east coast of the United States, prior to being deployed to the Persian Gulf. At that time, jet fighters from the Roosevelt were encountering UFOs on their vicinity. These fighters actually obtained radar images of the UFOs and saw some highly unusual things. There were no obvious flight surfaces and the UFOs were observed to exhibit a rotational motion during their flight. One pilot described something "like a sphere encasing a cube”. As with the 2004 Nimitz incident, the Roosevelt encounters were not reported to the public until 2017, when they appeared in the New York Times. The Pentagon confirmed that the videos published were in fact genuine military videos.
The 2017 revelation of the Nimitz and Roosevelt UFO encounters lead to classified Congressional briefings. It is said that a general stated at these briefings that the mysterious objects being encountered by the military were not related to any secret U.S. technology.
Photo of a UFO taken by the Navy in 2014
This is a photo of a UFO taken by a Navy aircraft from the USS Roosevelt in 2014 that was pursuing it. The pilots stated that the object was rotating while in fast flight, something no Navy aircraft can yet do. Note the lightish region that surrounds the UFO, which might suggest some type of electromagnetic field. This photo was officially confirmed as being authentic by the U.S. Navy.
The UFO cases that I have summarized make it clear that extraterrestrial beings are presently visiting the Earth. This is the only logical conclusion one can come to. Furthermore, it appears that governments worldwide are aware of this fact, but have deliberately withheld this information from the general public. This is most evident by the United States government. Why is the public not being told? For a while, it was because the governments feared that social, economic, and religious dislocations would occur if such information were widely known. However, there is also the situation that government black programs have been under development to back-engineer extraterrestrial technology, and these programs exist under a cloak of deeply classified national security restrictions. There is even the speculation that governments have treaty arrangements with extraterrestrials to develop advanced technologies.
Types of Extraterrestrials:
What types of extraterrestrials are currently interacting with Earth? That is a very good question indeed. There are some people who say that as many as 80 different types of extraterrestrials may currently have activities on Earth. These extraterrestrials are from different locations in our physical universe, some as close as 10 light years away, and even some from different galaxies much, much further distant. Some people also say that there are extraterrestrials that come from different dimensions, whatever that may mean. Are such different dimensions of a physical or non-physical nature? Are they multidimensional?
However, there appear to be three major groups of extraterrestrials currently interacting with Earth. These three groups are the Nordics, the Greys, and the Reptilians. In terms of what they may look like, they are typically depicted as shown below:
Nordics Greys Reptilians
Extraterrestrial Types
The Nordics appear quite similar to Earth humans, while the Greys and Reptilians do not. However, all of these types are humanoid, in that they possess a head, a torso, two arms, and two legs. One question I have had for a long time is why these extraterrestrials are humanoid in form. Is their DNA similar to our own, and if so, why?
It’s interesting that the Nordics look so much like ourselves. What is the reason for this quite striking similarity? Are Earth human beings related to them in some unknown way? Are the Nordics our distant ancestors?
These three classes of extraterrestrials appear to be based upon mammals, insects, and reptiles. On Earth, all three of these biological classes possess essentially similar DNA structures in their biological makeups. This certainly begs the question as to whether Earth-based DNA is unique to Earth or came to Earth from extraterrestrial sources. In other words, did Earth life begin from random chemical reactions in a “warm pond” as Darwin suggested, or was it the result of panspermia from comets or asteroids, or perhaps artificially planted here by extraterrestrials billions of years ago.
Nordics:
There is quite a large amount of information about Nordics provided by their interactions with the Swiss national Eduard Albert (Billy) Meier. Meier was born in 1937 and then spent his youth traveling around the Middle East. At one point, he was a member of the French Foreign Legion. He got the nickname Billy because he used to wear a cowboy hat and his friends thought that he looked like the old west outlaw Billy the Kid. In 1965 he lost his left arm in a bus accident, so since then he has been a one-armed man. Sometime after that, he met and married a Greek woman, Kalliope Zafiriou, with whom he had three children. At the present time, Meier is still alive.
Meier claims his extraterrestrial encounters began in 1942, at the age of five, when he met an elderly Pleiadian man named Sfath. After Sfath's death in 1953, Meier said that he began communicating with an extraterrestrial woman by the name of Asket. All contacts ceased in 1964, he said, but then resumed on January 28, 1975, when he met Semjase, the granddaughter of Sfath.
The Billy Meier case has been heavily documented by the UFO investigator Wendelle C. Stevens. Wendelle Stevens was a retired US Air Force pilot-turned-UFO investigator and researcher. Wendelle began his military career in the Army Air Force in 1942. After WWII, in the newly formed Air Force, he participated in many top-secret programs, including those which had him investigate UFOs. Having this official inside knowledge, he knew there was something to the phenomena, so he began his own private research and investigation. Stevens died in 2010.
In about 1977, Stevens first heard of the Billy Meier UFO interactions and went to Switzerland to meet Meier himself. He became convinced that Meier was telling the truth and was interacting with the Pleiadian extraterrestrial woman Semjase on a regular basis. He conducted an extensive analysis of the evidence that Meier had obtained concerning the Pleiadian extraterrestrials. In 1979 Stevens acquired 1,800 pages from Meier in the form of 18 volumes of 100 pages each, the entire first edition German contact notes, Semjase Kontakt Berichte 1st Edition, which he then published in English as the book “Message from the Pleiades”. The Billy Meier contact notes provide a verbatim transcription of Meier’s many conversations with Semjase, and Meier stated that he was able to transcribe them from his mind word-for-word.
According the Meier, Semjase was a rather good looking human-type woman with blonde hair. He said she looked like she was in her early 30s, but she stated she was actually 330 years old. Semjase said the Pleiadians had a lifespan of about 1000 years. The Pleiades star cluster is located 444 light-years from Earth.
Meier had taken a great number of daylight UFO pictures with his 1970s 35mm film camera and also with a moving picture film camera during the time period of 1975-1980. One must remember that in that time period, there were no digital cameras and certainly no digital photo processing. Meier said that he would be telepathically told in his mind to go to a certain location at a certain time in order to observe the Pleiadian ships. He would typically see these ships alone, but on occasion other people were with him that observed them also. Shown below is a photo Meier took of a Pleiadian UFO vehicle. The Pleiadians referred to their craft as “beam ships”.
Pleiadian beam ship
If Meier’s UFO photos are genuine and not faked photos of UFO models as some people have claimed, they are clearly the best UFO photographs that have ever been taken to date. Wendelle Stevens and his team had Meier’s photographs analyzed with the best computer digital analysis techniques available in the 1970s, and the conclusion of that study was that the photos were not faked. There then remains the possibility that Meier somehow was able to photograph string-supported models of UFOs. However, the scientific photo analyses did not reveal any evidence of string or support structures in the photos.
When asked if Meier had any photos of Semjase, he said that he had attempted to take some of her, but that the photo film always came out blank after development. That is rather unfortunate.
Meier also recorded audio sounds that the Pleiadian beam ships made and they have a rather eerie, electromagnetic oscillating whine to them. Wendelle Stevens had scientific audio analyses done on these recordings, and complex interactions of a variety of audio frequencies were detected.
In Meier’s contact notes, Semjase goes into considerable detail describing the Pleiadian views of spirituality and religion. We will go into this in more detail later in the book.
Greys:
The public first became aware of Grey extraterrestrials as a result of the Betty and Barney Hill abduction case of 1961. The next situation that played an impact was the revelation in 1978 of the 1947 Roswell UFO crash by Maj. Jesse Marcel, where it was reported that the extraterrestrials were of the Grey type.
Greys are described as being humanoid with small bodies, smooth grey-colored skin, enlarged hairless heads, and large black eyes. Size wise, they are small in stature like children. Greys are typically depicted as grey-skinned diminutive humanoid beings that possess reduced forms of, or completely lack, external human body parts such as noses, ears or sex organs. Their bodies are usually described as being elongated, having a small chest, and lacking in muscular definition and visible skeletal structure. Their legs are depicted as being shorter and jointed differently from humans, with limbs proportionally different from a human. Greys are said to be descended from insectoid species.
During her abduction, Betty Hill asked the Grey beings where they were from and they showed her a star chart which was years later interpreted to show that their home planet was in the Zeta Reticuli binary star system, which is 39 light-years from Earth.
Reptilians:
Reptilians are reported to be of two types, one extraterrestrial and one that evolved on Earth. The extraterrestrial reptilians are said to be from the area of Alpha Draconis (approximately 300 light-years from Earth) and are referred to as Draconians. The Draconians are described as war-like in nature and seek to conquer and occupy different regions of the Milky Way Galaxy by force. They are described as being very large in stature, between 14-22 feet tall and weighing up to 2000 pounds, with some possessing wing-like appendages. The Draconians are bipedal, with two legs, two arms, a torso, and a reptilian appearing head, and they are covered with a scaly-type exterior.
The second type of reptilians are those said to have evolved naturally here on Earth. They are descendants of the dinosaurs who evolved into bipedal form millions of years before the evolution of homo sapiens from the mammals. These Earth reptilians consider themselves to be the original inhabitants of the Earth, with homo sapiens being the latecomers. They are said to live underground in deep large caverns, where they have cities. They possess the ability of space travel and have some bases on the Moon, Mars, and the moons of Jupiter. They shy away from contact with humans and have the ability, through mind control, to make humans perceive them as human when there are any meetings with humans. It is said that they maintain some level of secret contact with human governments and leaders.
Religious Views Concerning Extraterrestrials:
If extraterrestrials were to land on the White House lawn tomorrow, what would be the reaction of the world’s religions and the impact upon billions of peoples’ religious beliefs?
Western Religions:
Judaism:
The Jewish Torah provides some suggestions that extraterrestrials may have been interacting with human beings very long ago. Here is an interesting statement in the Genesis Chapter of the Torah:
6:4 There were giants in the earth in those days; and also after that, when the sons of God came in unto the daughters of men, and they bare children to them, the same became mighty men which were of old, men of renown.
The Torah speaks about sons of God who came in unto the daughters of men, and caused them to bare giant offspring. However, the Torah is short on the details of this. More information can be found in the Book of Enoch.
Enoch was the 7th pre-flood patriarch from Adam. He was the father of Methuselah, the most long-lived patriarch who died at the age of 969. Enoch himself reached the age of 365, when it is said that he did not die but rather was taken up into heaven. Enoch was also the great-grandfather of Noah who survived the Great Flood.
For some reason, the Book of Enoch was not included in the Jewish Torah. However, portions of it were found among the Dead Sea Scrolls, so it is clear that the Essenes who lived at the time of Jesus were quite familiar with Enoch’s writing.
Here is how Enoch describes the “fallen angels”, who he calls “The Watchers”:
6.1 And it came to pass, when the sons of men had increased, that in those days there were born to them fair and beautiful daughters.
6.2 And the Angels, the sons of Heaven, saw them and desired them. And they said to one another: "Come, let us choose for ourselves wives, from the children of men, and let us beget, for ourselves, children."
6.3 And Semyaza, who was their leader, said to them: "I fear that you may not wish this deed to be done and that I alone will pay for this great sin."
6.4 And they all answered him, and said: "Let us all swear an oath, and bind one-another with curses, so not to alter this plan, but to carry out this plan effectively."
6.5 Then they all swore together and all bound one another with curses to it.
6.6 And they were, in all, two hundred and they came down on Ardis, which is the summit of Mount Hermon. And they called the mountain Hermon because on it they swore and bound one another with curses.
6.7 And these are the names of their leaders: Semyaza, who was their leader, Urakiba, Ramiel, Kokabiel, Tamiel, Ramiel, Daniel, Ezeqiel, Baraqiel, Asael, Armaros, Ananel, Zaqiel, Samsiel, Satael, Turiel, Yomiel, Araziel.
6.8 These are the leaders of the two hundred Angels and of all the others with them.
7.1 And they took wives for themselves and everyone chose for himself one each. And they began to go into them and were promiscuous with them. And they taught them charms and spells, and they showed them the cutting of roots and trees.
7.2 And they became pregnant and bore large giants. And their height was three thousand cubits.
7.3 These devoured all the toil of men; until men were unable to sustain them.
7.4 And the giants turned against them in order to devour men.
7.5 And they began to sin against birds, and against animals, and against reptiles, and against fish, and they devoured one another's flesh, and drank the blood from it.
7.6 Then the Earth complained about the lawless ones.
8.1 And Azazel taught men to make swords, and daggers, and shields, and breastplates. And he showed them the things after these, and the art of making them; bracelets, and ornaments, and the art of making up the eyes, and of beautifying the eyelids, and the most precious stones, and all kinds of coloured dyes. And the world was changed.
8.2 And there was great impiety, and much fornication, and they went astray, and all their ways became corrupt.
8.3 Amezarak taught all those who cast spells and cut roots, Armaros the release of spells, and Baraqiel astrologers, and Kokabiel portents, and Tamiel taught astrology, and Asradel taught the path of the Moon.
It would seem that The Watchers were a renegade group from a larger group of off-world extraterrestrials, who decided to mate with human women. Enoch says that when they wished to, they were able to appear as men.
According to Enoch, the behavior of the fallen angels and their offspring was not acceptable to the higher authorities, and thus the decision was made to wipe them off the face of the Earth through the mechanism of the Great Flood of Noah, which would happen in the future with respect to Enoch.
At the age of 365, the Genesis Torah states that Enoch did not die, but was physically taken up into heaven by the higher authorities.
The next person in the Torah to discuss is Abraham. Abraham’s original name was Abram, but it was later changed to Abraham. Abraham’s father was named Terah and he originally lived in a town called Ur. Abraham’s wife was named Sarai and she was later given the name Sarah. He also had a brother by the name of Lot. Terah relocated from Ur to the land of Canaan, along with Abraham, Sarah, and Lot. Abraham lived in the town of Hebron while his brother Lot lived in the town of Sodom. Abraham also had interactions with Melchizedek, the King of the town of Salem.
The Torah indicates that Abraham had three “visitors” come by one day:
18:2 And he lift up his eyes and looked, and, lo, three men stood by him: and when he saw them, he ran to meet them from the tent door, and bowed himself toward the ground,
18:3 And said, My LORD, if now I have found favour in thy sight, pass not away, I pray thee, from thy servant:
18:4 Let a little water, I pray you, be fetched, and wash your feet, and rest yourselves under the tree:
18:5 And I will fetch a morsel of bread, and comfort ye your hearts; after that ye shall pass on: for therefore are ye come to your servant. And they said, So do, as thou hast said.
18:6 And Abraham hastened into the tent unto Sarah, and said, Make ready quickly three measures of fine meal, knead it, and make cakes upon the hearth.
18:7 And Abraham ran unto the herd, and fetcht a calf tender and good, and gave it unto a young man; and he hasted to dress it.
18:8 And he took butter, and milk, and the calf which he had dressed, and set it before them; and he stood by them under the tree, and they did eat.
18:9 And they said unto him, Where is Sarah thy wife? And he said, Behold, in the tent.
18:10 And he said, I will certainly return unto thee according to the time of life; and, lo, Sarah thy wife shall have a son. And Sarah heard it in the tent door, which was behind him.
18:11 Now Abraham and Sarah were old and well stricken in age; and it ceased to be with Sarah after the manner of women.
18:12 Therefore Sarah laughed within herself, saying, After I am waxed old shall I have pleasure, my lord being old also?
18:13 And the LORD said unto Abraham, Wherefore did Sarah laugh, saying, Shall I of a surety bear a child, which am old?
18:14 Is any thing too hard for the LORD? At the time appointed I will return unto thee, according to the time of life, and Sarah shall have a son.
18:15 Then Sarah denied, saying, I laughed not; for she was afraid. And he said, Nay; but thou didst laugh.
18:16 And the men rose up from thence, and looked toward Sodom: and Abraham went with them to bring them on the way.
These “men” left Abraham to go and visit his brother Lot in the town of Sodom:
19:1 And there came two angels to Sodom at even; and Lot sat in the gate of Sodom: and Lot seeing them rose up to meet them; and he bowed himself with his face toward the ground;
19:2 And he said, Behold now, my lords, turn in, I pray you, into your servant's house, and tarry all night, and wash your feet, and ye shall rise up early, and go on your ways. And they said, Nay; but we will abide in the street all night.
19:3 And he pressed upon them greatly; and they turned in unto him, and entered into his house; and he made them a feast, and did bake unleavened bread, and they did eat.
19:4 But before they lay down, the men of the city, even the men of Sodom, compassed the house round, both old and young, all the people from every quarter:
19:5 And they called unto Lot, and said unto him, Where are the men which came in to thee this night? bring them out unto us, that we may know them.
19:6 And Lot went out at the door unto them, and shut the door after him,
19:7 And said, I pray you, brethren, do not so wickedly.
19:8 Behold now, I have two daughters which have not known man; let me, I pray you, bring them out unto you, and do ye to them as is good in your eyes: only unto these men do nothing; for therefore came they under the shadow of my roof.
19:9 And they said, Stand back. And they said again, This one fellow came in to sojourn, and he will needs be a judge: now will we deal worse with thee, than with them. And they pressed sore upon the man, even Lot, and came near to break the door.
19:10 But the men put forth their hand, and pulled Lot into the house to them, and shut to the door.
19:11 And they smote the men that were at the door of the house with blindness, both small and great: so that they wearied themselves to find the door.
19:12 And the men said unto Lot, Hast thou here any besides? son in law, and thy sons, and thy daughters, and whatsoever thou hast in the city, bring them out of this place:
19:13 For we will destroy this place, because the cry of them is waxen great before the face of the LORD; and the LORD hath sent us to destroy it.
Who were these “men” that visited both Abraham and Lot? They appeared to Abraham and Lot as men and they ate and drank as men. But one must wonder if they might actually have been extraterrestrials. They clearly had the technological means to completely obliterate the towns of Sodom and Gomorrah.
Then we come to Moses. Moses’ first interaction with higher beings came when he encountered the “angel of the Lord” in the “burning bush”:
3:1 Now Moses kept the flock of Jethro his father in law, the priest of Midian: and he led the flock to the backside of the desert, and came to the mountain of God, even to Horeb.
3:2 And the angel of the LORD appeared unto him in a flame of fire out of the midst of a bush: and he looked, and, behold, the bush burned with fire, and the bush was not consumed.
3:3 And Moses said, I will now turn aside, and see this great sight, why the bush is not burnt.
3:4 And when the LORD saw that he turned aside to see, God called unto him out of the midst of the bush, and said, Moses, Moses. And he said, Here am I.
3:5 And he said, Draw not nigh hither: put off thy shoes from off thy feet, for the place whereon thou standest is holy ground.
3:6 Moreover he said, I am the God of thy father, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob. And Moses hid his face; for he was afraid to look upon God.
Now in this passage from Exodus in the Torah, it is not clear whether it was an angel of the Lord or the Lord himself who appeared to Moses in the “burning bush”. And what are we to make of the “burning bush”. Was this some sort of field associated with the manifestation of the being that Moses was interacting with?
Then there is the description of events when the Pharaoh finally decided to let the Jewish people leave Egypt:
12:37 And the children of Israel journeyed from Rameses to Succoth, about six hundred thousand on foot that were men, beside children.
13:21 And the LORD went before them by day in a pillar of a cloud, to lead them the way; and by night in a pillar of fire, to give them light; to go by day and night:
13:22 He took not away the pillar of the cloud by day, nor the pillar of fire by night, from before the people.
14:8 And the LORD hardened the heart of Pharaoh king of Egypt, and he pursued after the children of Israel: and the children of Israel went out with a high hand.
14:9 But the Egyptians pursued after them, all the horses and chariots of Pharaoh, and his horsemen, and his army, and overtook them encamping by the sea, beside Pihahiroth, before Baalzephon.
14:10 And when Pharaoh drew nigh, the children of Israel lifted up their eyes, and, behold, the Egyptians marched after them; and they were sore afraid: and the children of Israel cried out unto the LORD.
14:11 And they said unto Moses, Because there were no graves in Egypt, hast thou taken us away to die in the wilderness? wherefore hast thou dealt thus with us, to carry us forth out of Egypt? 14:12 Is not this the word that we did tell thee in Egypt, saying, Let us alone, that we may serve the Egyptians? For it had been better for us to serve the Egyptians, than that we should die in the wilderness.
14:13 And Moses said unto the people, Fear ye not, stand still, and see the salvation of the LORD, which he will shew to you to day: for the Egyptians whom ye have seen to day, ye shall see them again no more for ever.
14:14 The LORD shall fight for you, and ye shall hold your peace.
14:15 And the LORD said unto Moses, Wherefore criest thou unto me? speak unto the children of Israel, that they go forward:
14:16 But lift thou up thy rod, and stretch out thine hand over the sea, and divide it: and the children of Israel shall go on dry ground through the midst of the sea.
14:17 And I, behold, I will harden the hearts of the Egyptians, and they shall follow them: and I will get me honour upon Pharaoh, and upon all his host, upon his chariots, and upon his horsemen
.
14:18 And the Egyptians shall know that I am the LORD, when I have gotten me honour upon Pharaoh, upon his chariots, and upon his horsemen.
14:19 And the angel of God, which went before the camp of Israel, removed and went behind them; and the pillar of the cloud went from before their face, and stood behind them: 14:20 And it came between the camp of the Egyptians and the camp of Israel; and it was a cloud and darkness to them, but it gave light by night to these: so that the one came not near the other all the night.
14:21 And Moses stretched out his hand over the sea; and the LORD caused the sea to go back by a strong east wind all that night, and made the sea dry land, and the waters were divided.
14:22 And the children of Israel went into the midst of the sea upon the dry ground: and the waters were a wall unto them on their right hand, and on their left.
14:23 And the Egyptians pursued, and went in after them to the midst of the sea, even all Pharaoh's horses, his chariots, and his horsemen.
14:24 And it came to pass, that in the morning watch the LORD looked unto the host of the Egyptians through the pillar of fire and of the cloud, and troubled the host of the Egyptians,
14:25 And took off their chariot wheels, that they drave them heavily: so that the Egyptians said, Let us flee from the face of Israel; for the LORD fighteth for them against the Egyptians.
14:26 And the LORD said unto Moses, Stretch out thine hand over the sea, that the waters may come again upon the Egyptians, upon their chariots, and upon their horsemen.
14:27 And Moses stretched forth his hand over the sea, and the sea returned to his strength when the morning appeared; and the Egyptians fled against it; and the LORD overthrew the Egyptians in the midst of the sea.
14:28 And the waters returned, and covered the chariots, and the horsemen, and all the host of Pharaoh that came into the sea after them; there remained not so much as one of them.
So, at the time of the Exodus under Moses, the Jewish people were guided “by day in a pillar of a cloud, to lead them the way; and by night in a pillar of fire, to give them light”. This almost sounds like there was a UFO in the sky that guided the direction of travel of the Jewish group. At the Red Sea, “the Lord looked unto the host of the Egyptians through the pillar of fire and of the cloud”. This suggests that the Lord was actually located inside a vehicle in the sky and caused the waters to part for the Jews but to return and drown all the Egyptians.
It seems clear to me that the Jewish Torah holds a number of accounts that are possibly related to the presence of extraterrestrials. Such accounts appear strongly associated with Enoch, Abraham, and Moses. Given these accounts in the Torah, it seems possible that Judaism might not be completely surprised if extraterrestrials from the heavens revealed themselves to modern day Jews.
Christianity:
The New Testament Bible is rife with references to angels who might possibly have been extraterrestrials. This begins with the visit of the Angel Gabriel to Mary, as described in the Gospel of Luke:
26 In the sixth month of Elizabeth's pregnancy, God sent the angel Gabriel to Nazareth, a town in Galilee,
27 to a virgin pledged to be married to a man named Joseph, a descendant of David. The virgin's name was Mary.
28 The angel went to her and said, "Greetings, you who are highly favored! The Lord is with you."
29 Mary was greatly troubled at his words and wondered what kind of greeting this might be.
30 But the angel said to her, "Do not be afraid, Mary; you have found favor with God.
31 You will conceive and give birth to a son, and you are to call him Jesus.
32 He will be great and will be called the Son of the Most High. The Lord God will give him the throne of his father David,
33 and he will reign over Jacob's descendants forever; his kingdom will never end."
34 "How will this be," Mary asked the angel, "since I am a virgin?"
35 The angel answered, "The Holy Spirit will come on you, and the power of the Most High will overshadow you. So the holy one to be born will be called the Son of God.
So, it was an angelic being, Gabriel, who told Mary about her future son, Jesus, and how he would be conceived.
Next we come to the birth of Jesus in Bethlehem. The Bible says that the three kings were led to the spot by a “star” that guided them, as indicated in the Gospel of Matthew:
And having heard the king, they went their way; and lo, the star, which they had seen in the east, went on before them, until it came and stood over where the Child was. And when they saw the star, they rejoiced exceedingly with great joy. And they came into the house and saw the Child with Mary His mother; and they fell down and worshiped Him; and opening their treasures they presented to Him gifts of gold and frankincense and myrrh (Matt. 2:9-11)
It was a “star” that went before the three kings and guided them to the place where Jesus was born. Could this “star” have been an extraterrestrial craft?
Then there is the baptism of Jesus by John the Baptist, as given in the Gospel of Mark:
9 And it came to pass in those days, that Jesus came from Nazareth of Galilee, and was baptized of John in the Jordan.
10 And straightway coming up out of the water, he saw the heavens rent asunder, and the Spirit as a dove descending upon him:
11 and a voice came out of the heavens, Thou art my beloved Son, in thee I am well pleased.
This biblical event was painted by Flemmish artist Aert De Gelder in the year 1710. A disc-shaped object appears to shine beams of light on John the Baptist and Jesus in this painting. One must ask why the artist depicted such an image, particularly in the year 1710, when there were no manmade objects in the sky. It looks very much like a flying saucer.
Painting of the baptism of Jesus
Next, we consider the transfiguration of Jesus on the mountain, as described in the Gospel of Mark
2 And after six days Jesus taketh with him Peter, and James, and John, and leadeth them up into an high mountain apart by themselves: and he was transfigured before them.
3 And his raiment became shining, exceeding white as snow; so as no fuller on earth can white them.
4 And there appeared unto them Elias with Moses: and they were talking with Jesus.
5 And Peter answered and said to Jesus, Master, it is good for us to be here: and let us make three tabernacles; one for thee, and one for Moses, and one for Elias.
6 For he wist not what to say; for they were sore afraid.
7 And there was a cloud that overshadowed them: and a voice came out of the cloud, saying, This is my beloved Son: hear him.
8 And suddenly, when they had looked round about, they saw no man any more, save Jesus only with themselves.
Jesus, Peter, James, and John go up on the mountain and Jesus is transfigured, so that “his raiment became shining, exceeding white as snow”. Furthermore, Elias and Moses appear from nowhere. But how did the apostles know that these figures were actually Moses and Elias, since they could not have known what these Jewish historical figures looked like. And then “there was a cloud that overshadowed them: and a voice came out of the cloud, saying, “This is my beloved Son: hear him.” Might this “cloud” have actually been an extraterrestrial vehicle hovering in the sky, from which a message was projected? And finally, Moses and Elias magically disappear from the group. Were they teleported out?
Now, we have the resurrection of Jesus as written in the Gospel of Mark:
1 Saturday evening, when the Sabbath ended, Mary Magdalene, Mary the mother of James, and Salome went out and purchased burial spices so they could anoint Jesus’ body.
2 Very early on Sunday morning just at sunrise, they went to the tomb.
3 On the way they were asking each other, “Who will roll away the stone for us from the entrance to the tomb?”
4 But as they arrived, they looked up and saw that the stone, which was very large, had already been rolled aside.
5 When they entered the tomb, they saw a young man clothed in a white robe sitting on the right side. The women were shocked,
6 but the angel said, “Don’t be alarmed. You are looking for Jesus of Nazareth, who was crucified. He isn’t here! He is risen from the dead! Look, this is where they laid his body.
7 Now go and tell his disciples, including Peter, that Jesus is going ahead of you to Galilee. You will see him there, just as he told you before he died.”
So, the women entered the empty tomb and were told by a “young man clothed in a white robe” that Jesus had risen. Could this young man have been an extraterrestrial? Clearly, this being had the appearance of a young man, rather than an angel.
And finally, we have the ascension of Jesus. Here is how it is described in the Acts of the Apostles as written by Luke:
6 So when they had come together, they asked him, “Lord, will you at this time restore the kingdom to Israel?”
7 He said to them, “It is not for you to know times or seasons that the Father has fixed by his own authority.
8 But you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come upon you, and you will be my witnesses in Jerusalem and in all Judea and Samaria, and to the end of the earth.”
9 And when he had said these things, as they were looking on, he was lifted up, and a cloud took him out of their sight.
10 And while they were gazing into heaven as he went, behold, two men stood by them in white robes,
11 and said, “Men of Galilee, why do you stand looking into heaven? This Jesus, who was taken up from you into heaven, will come in the same way as you saw him go into heaven.”
So, as the assembled people were looking on, “he was lifted up, and a cloud took him out of their sight”. Was Jesus actually levitated into the body of an extraterrestrial craft? And what of the two men who suddenly appeared from nowhere and spoke to the crowd. Were they from the extraterrestrial craft?
The story of Jesus in the New Testament is clearly punctuated at key locations with descriptions of “clouds” in the sky, as well as beings that seem to appear from nowhere. Does this imply that Jesus might have actually had extraterrestrial origins himself? I think that such an idea would be difficult for most, if not all, Christians to accept.
Yet, in the year 2012, Jesuit Father Jose Funes, Vatican Chief astronomer and director of the Vatican Observatory, said Christians should consider alien life as an “extraterrestrial brother” and a part of God’s creation. So, it seems that the Catholic Church has at least begun to establish a position to be taken when the existence of extraterrestrials becomes indisputable to mankind.
There is one miracle event associated with the Catholic Church that bears on the above. There can be no doubt that it was the “dance of the sun” that took place in Fatima, Portugal on October 13, 1917. Let me relate to you the details of this seemingly miraculous event.
On May 13, 1917, three young Portuguese children had a vision of a strange “Lady”. This occurred in a pasture called Cova da Iria. The three children were Lucia Santos (age 10), Franscisco Marto (age 9), and Jacinta Marto (age 7). The Lady appeared to them floating near the top branches of a small oak tree. She told them that she had messages for them and that she would reappear at the same time and in the same spot on the 13th day of the month, for the next five months.
On the 13th of each subsequent month, the children saw and talked with the Lady at the oak tree in Cova. And, as word of this miraculous event got around, they were accompanied by larger and larger crowds of devout Catholics, who believed the Lady to be Mary, the mother of Jesus. Only the children could actually see the Lady. The crowds saw nothing but the children, who appeared to be entranced by an unseen presence.
The Lady told the children that the war (World War I) would end soon. She said that Russia would be converted. She gave the children a vision of Hell, and revealed two other secrets to the children. And on July 13th, the Lady told the children that there would be a “great sign” on her last visit on the 13th of October, so that people would believe.
The 13th of October was a dreary day, cold and quite rainy. Despite these conditions, the children, along with approximately 70,000 people, were assembled at the Cova for the last visit of the Lady, and the promised “great sign”. Included in the crowd were many skeptics there to observe what might happen. The Lady appeared to the children and Lucia asked her what her name was. In response, she said that she was the Lady of the Rosary. And with that she rose into the sky and disappeared.
Then the promised “great sign” began. Here is how it was described by a number of the skeptics in the crowd who observed it. These eyewitness accounts were told to John De Marchi, a Catholic priest and researcher who interviewed eyewitnesses in depth during his research on Fatima conducted during the period 1943-1950.
"Before the astonished eyes of the crowd, whose aspect was biblical as they stood bare-headed, eagerly searching the sky, the sun trembled, made sudden incredible movements outside all cosmic laws — the sun 'danced' according to the typical expression of the people." ― Avelino de Almeida, reporter for the highly secular newspaper O Século.
"The sun, at one moment surrounded with scarlet flame, at another aureoled in yellow and deep purple, seemed to be in an exceeding fast and whirling movement, at times appearing to be loosened from the sky and to be approaching the earth, strongly radiating heat." ― Dr. Domingos Pinto Coelho, reporter for the newspaper Ordem.
"The sun's disc did not remain immobile. This was not the sparkling of a heavenly body, for it spun round on itself in a mad whirl, when suddenly a clamor was heard from all the people. The sun, whirling, seemed to loosen itself from the firmament and advance threateningly upon the earth as if to crush us with its huge fiery weight. The sensation during those moments was terrible." ― Dr. Almeida Garrett, Professor of Natural Sciences at Coimbra University.
"As if like a bolt from the blue, the clouds were wrenched apart, and the sun at its zenith appeared in all its splendor. It began to revolve vertiginously on its axis, like the most magnificent firewheel that could be imagined, taking on all the colors of the rainbow and sending forth multi-colored flashes of light, producing the most astounding effect. This sublime and incomparable spectacle, which was repeated three distinct times, lasted for about ten minutes. The immense multitude, overcome by the evidence of such a tremendous prodigy, threw themselves on their knees." ― Dr. Formigão, a professor and priest at the seminary at Santarem.
"I feel incapable of describing what I saw. I looked fixedly at the sun, which seemed pale and did not hurt my eyes. Looking like a ball of snow, revolving on itself, it suddenly seemed to come down in a zig-zag, menacing the earth. Terrified, I ran and hid myself among the people, who were weeping and expecting the end of the world at any moment." ― Joaquim Lourenco, an observer in Alburitel, located 18 kilometers from Fatima.
So on October 13th, 1917 these observers along with 70,000 other people saw what they interpreted to be the sun “dance” in the sky. This phenomenon took place for a period of about ten minutes. People reported that they had no difficulty looking directly at the sun, which appeared to them as a rotating silver-whitish disc that threw off various colors from its periphery. A further interesting detail is that people in the crowd, who were soaking wet from standing in the rain, reported that they were completely dry immediately following the sun event. People as far as 40 kilometers from Fatima reported seeing the phenomenon, but not further away than that.
How can we explain the phenomenon observed at Fatima on October 13th, 1917? One thing that is clear is that the sun around which our planet revolves did not physically exhibit any such effects on that date. No astronomers observed unusual sun behavior on that day, and they certainly would not have missed it. Furthermore, if our sun had actually “danced” in this way, the Earth would no longer exist! Many have called Fatima a “mass hallucination” of fervent religious believers who saw what they wanted to see. However, such an explanation clearly is patently absurd. Many skeptics and critical observers in the crowd who were certainly not religious believers also saw the phenomenon. Further, the phenomenon was observed by people up to 40 kilometers away, who were just going about their everyday business. Finally, there is the physical drying of peoples’ clothes that was reported by many.
Was what people observed “dance” not actually the sun? Eyewitnesses reported that the rain clouds, which were heavy all day, suddenly parted and the “sun” then appeared. This “sun” could be readily gazed at, since it was not the blindingly intense sun that we know, but rather a silvery looking disc.
Photograph of the Fatima “Sun”
Here is the only black-and-white photograph of the Fatima “sun” in existence. It shows a gray-white disc surrounded by a somewhat brighter background. In addition, the “sun” shown in the photo is not perfectly circular, appearing slightly elliptical in shape.
Perhaps what was observed was a flying craft that came beneath the overcast clouds, which still obscured the real sun. In other words, perhaps people were observing an unidentified flying object that subsequently “danced” in the sky and gave off multi-colored spinning light and enough heat energy to dry out peoples’ clothes. If one accepts this explanation, then it also implies that the children were communicating with a Lady who was indeed not-of-this-earth, but also not from the heaven of the Bible.
I wonder what the reaction of Christians would be if they found out that the life and events of Jesus were actually orchestrated by extraterrestrials to provide a moral framework for the human race. The sum of Jesus’s teachings are exquisitely simple: Love God and Love Others.
Islam:
The religion of Islam was founded by Muhammad in about the year 610. Muhammad was 40 years old when he had his first revelation. This took place in a cave on Mount Hira, while Muhammad was taking a month of vacation and rest from his work. This month is now referred to as Ramadan by Islam.
Muhammad said that while he was in the cave, his was visited by an “angel” who appeared beside him and gave him the order to “Recite!”. When Muhammad heard this, he was troubled and reluctant to obey. However, eventually Muhammad found himself speaking the very first words of the Quran:
Recite in the name of thy Lord who created!
He createth man from a clot of blood.
Recite: and thy Lord is the Most Bountiful
He who hath taught by the pen,
taught man what he knew not.
After this encounter in the cave, Muhammad had another vision of a being who later he identified as the angel Gabriel. Here is how Muhammad described that encounter:
When I was midway on the mountain, I heard a voice from heaven saying: ‘O Muhammad! Thou art the apostle of God and I am Gabriel.’ I raised my head towards heaven to see who was speaking, and lo, Gabriel in the form of a man with feet astride the horizon …. I stood gazing at him, moving neither backward or forward; then I began to turn my face away from him, but towards whatever region of the sky I looked, I saw him as before.
Muhammad then rushed off the mountain, afraid that his encounter had been with a “jinn”. Now jinns were considered by the Arabs to be non-physical devils who were composed of fire. On the other hand, the Arabs considered angels to be non-physical beings who were composed of light. The Arabs thought jinns to be bad and angels to be good.
Muhammad went to his first wife, Khadija, to ask her if he was interacting with the devil or God. Khadija was actually Muhammad’s employer when he was working as a caravan merchant in Mecca. Muhammad loved Khadija more than all of his future wives. Khadija consoled Muhammad and told him that she would consult about his encounter with her Jewish cousin Waraqa, who was knowledgeable about spiritual matters. When Khadija told Waraqa what had happened, he replied:
If you have spoken the truth to me, O Khadija, there has come to him the greatest namus who came to Moses aforetime, and lo, he is the prophet of his people.
So Khadija then told Muhammad that he was blessed to be a prophet of God, and Islam was born, with Khadija being its first convert.
The writings of Muhammad that comprise the Quran are the basis of Islam. Islam regards everything in the Quran as the direct word of God. This is distinctly different from the Bible, which Christians regard as the directed word of God, rather than the direct word. Because of the Islamic belief that everything in the Quran is the direct word of God, there can be no dispute about the words themselves. However, the meaning of the words can be open to a variety of different interpretations by Muslims.
What does the Quran say about the possibility of extraterrestrials? Nothing directly, although it does talk about angels and jinn. Here are some excerpts from the Quran that might have a bearing on extraterrestrials:
It is God who created seven heavens and of the earth the likeness thereof; His command and controlling power circulate among them; signs indicative of His Omnipotence over all things and inductive to the realization that God is aquatinted with all the facts and that His Omnipotence covers all things in all respects. Al- Talaq 12.
And among His visible signs and His marvels, which display omnipotence and authority, is the creation of the heavens and the earth and the beings which He scattered over both; and the power and omnipotence together when He will, is attributed to Him. Al- Shura 29.
And to God all created beings in the heavens and creatures on the earth prostrate themselves in reverence and adoration and so do the angels who do not display inordinate self-esteem. Al- Nahl 49.
And to God, who controls the fate of all, do all beings, the material and the immaterial, in the heavens and on earth submit to His government and to His supreme controlling and influencing power willingly or unwillingly and so do their shadows which are cast on the ground or on a surface by intercepting the sun rays fore and afternoon, and other luminary in the hull of the eve. Al- Ra’d 15.
And to God belong all created beings in the heavens and on earth, each and all being obedient and submissive to His will. Al- Roum 26.
The seven heavens and the earth and all animate and inanimate beings therein praise His glory and extol. Al- Israa 44.
Do you not see you (O you who are oblivious of God’s Omnipotence) that to God do all creatures in the heavens and on earth prostrate in adoration, praise and worship, and so do the sun and the moon, the stars and the mountains, the trees and the animals and a great many among mankind! Al- Hajj 18.
And among His visible signs and His marvels, which display omnipotence and authority is the creation of the heavens and the earth and the beings which He scattered over both; and the power and omnipotence together them all together when He will, is attributed to Him. Al- Shoura 29.
Thus, the Quran contains general statements that the heavens are full of life and created beings (both physical and non-physical). This being the case, Islam might be able to accept the existence of extraterrestrials. Unlike Christianity, Muhammad was simply a prophet of God, not the Son of God. The extraterrestrials may have even had their own prophets. The greatest difficulty for Islam would be that the extraterrestrials are not mentioned specifically in the Quran.
Eastern Religions:
Hinduism:
Hinduism is considered to be the oldest of the major religions, predating Judaism. It began in northern India and, unlike the other major religions, has no specific founder. The major gods in Hinduism are Brahma (the creator), Vishnu (the preserver), and Shiva (the destroyer). However, these three major gods are actually a trinity within the overall ultimate godhead Brahman. Under the major gods are a vast array of demi-god figures.
All Hindu scriptures are written in the ancient Sanskrit language. The oldest Hindu religious writings are the Vedas, and the oldest of the Vedas is the Rig Veda. The Rig Veda has been said by Hindu scholars to have been written down in approximately 1000 BCE by the sage Vedavyasa. However, it is said that there was an oral tradition for many years prior to that point, perhaps as early at 3000 BCE. The major gods venerated in the Rig Veda are Agni and Indra. One might ask why Brahma, Vishnu, and Shiva were not the major gods venerated in the Rig Veda. The answer is that Agni and Indra were downgraded to lesser gods in the later Hindu scriptures. The number of Hindu religious writings is vast. There are the oldest Vedas and then the younger Upanishads and Puranas, which attempt to embellish and interpret the Vedas.
There are two great Hindu epic sagas in Hinduism. These are the Mahabharata and the Ramayana. The Mahabharata describes the epic Mahabharata War which took place in Northern India in at least 1000 BCE. Two clans of relatives go to battle for the throne of the kingdom and the Mahabharata describes the details of this war. Associated with the books of the Mahabharata is the Bhagavad Gita, which is perhaps the most famous of Hindu writings. The Bhagavad Gita describes a lengthy discussion between one of the warriors, Arjuna, and his charioteer, Krishna, while they sit in the chariot between the two warring camps prior to the major battle. Krishna, who is in actuality a manifestation of the God Vishnu, instructs Arjuna about many truths of existence. The second major epic is the Ramayana, which is said to have been written in about 500 BCE by Maharishi Valmiki. It describes the life, travels, and events of the Indian prince Rama in a time that is believed to predate the Mahabharat War. Rama is said to be an incarnation of the God Vishnu.
Existence of life outside the Earth is revealed in many parts of Vedic Scriptures. One prominent verse is taken from the Padma Purana:
There are 900,000 species living in the water. There are also 2,000,000 non-moving living entities (sthāvara) such as trees and plants. There are also 1,100,000 species of insects and reptiles, and there are 1,000,000 species of birds. As far as quadrupeds are concerned there are 3,000,000 varieties, and there are 400,000 humanoid species.
The Valmiki Ramayana, Sundara Kanda Section, Chapter 8, Verse 6 vividly mentions an alien race called the bhutaganas who controlled Ravana’s flying machine:
Those wonderful vimana air crafts roamed the sky with extremely high speed, controlled by thousands of evil creatures with big round eyes, with helmets on their heads.
The vimanas in Hindu literature are of significant interest since they might represent extraterrestrial craft associated with extraterrestrials that were interacting with humans. Here is a description of a vimana in the Ramayana:
The Pushpaka Vimana that resembles the Sun and belongs to my brother was brought by the powerful Ravana; that aerial and excellent Vimana going everywhere at will ... that chariot resembling a bright cloud in the sky ... and the King [Rama] got in, and the excellent chariot at the command of the Raghira, rose up into the higher atmosphere.
This is a description of a vimana associated with the Mahabharata War:
Gurkha flying in his swift and powerful Vimana hurled against the three cities of the Vrishis and Andhakas a single projectile charged with all the power of the Universe. An incandescent column of smoke and fire, as brilliant as ten thousands suns, rose in all its splendour. It was the unknown weapon, the Iron Thunderbolt, a gigantic messenger of death which reduced to ashes the entire race of the Vrishnis and Andhakas.
And here is yet another vimana reference in the account of the War:
Strong and durable must the body of the Vimana be made, like a great flying bird of light material. Inside one must put the mercury engine with its iron heating apparatus underneath. By means of the power latent in the mercury which sets the driving whirlwind in motion, a man sitting inside may travel a great distance in the sky. The movements of the Vimana are such that it can vertically ascend, vertically descend, move slanting forwards and backwards. With the help of the machines human beings can fly in the air and heavenly beings can come down to earth.
This is a depiction of a vimana that might have been employed in the Mahabharata War:
Ancient Hindu Vimana Craft
In terms of Hindu spirituality, all living entities were created by Brahman and all living entities are basically interrelated with each other. Thus, all living entities in different planets, whether they are demigods or demons, humans or animals, all originated from one spiritual quality. This spiritual quality is called atman, the spirit soul.
The Vedic scriptures describe spirit soul’s attributes and characteristics in vivid ways through elaborate depictions and examples in the Upanishads and Puranas. Since atman is superior to all material conditions, atman is unchanged by any material influences. Based on this substantial characteristic of atman, it is concluded that atmans can also exist within the hot sun, the cold moon, windy Saturn, high-pressure Venus, and dark Pluto.
The atman enters the physical body of a particular species according to its karma (activities) and guna (modes of nature which influence the pure spiritual state of the atman itself). Due to different gunas and karmas, each and every atman in this material universe can enter different material bodies of different compositions on different planets. Therefore, the Vedic Scriptures describe atman as existing anywhere in the universe. Based on this status, existence of life in other planets is undeniable according to Vedic Scriptures.
Buddhism:
Siddhartha Gautama, the Buddha, lived from 566-486 BCE. He was an Indian prince in the area of northern India and, as such, began his life as a Hindu. At the age of 29, he left his princely home (and his wife and young son) and became an extreme ascetic for about six years. After nearly dying of his extreme asceticism, he chose the Middle Way to spiritual development, adopting neither extreme asceticism nor extreme materialism. He became an expert in meditation, and, it is said, one day during a very deep meditative state underneath a tree, he achieved the state of “Enlightenment”. Thus enlightened, he became aware of the Four Noble Truths: 1. Suffering exists; 2. The source of suffering is Cravings; 3. Suffering is ended by the cessation of Cravings; 4. Cravings are ended by following the Eight-Fold Path. The Eight-Fold Path is: 1) Right view; 2) Right intention; 3) Right speech; 4) Right action; 5) Right livelihood; 6) Right effort; 7) Right mindfulness; 8) Right meditation. When all Cravings are ended, then one achieves the state of Nirvana.
The cosmology of Buddhism is as follows. In this vertical cosmology, the universe exists of many worlds (one might say "planes/realms”) which are stacked one upon the next in layers. Each world corresponds to a mental state or a state of being. The vertical cosmology is divided into thirty-one planes of existence and the planes into three realms, each corresponding to a different type of mentality. These three realms are the Ārūpyadhātu, the Rūpadhātu, and the Kāmadhātu.
The Arupyadhatu is a formless realm and the beings there do not exist within physical time and space. The Rupadhatu is a realm of form. Its inhabitants all have a location and bodies of a sort, although those bodies are composed of a subtle substance which is of itself invisible to the physical inhabitants of the Kāmadhātu. The Kamadhatu includes the physical human realm.
While nothing the Buddha said suggests that there could be life on other planets, there is nothing in his teachings, the Dhamma, which would prohibit this possibility.
Taoism:
Taoism (also called Daoism) was founded in approximately the 6th century BCE by Laozi, who was an archivist in the Zhou Dynasty court. It is an original religion of China, along with Confucianism. In fact, it is said that Laozi was a teacher of Confucius. Laozi was the author of the Daode Jing, the Scripture of the Way and its Power. Dao is the Way, which is considered to be the spontaneous source of the life of the universe. De is the Power which is contained in everything in the universe, which can bring a natural order and harmony if it is not disturbed by human influences.
In the Daode Jing, the Dao is described as the Mother of the Universe:
There is a being – in chaos yet complete.
It preceded heaven and earth.
Silent, it was, and solitary;
Standing alone, never changing.
Moving around, yet never ending.
Consider it the mother of heaven and earth.
I do not know its name.
To call it something, I say dao.
Forced to give it a name, I say great.
Great – says it departs.
Depart – says it is far.
Far away – says it returns.
Therefore dao is great, heaven is great,
Earth is great, humans too, are great.
In the universe there are four ‘greats’
And humans make their residence in the whole of them.
Humans are modeled on earth.
Earth is modeled on Heaven.
Heaven is modeled on dao
Dao is modeled on its own spontaneity.
This is as close as Taoism comes to describing a concept of God. The yin-yang symbol is the symbol of Taoism. It symbolizes the flow and harmony of opposites. Taoism also incorporates the concept of qi (chi) as the life energy that circulates within the body. Taoism says essentially nothing about the existence of extraterrestrials.
Reaction of the Major Religions to Extraterrestrial Spirituality:
Having gone through possible extraterrestrial aspects in the various major religions, the question now is: How would believers in these major religions react to the existence of extraterrestrials in view of their religious faith?
It is clear that all of the major religions would have to reconcile what they believe about spirituality with what the extraterrestrials might believe about spirituality. In other words, these religions would have to shift from being Earth-centric to being Universe-centric. Perhaps this will lead to a consolidation of the current religious truths into a more general spiritual framework. Would this be the end of the major religions as we know them? I think not, but they would certainly have to undergo major changes in order to come to terms with the reality of extraterrestrials.
It seems to me that, in general terms, the Eastern religions would be less impacted than the Western religions. Eastern religions have a more general view of the nature of God in relation to the universe. Hinduism in particular would seem to be quite receptive to the notion of extraterrestrial spirituality.
Western religions, on the other hand, are more rigid in the details of their religious beliefs. And the religion that would, in my view, have the most difficult time accepting the spirituality of extraterrestrials would be Christianity. The primary reason that I say this is that, unlike Judaism and Islam, Christians believe that Jesus was the Only Son of God. They believe that the Only Son of God was incarnated on Earth to save us from the Original Sin of humanity incurred by Adam and Eve. Christians then have to cope with the conundrum of whether or not this same Jesus incarnated on all the other planets in the universe with intelligent beings to save them from their Original Sins. Indeed, do extraterrestrials have any Original Sin as Earth humans are believed to have? Christians would have to radically change their view of who Jesus really was, and this would be very difficult for the devout.
Extraterrestrial Concepts of Spirituality:
At the present time, there are very few sources we can access for information about extraterrestrial concepts of spirituality. In this book, I have summarized the information provided in the few sources that I have found thus far. Obviously, when extraterrestrials decide to interact with Earth humans in a formal way, we will then know a great deal more about their spirituality concepts.
Emanuel Swedenborg:
Who was Emanuel Swedenborg? Swedenborg was an 18th century Swedish scientist who turned to focus on spirituality later in life. He was born in 1688 and died in 1772. He was a Christian and a Protestant Lutheran. Swedenborg began his scientific career in 1715, where he devoted himself to work on natural science and engineering projects for the Swedish government in the areas of geometry, chemistry, and metallurgy. In the 1730s, he shifted his focus to anatomy and physiology, where he became interested in the nature of the brain. And he also began developing an interest in spirituality aspects. He wanted to develop a theory of how matter interacts with spirit.
In 1745, Swedenborg was dining in a private room at a tavern in London. By the end of the meal, a darkness fell upon his eyes, and the room shifted character. Suddenly, he saw a person sitting at a corner of the room, telling him: "Do not eat too much!". Swedenborg, scared, hurried home. Later that night, the same man appeared in his dreams. The man told Swedenborg that he was the Lord, that he had appointed Swedenborg to reveal the spiritual meaning of the Bible and that he would guide Swedenborg in what to write.
Swedenborg began having out-of-body experiences where he said that he interacted with spiritual beings, both associated with the Earth as well as other locations in the Universe. Here is how Swedenborg described these interactions:
By the Lord's Divine mercy I have had my interior faculties, which belong to my spirit, opened, so that I have been enabled to talk with spirits and angels, not only those in the vicinity of our earth, but also with those near other worlds. Since therefore I was desirous of knowing whether there were other inhabited worlds, and what they and their inhabitants were like, I was allowed by the Lord to talk and mix with spirits and angels from other worlds. With some this lasted a day, with others a week, with yet others for months. I was informed by them about the worlds they came from and in the vicinity of which they were, about the life, behaviour and religious practices of their inhabitants, and other matters worth relating about them. Since I was allowed to gain my knowledge in this fashion, I can describe them from what I have heard and seen.
It needs to be known that all spirits and angels are from the human race; they are near their own world, and know what happens there; and they can inform someone whose interior faculties are open sufficiently to be able to talk and mix with them. A human being is in essence a spirit, and associates with spirits at the interior level. Consequently anyone whose interior faculties are opened by the Lord can talk with them, exactly as a man can with another man. I have been permitted to do this daily for the last twelve years.
Swedenborg wrote a book entitled “Other Planets”, where he described his out-of-body interactions with spiritual beings associated with other planets in our solar system, as well as planets in other solar systems in the Universe. These are some excerpts from his book:
The Lord has granted me opportunities to talk and interact with spirits and angels from other planets. It is important to know that all spirits and angels are human and that they remain close to their planet of origin. After all, in our essence we too are spirits and in our deeper levels we are already among other spirits.
Further, I have talked with spirits about the fact that if people consider how incredibly vast the starry heaven is and how incalculably huge the number of stars in it is—and each star is a sun in its own realm, has its own solar system, and is much like our sun, though it may vary from it in magnitude—they can come to believe there is more than one inhabited world in the universe.
It’s interesting that Swedenborg in the 18th century had the realization that there were myriads of extra-solar planets in the universe. Modern scientists only came to discover this near the end of the 20th century, through the dimming of a star’s radiance as a result of planet transit across the face of the star. Present scientific understanding is that almost all stars in the universe have planets surrounding them.
Here is some of what Swedenborg said about his out-of-body interactions with spirits associated with the Planet Mercury:
Some spirits came to me, and I was told by a heavenly source that they were from the planet closest to the Sun, which in our world is called Mercury. The spirits from Mercury possess far more knowledge than other spirits do, both about what is going on within our own solar system and also about what is happening on extrasolar planets. Spirits of the planet Mercury do not stay in one place, or linger among the communities of spirits from one world, but roam throughout the universe.
One of the questions our spirit asked the spirits from Mercury was, “Whom do you believe in?”. The spirits from Mercury replied that they believed in God; but when they were asked further questions about the God they believed in, they were unwilling to respond.
Now here is what Swedenborg had to say about spiritual beings associated with the planet Jupiter:
Spending a lot of time with spirits from Jupiter gradually made it plain to me that they are more upright than the spirits of many other planets. Uprightness comes across as gentleness and sweetness, gentleness because the upright fear doing harm, and sweetness because they love doing good.
Spirits of that planet do not want to be in the company of spirits from our planet because they are different in temperament and custom. They say that spirits from our planet are crafty, and quick and clever at evil schemes, but do not know much about what is good or give it much thought. Spirits from Jupiter are much wiser than spirits from our planet. They describe us as talking a lot and thinking very little.
As for their worship of God, it is all based on the acknowledgment of our Lord as the Highest, the one who rules heaven and earth. They call him “the Only Lord,” and since they acknowledge and worship him during their physical lives they seek him and find him after death. This is the same Lord we worship.
They did not know that their Only Lord was born as a human on our planet; but they said that knowing this does not matter to them— only that he alone is human and governs the universe. When I said that on our planet he is called Christ Jesus, “Christ” meaning “Anointed One” or “King” and “Jesus” meaning “Savior,” they said that they do not worship him as their King, because the notion of kingship feels too worldly to them, but that they do worship him as their Savior.
On one [earlier] occasion some doubt suddenly flowed into some spirits from Jupiter who were with me, doubt as to whether their Only Lord was the same as our Lord. These spirits were deeply moved and delighted to hear it said that their Only Lord is in fact the only human and that all people are referred to as human only because of what comes from him. We are human to the extent that we are images of him, that is, to the extent that we love him and love our neighbor, and therefore to the extent that we are devoted to doing what is good, since good that is done out of love and faith is the image of the Lord.
This is what Swedenborg said about his interactions with the spirits associated with the planet Mars:
The spirits from Mars are among the best of all spirits from the planets in our solar system.
The spirits from one planet are kept apart from the spirits of another planet because the spirits of each planet are associated with some particular district in the universal human and are therefore in a different state.
As for how the inhabitants of their planet view the Divine, they said that they acknowledge and revere our Lord, saying that he is the only God and that he rules both heaven and the universe. They said as well that all that is good comes from him and that he leads them, and also that
he often appears among them on their planet.
And here is what Swedenborg said about the planet Saturn:
The inhabitants of that planet are profoundly humble in their worship because in that context they think of themselves as nothing. They worship our Lord and acknowledge him as the only God. Further, the Lord sometimes appears to them in the form of an angel and therefore as human; and when this happens divinity shines forth from his face and moves their lower minds.
They said that sometimes spirits from our planet come to them and ask what God they worship. They reply that the ones posing this question must be crazy. There could be nothing more insane than to ask what God someone worships when there is only one God for everyone in the universe; and they are even more insane for not saying that the Lord is that only God.
Next, Swedenborg describes the spirits and beings of Venus.
There are two kinds of people on the planet Venus, of quite opposite dispositions. There are people who are gentle and humane, and there are people who are savage and almost feral. The gentle and humane ones appear [in the spiritual world] on the other side of that planet, while the
savage, feral ones appear on the side that faces our planet.
Some of the spirits who appear on the other side of that planet, the gentle and humane ones, came to me and stood where I could see them, just above my head. I talked with them about various subjects. They said, among other things, that when they were in the physical world they had acknowledged our Lord as their only God and that now their acknowledgment was even greater. They insisted that they had seen him on their planet and even represented for me how they had seen him.
I have not talked with the spirits from the side of Venus that faces our planet [in the spiritual world], the ones who are savage and almost feral. I have been told by angels, though, what they are like and where they get such a savage nature.
Swedenborg said that he had visited a number of extra-solar planets in other solar systems throughout the universe.
It is important to know that whatever planet people are from, the Lord acknowledges and accepts everyone who acknowledges and worships a God in human form, because God in human form is the Lord. Since the Lord appears to the inhabitants of various planets in an angelic form, which is a human form, when spirits and angels from those planets hear from spirits and angels of our planet that God is an actual human being, they accept this as the Word, acknowledge it, and rejoice that this is the case.
If you know nothing of heaven’s secrets, you might not be able to believe that anyone could see such distant planets or report anything about them on the basis of direct experience. Be aware, though, that spaces, distances, and consequently movement from place to place in the spiritual
world are, in their origins and first causes, inner changes of state, and that to angels and spirits, these spaces, distances, and movements appear in accordance with those inner changes. Further, spirits and angels can by this means appear to be taken from one place to another and from one planet to another, even to planets that are at the edge of the universe. The spirit of a person in this world can also do this, even while the person’s body remains in the same place.
Anyone can conclude that there are many solar systems from the fact that we can see so many stars in the universe. It is common knowledge in the learned world that each star is a sun in its own region, remaining fixed the way the sun of our planet does in its own position, and only
their great distance from us makes stars appear small. So we may conclude that like our sun, each star has planets around it that are worlds.
Angels who had been sent by the Lord took me to a particular extra solar planet, where I was allowed to observe the planet itself, but not to speak with its inhabitants—although I was allowed to speak with spirits who came from there. After their lives in the physical world come to an end, all the people who inhabit a given planet become spirits and remain in the general neighborhood of their planet. They are still able, therefore, to be a source of information about their planet and the state of the people who live there, because when we leave our bodies we take with us our
whole former life, including our whole memory.
Being taken to other planets in the universe does not mean being taken there in the body, but rather in the spirit, which is led through changes of the state of its inner life that seem like movement through space. As a result, a person’s spirit can be transported and brought to distant places while the person remains in the same place.
Extra-solar planet #1:
After we had some conversation on various subjects, I asked them what God they worshiped. They said that actually they worship a particular angel, an angel who looks to them like a divine person, radiant with light. This angel teaches them and helps them see how they should be living their lives. They know, they added, that God Almighty is in the sun of the angelic heaven and that although he does not appear to them, he does appear to their angel; but he is too powerful for them to dare to worship him.
Extra-solar planet #2:
When I got there I did not see the planet itself, but I did see some spirits from it, since as already noted the spirits of any planet can be seen in its vicinity. This is because they have a nature
similar to that of the planet’s inhabitants, they once lived there themselves, and the current inhabitants need their help.
Asked about what God they worshiped, they answered that they worshiped a God both visible and invisible—a visible God in human form and an invisible God in no form at all. Both from what they said and from thought images they shared with me, I learned that their visible
God was our Lord himself and that they too called him “the Lord.”
Later I saw some other spirits from that same planet who appeared in a place below the spirits just mentioned; I talked with them as well. They were idolaters; they worshiped a stone idol that looked more or less human, but was not pleasing to look at. It is important to know that the
religious focus of all who arrive in the other life is at first the same as it was in the world; they are weaned from it only gradually. This is because our whole religious orientation is deeply rooted in our inner life, and it takes time to uproot and remove it from that life.
Extra-solar planet #3:
Since that is the nature of the spirits from that planet, in the eyes of other spirits they do not appear in a clearly defined human form the way others do; instead they look more like clouds. Many of them look like black clouds with a shining, vaguely human shape showing through
here and there.
I asked them whether they had had the same low opinion of the body when they were people living in the physical realm. They said that the people of their planet attach no importance to their bodies, only to the spirit within the body, because they know that the body will die but
the spirit will go on living forever.
As to how they view the Divine, they said that they acknowledge God in human form—that is, our Lord. Anyone who acknowledges the God of the universe in human form is welcomed by our Lord and led by him. Others cannot be led by him because their thought about God has no focus. The inhabitants of their planet, they went on to say, are taught about matters of heaven by a form of direct contact with angels and spirits.
I asked what happens to those among them who are evil. They said that on their planet people are not allowed to behave immorally. If any of them think evil thoughts and do evil things, they are rebuked by a particular spirit who threatens them with death if they persist in what they
are doing; and if they do persist, they lose consciousness and die. This is how the people of that planet are protected from the spread of evil.
Extra-solar planet #4:
As I have already said several times, the only way spirits can be taken from place to place is by
changes in their inner state. To the spirits themselves, these changes look exactly like going from place to place, like traveling. I experienced changes like this steadily for about ten hours until I had left behind my own state of life and had come into theirs, meaning that I arrived there in
spirit.
Once there, I realized that in spirit I was somewhere among the stars far outside our solar system. This I could tell from the changes of state and from my seeming to have traveled continuously for almost ten hours. Eventually I heard some spirits talking near a planet that I later saw for myself.
I asked the spirits from that planet what their image of God was. They answered that they thought of God not as invisible but as visible in human form. They knew this not only on the basis of an inner perception but because God had actually appeared to them in human form.
Extra-solar planet #5:
On another occasion I was taken to a different planet in the universe outside our solar system, and again this required a succession of changes of state, this time lasting almost twelve hours continuously.
During our journey, our [spiritual] progression, it was granted to me to observe how vast the Lord’s heaven for angels and spirits is. From the areas that are not inhabited I could tell that heaven is so vast that if there were millions of planets each of which had as many people as there are on ours, to eternity there would still be enough room for everyone to live in, and it would never be filled.
So there we have Emanuel Swedenborg’s descriptions of the spirit inhabitants on planets both within our solar system and in other solar systems, and how they view God and spirituality. What are we to make of his accounts?
It would seem that Swedenborg’s ventures to other planets were made in an out-of-body non-physical state. Each of the planets he visited had spiritual entities that were located in the vicinity of the planet. These spiritual entities were, in their past, physical inhabitants of the planet, but were now in the spiritual realm. Swedenborg’s interactions were essentially with these spiritual entities, who told him about their viewpoints on God, and also described to him the characteristics of the physical planet inhabitants.
Swedenborg described inhabitants of the planets Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn in our solar system. In general, the physical inhabitants of these places are described as being physically similar to Earth human beings. In addition, the characteristics of the planet are said to be similar to those of Earth.
To me, this doesn’t make much sense. It is not at all clear why Swedenborg described the physical nature of our solar system planets the way he did. We know from our space probes that have been sent to all these locations that their physical characteristics are vastly different from those on Earth. Mercury is a barren planet with one hot side that faces the sun and one cold side that faces away from the sun. Venus appears to have a rather hellish environment with high temperatures and high pressures. Mars is a barren planet with a dry environment and a carbon dioxide atmosphere. Jupiter and Saturn are gas giant planets that may or may not have a solid core. Thus far, space probes have shown no signs of life on any of these celestial bodies.
One thing Swedenborg was right about was the vast number of extrasolar planets that exist in the universe. He was very much ahead of his time in this regard. We only began discovering exoplanets at the end of the twentieth century, and we now know that there are probably at least as many exoplanets as there are stars in the universe. As was the case with the solar system planets, the exoplanets are described by Swedenborg as being Earth-like in nature.
It's interesting that all of the physical civilizations described by Swedenborg seemed to be of a relatively simple nature, without the technology associated with present-day Earth. In his time, however, many of the peoples of the Earth were essentially still in an agrarian state, and this appears to have carried over into his descriptions.
In terms of how the inhabitants of other planets think of spirituality and God, Swedenborg was communicating with non-physical spiritual entities, so clearly this was a common factor. In terms of God, all the inhabitants had a belief in God, and some of them thought that God had a physical presence on their planet. It seems clear that Swedenborg was filtering this information through his lens of the God of Christianity.
The Urantia Book:
It’s quite fair to say that the “Urantia Book” is the most puzzling book I have ever read. I first came across it quite by chance in a footnote of another book that I had been reading. At that time, I had never even heard of the Urantia Book, it was a complete unknown to me. I looked up some information about it and found that it was purported to be an extensive body of revelation that was imparted to mankind by superhuman entities. So, intrigued, I ordered a copy.
When my copy of the Urantia Book arrived, it was indeed a very large and extensive volume – 2097 pages of densely written material! And no human author but rather the book was authored by a group of non-physical entities. Believe me, there is no way that one can speed-read the Urantia Book.
The cover of the Urantia Book says that it is a Revelation that covers three general areas. The first general area is God and Universe Destiny, covering such topics as Deity, the cosmos, life after death, and angels and other celestial personalities. The second general area is the History of Earth, covering topics such as evolution, Adam and Eve, the development of civilization, and spirituality. The third general area is the Life of Jesus, which deals with topics such as the human and divine Jesus, the missing years, and His teachings. No wonder the Urantia Book is 2097 pages of fine print! What a vast panorama of topics! The Urantia Book effectively describes in enormous detail the Kingdom of God, both within you and without you.
Because the Urantia Book was so thick, my first reading of it was more of a skimming exercise, with closer focus only on particular sections that interested me the most. After I was finished with this first reading, my overall reaction was “this is too bizarre to be true”, and I put the book in a dark corner of my bookshelf. However, a few years later I was preparing for a combined business/pleasure trip to India for three weeks, and I wanted something to read on the long plane flights and also while there. For some reason, the thought of re-reading the Urantia Book popped into my mind, and I took it to India and read it again, this time more slowly and with the benefit of the first reading. That second reading was greatly beneficial to my understanding of the concepts that were being presented.
Something I found quite unusual about the Urantia Book is the significant amount of “scientific” discussion contained within it regarding cosmology, fundamental physics, the origin of Urantia (the Book’s term for the Earth), and life on Urantia. Much of the “science” in the Urantia Book might certainly be described as early 20th century thinking by the present scientific community on Earth. However, it is interesting to note that the “authors” specifically state in the Book that their scientific discussions were purposely couched in early 20th century terms so as to be understandable by the Book’s initial human recipients at the time the Book was communicated to them in the early 20th century. They also state that the meaning of what they present will become clearer as mankind’s scientific knowledge increases.
Perhaps you might scoff at this, but then ask yourself how you might go about explaining something like quantum mechanics to an aborigine. Clearly, the cosmology and basic physics presented in the Urantia Book are significantly different from present scientific thinking. Yet, consider the state of scientific thought at the time of Copernicus as compared to today. I would suggest that you view the “science” presented in the Urantia Book from the perspective of the time frame in which the scientific discussion in the Book was generated, namely 1911-1935, and what was known scientifically at that time.
Some might say that the science in the Urantia Book is nothing more than science fiction. If it is just science fiction, then the Urantia Book is science fiction that even the most skilled science fiction writer would be hard pressed to formulate in any coherent way.
I have no intention of summarizing the vast content of the Urantia Book here. The only way one can deal with the overall content of the Book is to read it oneself. What I will do is give a brief description of its history – the little history that is known, at least – and then present some of its content that may have a bearing on extraterrestrial spirituality.
History of the Urantia Book:
The history of the Urantia Book has been elaborated in detail in the book “A History of the Urantia Papers” by Larry Mullins. I will now summarize this history.
The key figure in the Urantia Book is Dr. William Samuel Sadler. William Sadler was born on June 14, 1875 in Spencer, Indiana. He married his wife, Lena Kellogg, in 1897. Sadler was a psychiatrist and indeed a very distinguished one of his time. He obtained his M.D. from the University of Chicago, and studied with Freud in 1911. He was the Director and Chief Psychiatrist of the Chicago Institute of Research and Diagnosis, and was a Fellow of the American College of Surgeons, the AMA, the AAAS, and the American Psychiatric Association. His office was located in Chicago at 533 Diversey Parkway and this location is currently still the headquarters of the Urantia Foundation. Sadler was also the author of many books during his medical career. It is clear that William Sadler was a man of significant academic and medical credentials.
Sadler’s wife, Lena, was also a medical doctor. In addition, she was a member of the famous Kellogg family of Battle Creek, Michigan. This Kellogg family is the one that invented Kellogg’s Corn Flakes in the late 19th century.
Dr. William Sadler was a severe critic of the spiritualists of his time. He was involved in activities to debunk many of the fraudulent mediums. In 1929, he published a book entitled “The Mind at Mischief: Tricks and Deceptions of the Subconscious and How to Cope with Them”. This book discusses a number of these fraudulent mediums. However, in the appendix of the book, Sadler stated the following:
In discussions of fraudulent mediums or self-deceived psychics, the reader of this book has several times encountered the statement that there were certain exceptions to the general indictments there made, and was referred to this appendix. It now becomes my duty to explain what I had in mind when those footnotes were inserted. ….
The other exception has to do with a rather peculiar case of psychic phenomena, one which I find myself unable to classify, and which I would like very much to narrate more fully; I cannot do so here, however, because of a promise which I feel under obligation to keep sacredly. In other words, I have promised not to publish this case during the lifetime of the individual. I hope sometime to secure a modification of that promise and to be able to report this case more fully because of its interesting features. I was brought in contact with it, in the summer of 1911, and I have had it under my observation more or less ever since, having been present at probably 250 of the night sessions, many of which have been attended by a stenographer who made voluminous notes.
A thorough study of this case has convinced me that it is not one of ordinary trance. While the sleep seems to be quite of a natural order, it is very profound, and so far we have never been able to awaken the subject when in this state; but the body is never rigid, and the heart action is never modified, though respiration is sometimes markedly interfered with. The man is utterly unconscious, wholly oblivious to what takes place, and, unless told about it subsequently, never knows that he has been used as a sort of clearing house for the coming and going of alleged extra-planetary personalities. In fact, he is more or less indifferent to the whole proceeding, and shows a surprising lack of interest in these affairs as they occur from time to time.
In no way are these night visitations like the séances associated with spiritualism. At no time during the period of eighteen years observation has there been a communication from any source that claimed to be the spirit of a deceased human being. The communications which have been written, or which we have had the opportunity to hear spoken, are made by a vast order of alleged beings who claim to come from other planets to visit this world, to stop here as student visitors for study and observation when they are enroute from one universe to another or from one planet to another. These communications further arise in alleged spiritual beings who purport to have been assigned to this planet for duties of various sorts.
Eighteen years of study and careful investigation have failed to reveal the psychic origin of these messages. I find myself at the present time just where I was when I started. Psychoanalysis, hypnotism, intensive comparison, fail to show that the written or spoken messages of this individual have origin in his own mind. Much of the material secured through this subject is quite contrary to his habits of thought, to the way in which he has been taught and to his entire philosophy. In fact, of much that we have secured, we have failed to find anything of its nature in existence. Its philosophic content is quite new, and we are unable to find where very much of it have ever found human expression.
Much as I would like to report details of this case, I am not in a position to do so at present. I can only say that I have found in these years of observation that all the information imparted through this source has proved to be consistent within itself. While there is considerable difference in the quality of the communications, this seems to be reasonably explained by a difference in state of development and order of the personalities making the communications. Its philosophy is consistent. It is essentially Christian and is, on the whole, entirely harmonious with the known scientific facts and truths of this age. In fact, the case is so unusual and extraordinary that it establishes itself immediately, as far as my experience goes, in a class by itself, one which has thus far resisted all my efforts to prove it to be of auto-psychic origin. Our observations are being continued and, as I have intimated, I hope sometime in the near future to secure permission for the more complete reporting of the phenomena connected with this interesting case.
Sadler stated in the appendix to his 1929 book “The Mind at Mischief” that he had encountered in 1911 “a case is so unusual and extraordinary that it establishes itself immediately, as far as my experience goes, in a class by itself, one which has thus far resisted all my efforts to prove it to be of auto-psychic origin.” He stated that a subject in a trance-like sleep produced “communications … made by a vast order of alleged beings who claim to come from other planets to visit this world, to stop here as student visitors for study and observation when they are enroute from one universe to another or from one planet to another. These communications further arise in alleged spiritual beings who purport to have been assigned to this planet for duties of various sorts.”
What Sadler is saying here is absolutely remarkable, if it is indeed true. And who was the sleeping subject? Sadler never revealed his name before he died, nor did anyone else closely associated with the origin of the Urantia Book. But circumstantial evidence strongly suggests that the sleeping subject was Wilfred Kellogg, Sadler’s brother-in-law and a member of the Kellogg family.
The people who were in close contact with the sleeping subject during the evolution of the Urantia Book were called the “Contact Commission”. This very small group was composed of Dr. William Sadler, his wife Dr. Lena Kellogg Sadler, Wilfred Kellogg, his wife Anna Bell Kellogg, Emma Louise Christensen (Christy) who was a pseudo-family member of the Sadlers, and Bill Sadler Jr., Sadler’s son (once he was old enough). So the “Contact Commission” was a group of only six very close-knit people.
In about 1923, Sadler and his wife Lena began to have friends over to their home at 533 Diversey Parkway in Chicago on a regular basis on Sunday afternoons for tea and philosophic discussions. At that time, discussions about the sleeping subject’s revelations were conducted by this Sunday group, which later became known as the “Forum”. The people in the Forum were from all walks of life and diverse backgrounds. Each was personally screened by Sadler. The member turnover of the Forum was relatively high, so from 1923 to the final Forum meeting in 1942, there were a total of 486 Forum members.
Sadler would read the communications of the sleeping subject to the Forum members, and these communications would be discussed by the group. The early Forum members began to put forward questions to pose to the sleeping subject, which were answered by the personality (personalities?) that was being channeling through the subject. But at one point this personality provided the following admonition:
If you only knew what you are in contact with you would not ask me such trivial questions. You would rather ask questions as might elicit answers of supreme value to the human race.
Having been given this challenge, in 1924 the Forum produced a list of 181 profound questions. The first was: “Is there really a God? And, if so, what is He Like?” Then, a few weeks later after a night of sleep, it is said that there appeared in the bedroom of the sleeping subject a 500 page handwritten manuscript that addressed all of these 181 questions! The wife of the sleeping subject (presumably Anna Bell Kellogg) stated that this manuscript was not present in his room before he went to sleep, and she had no idea where it came from. She did not think that her husband had written it, and when he was asked this question, he said that he had not.
Sadler and the Forum were said to be astonished at the appearance of this 500 page manuscript, seemingly virtually overnight, and also the high quality, cohesion, and consistency of its lofty intellectual content. Now the sleeping subject, presumably Wilfred Kellogg, did not seem to have anywhere near the intellectual capacity to write such a manuscript. He only had a sixth-grade education and began his career as a bookkeeper in Battle Creek, Michigan. Furthermore, Sadler indicated that the handwriting of the manuscript was not the handwriting of the sleeping subject. Finally, the sleeping subject was never observed by any member of the Contact Commission to have ever written anything, despite close observation by them.
So how did this initial 500 page manuscript, essentially the beginning of the Urantia Book, come to be? Here is how Bill Sadler Jr., a member of the Contact Commission, described it:
This is the theory I accept. I want you to visualize several points in space … we’ll call them point A, point B, point C, and point D. I think the Papers were dictated, or conceived, at point A. And I think if we could have been present at point A when any one of these Papers were being written, we would have seen absolutely nothing. At point A was perhaps this Divine Counselor who signs Paper One.
Now, you’d have something to see at point B, but it would be very dull. It would be a man asleep, some ordinary looking guy, just asleep, doing nothing. Now, if you could get to point C, this would be exciting! You remember the day of the resurrection, the soldiers saw the stone roll away, apparently by itself? Now, that stone was being pushed … by Secondary Midwayers who are non-corporeal beings who can deal with physical substances. At point C, I think you would have seen a very exciting phenomenon, a pencil moving over paper with no visible means of propulsion. That’s where the physical writing was consummated.
Bill Sadler Jr. theorized that the manuscript was written by a non-corporeal being! It should be noted that none of the Contact Commission indicated that they had ever actually observed the writing of this manuscript, and subsequent Urantia papers, themselves.
In his critical commentary book “Urantia: The Great Cult Mystery”, Martin Gardner states that there are only three possibilities for the origin of the Urantia Papers:
1. Wilfred Kellogg was a charlatan. Like other phony direct-voice mediums and automatic writers, his ego derived enormous and secret satisfaction from counterfeiting trances during which he pretended to channel material he had consciously concocted over a long period of reading and thinking.
2. Wilfred belonged to a small class of sincere, honest persons who, for causes not well understood, experience spells of deep trances during which they channel information fabricated by secondary personalities who are part of their unconscious.
3. Wilfred actually was chosen by supermortals to transmit a new revelation to humanity.
William and Lena Sadler had the 500 page handwritten manuscript typed by Christy, and brought the typed manuscript to the Forum meeting on 18 January 1925. The Forum members read and discussed the manuscript in detail, and provided additional questions and clarifications to be posed to the sleeping subject. It is said that Wilfred Kellogg was the only member of the Forum who never made a comment or asked a question.
The Forum members and the sleeping subject interacted as follows to generate the content of the Urantia Book from a series of Urantia papers provided through the sleeping subject, as told by a member of the Forum:
The procedure was as follows: They were to read a paper each Sunday afternoon. It was ordinarily read to them by one of the Contact Commission, usually Dr. Sadler. They were to write down any questions that came to mind and hand them in each week. Mr. Kellogg was generally responsible for collecting them. Answers to their questions were then considered by the superhuman revelators. The answers were incorporated into a subsequent paper or an editing of the original paper. In this way, one paper about God eventually mushroomed into five papers about God – the first five in the book. Other parts likewise expanded as the superhumans monitored the human reaction to their material.
This process initially took approximately five years and then consisted of 57 papers. But the process does not stop there. The book advanced another generation in human understanding between 1929 and 1935. After years of reading papers, the first draft of Parts I-III (of the Urantia Book), the Forum was told approximately: “With your increased understanding derived from reading and study of the material, you can now ask more intelligent questions. We are going to go through the book again.” And so the book was edited and expanded week by week and year by year as the Forum members learned and grew.
It had been reported by several Forumites that some revelatory material was recalled – either because it was just too incomprehensible to the human mind or because it was deemed best not to reveal the information to the future readership. Very little explanation was given beyond the fact that it was their decision to withdraw the paper. Other papers were edited after being read to the Forum. For instance, one of the papers stated that the apostle Nathaniel had a good sense of humor for a Jew. At this comment the members of the Forum chuckled. The next time they got this paper from the safe, they discovered the phrase “for a Jew” was deleted. Human reaction to the material was obviously monitored closely. At least one Forumite believed that several of the most difficult papers would not have been included in The Urantia Book without the questions formulated by William S. Sadler, Jr. The Urantia Book bears the birthmark of the collective mind of the people who composed the Forum during the birth phase.
Dr. Sadler said in one paper that about 150 people participated in this creative process. In another, he mentions 300 people while citing the total Forum membership as 486. The original charter membership numbered 30. Then as now, there was a mix of people including the very committed, the indifferent, and even a few with negative reactions to the whole business. They came from diverse backgrounds. In the march of human events over the years, some dropped out, some moved out of town, some moved on to the mansion worlds.
By 1934 and 1935, the process was essentially complete for the first three parts of the book. A third and final creative round was undertaken between 1935 and 1942 to clarify concepts and remove ambiguities. This apparently resulted in only minor editing by the superhuman revelators.
About 1935, the Forum received the Jesus papers from the midwayers who had waited for approval from Uversa before undertaking the story. The final round of clarification and editing between 1935 and 1942 seems to have included Part IV. Part IV is undated. No one has said why. I believe it is because Parts I to III contain cosmology that will become dated and eventually need revision. Part IV on the other hand contains “historic facts and religious truths” which should “stand on the records of the ages to come.” Its date need not be fixed.
It is said that the original handwritten manuscripts of the Urantia papers were kept in a locked safe by Sadler. However, it is claimed by Sadler and the other members of the Contact Commission and the Forum that these original manuscripts literally disappeared from the interior of the safe after their typed version had been generated! The claim is that the superhuman beings who wrote them caused them to dematerialize. Furthermore, the Contact Commission subsequently destroyed the typewritten versions of the Urantia papers that were typed by Christy, for unknown reasons.
The First Edition of the Urantia Book was published in 1955. Soon thereafter, the Contact Commission received this final message from the superhuman revelators: “You are now on your own”. Sadler, the key person associated with the Urantia Book commented: “They didn’t even say goodbye”. This 1955 First Edition is considered to be the definitive copy of the Urantia Book, given the fact that the handwritten and the typed versions of the original Urantia papers no longer exist.
Of the members of the Contact Commission, Lena Sadler died in 1939, Wilfred Kellogg in 1956, his wife Anna Kellogg in 1960, Bill Sadler Jr. in 1963, William Sadler in 1969, and “Christy” Christensen died in 1982.
So there you have it. The history of the Urantia Book, such as it is. It is indeed a very puzzling and incomplete history to say the least. There would seem to be only two possibilities to explain this history:
1. William Sadler led a conspiracy with the Contact Commission and Forum members to collectively formulate and write the Urantia Book.
2. The Urantia Book’s authors were superhuman beings who channeled its content through the sleeping subject, Wilfred Kellogg.
In his critical commentary, Martin Gardner surmises the following:
1. The sleeping subject, Wilfred Kellogg, was transmitting communications from his subconscious mind, rather than from superhuman beings.
2. William Sadler and his wife Lena were devout Adventists until the turn of the 20th century, when they became disillusioned with the Adventist religion and its then-leader Ellen White.
3. Over a period of years, the Sadlers came to believe that Wilfred Kellogg was God’s conduit for a new revelation that would be superior to Adventism, a revelation that would be essentially a new and better form of Christianity. Sadler believed that he was chosen as the messenger to bring this new utopia to humanity.
4. Sadler wrote or plagerized most of the content of the Urantia Book, with Forum members providing the rest.
There are only two possibilities. Either the Urantia Book was written by superhuman beings or it was written largely by William Sadler. After reading both the Urantia Book and Gardner’s critique in detail, I honestly cannot definitively decide between one or the other. The motivation and evidence for the Sadler authorship appears weak and speculative, but there is also little evidence of superhuman authorship, other than the highly unusual content of the Urantia Book itself.
In concluding this brief history of the Urantia Book, the only thing I can say is that you should read the Urantia Book in detail, and the other books on it that I have cited, and then try and decide for yourself. We now proceed to a summary of the relevant content of the Urantia Book.
Content of the Urantia Book:
As was mentioned, the Urantia Book is a total of 2097 pages of very dense and difficult reading. I have read the Urantia Book twice, cover-to-cover. It took me two readings, the first cursory and the second in-depth, in order to sufficiently understand the Urantia Book’s content, and even with that I still do not fully comprehend all the concepts that are being presented.
I also observed, as has the most important skeptic Martin Gardner, the remarkable consistency of the Book throughout its entire length. One has to wonder how such consistency was achieved by whoever wrote it. What I will do now is to try and summarize the aspects of the Urantia Book content that are most relevant to our current topic. For the most part, selected actual content of the Urantia Book will be employed for this purpose, since this is the best way to convey to the reader the character and nature of the material that the Book puts forth. These selections were made so as to convey the important concepts in as succinct a manner as possible. Each of these concepts is developed in considerably greater detail in the Urantia Book itself, and the Book also provides a wealth of other detailed information that is not presented here. I will restrict this summary to Parts I, II, and III only, and will not summarize Part IV, The Life and Teachings of Jesus, as you can read this for yourself, if you wish.
The Foreward to the Urantia Book (author listed as a Divine Counselor) begins as follows:
In the minds of the mortals of Urantia – that being the name of your world – there exists great confusion respecting the meaning of such terms as God, divinity, and deity. Human beings are still more confused and uncertain about the relationships of the divine personalities designated by these numerous appellations. Because of this conceptual poverty associated with so much ideational confusion, I have been directed to formulate this introductory statement in explanation of the meanings which should be attached to certain word symbols as they may be hereinafter used in those papers which the Orvonton corps of truth revealers have been authorized to translate into the English language of Urantia.
It is exceedingly difficult to present enlarged concepts and advanced truth, in our endeavor to expand cosmic consciousness and enhance spiritual perception, when we are restricted to the use of a circumscribed language of the realm. But our mandate admonishes us to make every effort to convey our meanings by using the word symbols of the English tongue. We have been instructed to introduce new terms only when the concept to be portrayed finds no terminology in English which can be employed to convey such a new concept partially or even with more or less distortion of meaning. …..
Your world, Urantia, is one of many similar inhabited planets which comprise the local universe of Nebadon. This universe, together with similar creations, makes up the superuniverse of Orvonton, from whose capital, Uversa, our commission hails. Orvonton is one of the seven evolutionary superuniverses of time and space which circle the never-beginning, never-ending creation of divine perfection – the central universe of Havona. At the heart of this eternal and central universe is the stationary Isle of Paradise, the geographic center of infinity and the dwelling place of the eternal God.
Deity and God:
The universe of universes presents phenomena of deity activities on diverse levels of cosmic realities, mind meanings, and spirit values, but all of these ministrations – personal or otherwise – are divinely co-ordinated.
Deity is personalizable as God, is prepersonal and superpersonal in ways not altogether comprehensible by man. Deity is characterized by the quality of unity – actual or potential – on all supermaterial levels of reality; and this unifying quality is best comprehended by creatures as divinity. ….
Divinity is the characteristic, unifying, and co-ordinating quality of Deity. Divinity is creature comprehensible as truth, beauty, and goodness; correlated in personality as love, mercy, and ministry; disclosed on impersonal levels as justice, power, and sovereignty. ….
Evolving mortal creatures experience an irresistible urge to symbolize their finite concepts of God. Man’s consciousness of moral duty and his spiritual idealism represent a value level – an experiential reality – which is difficult of symbolization.
Cosmic consciousness implies the recognition of a First Cause, the one and only uncaused reality. God, the Universal Father, functions on three Deity-personality levels of subinfinite value and relative divinity expression:
1. Prepersonal – as in the ministry of the Father fragments, such as the Thought Adjusters.
2. Personal – as in the evolutionary experience of created and procreated beings.
3. Superpersonal – as in the eventuated existences of certain absonite and associated beings. The absonite level of reality is characterized by things and beings without beginnings or endings and by the transcendence of time and space. Absoniters are not created; they are eventuated – they simply are.
GOD is a word symbol designating all personalizations of Deity. The term God always denotes personality. Deity may, or may not, refer to divinity personalities. The word GOD is used, in these papers (i.e. in the Urantia Book), with the following meanings:
1. God the Father – Creator, Controller, and Upholder. The Universal Father, the First Person of Deity.
2. God the Son – Coordinate Creator, Spirit Controller, and Spiritual Administrator. The Eternal Son, the Second Person of Deity.
3. God the Spirit – Conjoint Actor, Universal Integrator, and Mind Bestower. The Infinite Spirit, the Third Person of Deity.
4. God the Supreme – the actualizing or evolving God of time and space. Personal Deity associatively realizing the time-space experiential achievement of creature-Creator identity. The Supreme Being is personally experiencing the achievement of Deity unity as the evolving and experiential God of the evolutionary creatures of time and space.
5. God the Sevenfold – Deity personality anywhere actually functioning in time and space. The personal Paradise Deities and their creative associates functioning in and beyond the borders of the central universe and power-personalizing as the Supreme Being on the first creature level of unifying Deity revelation in time and space. This level, the grand universe, is the sphere of the time-space descension of Paradise personalities in reciprocal association with the time-space ascension of evolutionary creatures.
6. God the Ultimate – the eventuating god of supertime and transcending space. The second experiential level of unifying Deity manifestation. God the Ultimate implies the attained realization of the synthesized absonite-superpersonal, time-space-transcended, and eventuated-experiential values, coordinated on final creative levels of Deity reality.
7. God the Absolute – the experientializing god of transcended superpersonal values and divinity meanings, now existential as the Deity Absolute. This is the third level of unifying Deity expression and expansion. On this supercreative level, Deity experiences exhaustion of personalizable potential, encounters completion of divinity, and undergoes depletion of capacity for self-revelation to successive and progressive levels of other-personalization. Deity now encounters, impinges upon, and experiences identity with, the Unqualified Absolute.
Reality:
Reality, as comprehended by finite beings, is partial, relative, and shadowy. The maximum Deity reality fully comprehensible by evolutionary finite creatures is embraced within the Supreme Being. Nevertheless there are antecedent and eternal realities, superfinite realities, which are ancestral to this Supreme Deity of evolutionary time-space creatures. Attempting to portray the origin and nature of universal reality, we are forced to employ the technique of time-space reasoning in order to reach the level of the finite mind. Therefore must many of the simultaneous events of eternity be presented as sequential transactions.
As a time-space creature would view the origin and differentiation of Reality, the eternal and infinite I AM achieved Deity liberation from the fetters of unqualified infinity through the exercise of inherent and eternal free will, and this divorcement from unqualified infinity produced the first absolute divinity-tension. This tension of infinity differential is resolved by the Universal Absolute, which functions to unify and coordinate the dynamic infinity of Total Deity and the static infinity of the Unqualified Absolute.
In this original transaction the theoretical I AM achieved the realization of personality by becoming the Eternal Father of the Original Son simultaneously with becoming the Eternal Source of the Isle of Paradise. Co-existent with the differentiation of the Son from the Father, and in the presence of Paradise, there appeared the person of the Infinite Spirit and the central universe of Havona. With the appearance of coexistent personal Deity, the Eternal Son and the Infinite Spirit, the Father escaped, as a personality, from otherwise inevitable diffusion throughout the potential of Total Deity. Thenceforth it is only in Trinity association with his two Deity equals that the Father fills all Deity potential, while increasingly experiential Deity is being actualized on the divinity levels of Supremacy, Ultimacy, and Absoluteness.
The concept of the I AM is a philosophic concession which we make to the time-bound, space-fettered, finite mind of man, to the impossibility of creature comprehension of eternity existences – nonbeginning, nonending realities and relationships. To the time-space creature, all things must have a beginning save only the ONE UNCAUSED – the primeval cause of causes. Therefore do we conceptualize this philosophic value-level as the I AM, at the same time instructing all creatures that the Eternal Son and the Infinite Spirit are coeternal with the I AM; in other words, that there never was a time when the I AM was not the Father of the Son and, with him, of the Spirit.
The qualities of universal reality are manifest in Urantian human experience on the following levels:
1. Body. The material or physical organism of man. The living electrochemical mechanism of animal nature and origin.
2. Mind. The thinking, perceiving, and feeling mechanism of the human organism. The total conscious and unconscious experience. The intelligence associated with the emotional life reaching upward through worship and wisdom to the spirit level.
3. Spirit. The divine spirit that indwells the mind of man – the Thought Adjuster. This immortal spirit is prepersonal – not a personality, though destined to become a part of the personality of the surviving mortal creature.
4. Soul. The soul of man is an experiential acquirement. As a mortal creature chooses to “do the will of the Father in heaven”, so the indwelling spirit becomes the father of a new reality in human experience. The mortal and material mind is the mother of this same emerging reality. The substance of this new reality is neither material nor spiritual – it is morontial. This is the emerging and immortal soul, which is destined to survive mortal death and begin the Paradise ascension.
Personality. The personality of mortal man is neither body, mind, nor spirit; neither is it the soul. Personality is the one changeless reality in an otherwise ever-changing creature experience; and it unifies all other associated factors of individuality. The personality is the unique bestowal which the Universal Father makes upon the living and associated energies of matter, mind, and spirit, and which survives with the survival of the morontial soul.
Morontia is a term designating a vast level intervening between the material and the spiritual. It may designate personal or impersonal realities, living or nonliving energies. The warp of morontia is spiritual; its woof is physical.
Cosmology of the Universe of Universes:
According to the Urantia Book, the absolute center of the Universe of Universes (there are more than just one) is the Isle of Paradise. Paradise is the dwelling place of Deity, and has always been His dwelling place, and will always be His dwelling place. In addition, the Isle of Paradise is the only universally fixed location in the Universe of Universes. It is the fixed center of everything. Since it is fixed and does not move, it constitutes an absolute center of reference and directions for the rest of the Universes.
The Urantia Book states that vast regions of space surround the Isle of Paradise, in both the vertical and the horizontal directions. Space in the horizontal direction with respect to Paradise is called “pervaded space”. It is in pervaded space that all the current space-time elements of the grand universe exist. “Unpervaded space” exists in the vertical direction with respect to the Paradise Isle. In unpervaded space, none of the forces, energies, powers, and presences are present that exist in pervaded space. Essentially, nothing but space exists there. Unpervaded space can also be thought of as a “space reservoir” with respect to the characteristic of space respiration.
Space respiration has a two billion year cycle. During the first billion years, the pervaded space expands (with an associated contraction of the unpervaded space). During the second billion years, the pervaded space contracts. According to the Urantia Book, pervaded space (our space) is presently in an expansion mode.
The Urantia Book suggests visualizing pervaded space by imagining “a finite, but inconceivably large, V-shaped plane situated at right angles to both the upper and lower surfaces of Paradise, with its point nearly tangent to peripheral Paradise, and then visualize this plane in elliptical revolution about Paradise, its revolution would roughly outline the volume of pervaded space”.
The Grand Universe
Proceeding outward from Paradise through the horizontal extension of pervaded space, the master universe is existent in six concentric ellipses, the space levels encircling the central Isle:
1. The Central Universe – Havona
2. The Seven Superuniverses
3. The First Outer Space Level
4. The Second Outer Space Level
5. The Third Outer Space Level
6. The Fourth and Outermost Space Level
Havona, the central universe, is not a time creation; it is an eternal existence. This never-beginning, never-ending universe consists of one billion spheres of sublime perfection and is surrounded by the enormous dark gravity bodies. At the center of Havona is the stationary and absolutely stabilized Isle of Paradise, surrounded by its twenty-one satellites. Owing to the enormous encircling masses of the dark gravity bodies about the fringe of the central universe, the mass content of this central creation is far in excess of the total known mass of all seven sectors of the grand universe.
The Paradise-Havona System, the eternal universe encircling the eternal Isle, constitutes the perfect and eternal nucleus of the master universe; all seven of the superuniverses and all regions of outer space revolve in established orbits around the gigantic central aggregation of the Paradise satellites and the Havona spheres.
The Seven Superuniverses are not primary physical organizations; nowhere do their boundaries divide a nebular family, neither do they cross a local universe, a prime creative unit. Each superuniverse is simply a geographic space clustering of approximately one seventh of the organized and partially inhabited post-Havona creation, and each is about equal in the number of local universes embraced and in the space encompassed. Nebadon, your local universe, is one of the newer creations in Orvonton, the seventh superuniverse.
The Grand Universe is the present organized and inhabited creation. It consists of the seven superuniverses, with an aggregate evolutionary potential of around seven trillion inhabited planets, not to mention the eternal spheres of the central creation. But this tentative estimate takes no account of architectural administrative spheres, neither does it include the outlying groups of unorganized universes. The present ragged edge of the grand universe, its uneven and unfinished periphery, together with the tremendously unsettled condition of the whole astronomical plot, suggests to our star students that even the seven superuniverses are, as yet, uncompleted.
The Outer Space Levels. Far out in space, at an enormous distance from the seven inhabited superuniverses, there are assembling vast and unbelievably stupendous circuits of force and materializing energies. Between the energy circuits of the seven superuniverses and this gigantic outer belt of force activity, there is a space zone of comparative quiet, which varies in width but averages about four hundred thousand light-years. These space zones are free from star dust – cosmic fog. Our students of these phenomena are in doubt as to the exact status of the space-forces existing in this zone of relative quiet which encircles the seven superuniverses. But about one-half million light-years beyond the periphery of the present grand universe we observe the beginnings of a zone of an unbelievable energy action which increases in volume and intensity for over twenty-five million light-years. These tremendous wheels of energizing forces are situated in the first outer space level, a continuous belt of cosmic activity encircling the whole of the known, organized, and inhabited creation.
Still greater activities are taking place beyond these regions, for the Uversa physicists have detected early evidence of force manifestations more than fifty million light-years beyond the outermost ranges of the phenomena in the first outer space level. These activities undoubtedly presage the organization of the material creations of the second outer space level of the master universe.
The central universe is the creation of eternity; the seven superuniverses are the creations of time; the four outer space levels are undoubtedly destined to eventuate/evolve the ultimacy of creation. And there are those who maintain that the Infinite can never attain full expression short of infinity; and therefore do they postulate an additional and unrevealed creation beyond the fourth and outermost space level, a possible ever-expanding, never-ending universe of infinity. In theory we do not know how to limit either the infinity of the Creator or the potential infinity of creation, but as it exists and is administered, we regard the master universe as having limitations, as being definitely delimited and bounded on its outer margins by open space.
All units of cosmic energy are in primary revolution, are engaged in the execution of their mission, while swinging around the universal orbit. The universes of space and their component systems and worlds are all revolving spheres, moving along the endless circuits of the master universe space levels. Absolutely nothing is stationary in all the master universe except the very center of Havona, the eternal Isle of Paradise, the center of gravity.
Grand Universe Organizational Structure
Only the Universal Father knows the location and actual number of inhabited worlds in space; he calls them all by name and number. I can give only the approximate number of inhabited or inhabitable planets, for some local universes have more worlds suitable for intelligent life than others. Nor have all projected local universes been organized. Therefore the estimates which I offer are solely for the purpose of affording some idea of the immensity of the material creation.
There are seven superuniverses in the grand universe, and they are constituted approximately as follows:
The System. The basic unit of the supergovernment consists of about one thousand inhabited or inhabitable worlds. Blazing suns, cold worlds, planets too near the hot suns, and other spheres not suitable for creature habitation are not included in this group. These one thousand worlds adapted to support life are called a system, but in the younger systems only a comparatively small number of these worlds may be inhabited. Each inhabited planet is presided over by a Planetary Prince, and each local system has an architectural sphere (i.e. a constructed planet that does not revolve around a sun) as its headquarters and is ruled by a System Sovereign.
The Constellation. One hundred systems (about 100,000 inhabitable planets) make up a constellation. Each constellation has an architectural headquarters sphere and is presided over by three Vorondadek Sons, the Most Highs. Each constellation also has a Faithful of Days in observation, an ambassador of the Paradise Trinity.
The Local Universe. One hundred constellations (about 10,000,000 inhabitable planets) constitute a local universe. Each local universe has a magnificent architectural headquarters world and is ruled by one of the coordinate Creator Sons of God of the order of Michael. Each universe is blessed by the presence of a Union of Days, a representative of the Paradise Trinity.
The Minor Sector. One hundred local universes (about 1,000,000,000 inhabitable planets) constitute a minor sector of the superuniverse government; it has a wonderful headquarters world, wherefrom its rulers, the Recents of Days, administer the affairs of the minor sector. There are three Recent of Days, Supreme Trinity Personalities, on each minor sector headquarters.
The Major Sector. One hundred minor sectors (about 100,000,000,000 inhabitable worlds) make one major sector. Each major sector is provided with a superb headquarters and is presided over by three Perfections of Days, Supreme Trinity Personalities.
The Superuniverse. Ten major sectors (about 1,000,000,000,000 inhabitable planets) constitute a superuniverse. Each superuniverse is provided with an enormous and glorious headquarters world and is ruled by three Ancients of Days.
The Grand Universe. Seven superuniverses make up the present organized grand universe, consisting of approximately seven trillion inhabitable worlds plus the architectural spheres and the one billion inhabited spheres of Havona. The superuniverses are ruled and administered indirectly and reflectively from Paradise by the Seven Master Spirits. The billion worlds of Havona are directly administered by the Eternals of Days, one such Supreme Trinity Personality presiding over each of these perfect spheres.
Practically all of the starry realms visible to the naked eye on Urantia belong to the seventh section of the grand universe, the superuniverse of Orvonton. The vast Milky Way starry system represents the central nucleus of Orvonton, being largely beyond the borders of your local universe.
Uversa is the headquarters of Orvonton. Uversa is the spiritual and administrative headquarters for approximately one trillion inhabited or inhabitable worlds. The glory, grandeur, and perfection of the Orvonton capital surpass any of the wonders of the time-space creations.
Urantia:
Your world is called Urantia, and it is numbered 606 in the planetary group, or system, of Satania. This system has at present 619 inhabited worlds, and more than two hundred additional planets are evolving favorably toward being inhabited worlds at some future time.
Satania has a headquarters world called Jerusem, and it is system number twenty-four in the constellation of Norlatiadek. Your constellation, Norlatiadek, consists of one hundred local systems and has a headquarters world called Edentia. Norlatiadek is number seventy in the universe of Nebadon. The local universe of Nebadon consists of one hundred constellations and has a capital known as Salvington. The sovereign of Nebadon is a Creator Son of the Paradise order of Michael. The universe of Nebadon is number eighty-four in the minor sector of Ensa.
The minor sector of Ensa consists of one hundred local universes and has a capital called Uminor the third. This minor sector is number three in the major sector of Splandon. Splandon consists of one hundred minor sectors and has a headquarters world called Umajor the fifth. It is the fifth major sector of the superuniverse of Orvonton, the seventh segment of the grand universe. The headquarters world of Orvonton is Uversa. Thus you can locate your planet in the scheme of the organization and administration of the universe of universes.
The Satania system of inhabited worlds is far removed from Uversa and that great sun cluster which functions as the physical or astronomical center of the seventh superuniverse. From Jerusem, the headquarters of Satania, it is over 200,000 light-years to the physical center of the superuniverse of Orvonton, far, far away in the dense diameter of the Milky Way. Satania is on the periphery of the local universe, and Nebadon is now well out towards the edge of Orvonton.
The grand universe number of your world, Urantia, is 5,342,482,337,666. That is the registry number on Uversa and on Paradise, your number in the catalogue of the inhabited worlds.
5,000,000,000 years ago your sun was a comparatively isolated blazing orb, having gathered to itself most of the nearby circulating matter of space, remnants of the recent unheaval which attended its own birth.
4,500,000,000 years ago the enormous Angona system began its approach to the neighborhood of this solitary sun. The center of this great system was a dark giant of space, solid, highly charged, and possessing tremendous gravity pull.
As Angona more closely approached the sun, at moments of maximum expansion during solar pulsations, streams of gaseous material were shot out into space as gigantic solar tongues. At first these flaming gas tongues would invariably fall back into the sun, but as Angona drew nearer and nearer, the gravity pull of the gigantic visitor became so great that these tongues of gas would break off at certain points, the roots falling back into the sun while the outer sections would become detached to form independent bodies of matter, solar meteorites, which immediately started to revolve about the sun in elliptical orbits of their own.
As the Angona system drew nearer, the solar extrusions grew larger and larger; more and more matter was drawn from the sun to become independent circulating bodies in surrounding space. This situation developed for about five hundred thousand years until Angona made its closest approach to the sun; whereupon the sun, in conjunction with one of its periodic internal convulsions, experienced a partial disruption; from opposite sides and simultaneously, enormous volumes of matter were disgorged. From the Angona side there was drawn out a vast column of solar gases, rather pointed at both ends and markedly bulging at the center, which became permanently detached from the immediate gravity control of the sun. This great column of solar gases which was thus separated from the sun subsequently evolved into the twelve planets of the solar system.
2,500,000,000 years ago the planets had grown immensely in size. Urantia was a well-developed sphere about one tenth its present mass and was still growing rapidly by meteoric accretion.
1,000,000,000 years ago is the date of the actual beginning of Urantia history. The planet had attained approximately its present size. And about this time it was placed upon the physical registries of Nebadon and given its name, Urantia.
900,000,000 years ago witnessed the arrival on Urantia of the first Satania scouting party sent out from Jerusem to examine the planet and make a report on its adaptation for a life-experiment station. This commission consisted by twenty-four members, embracing Life Carriers, Lanonandek Sons, Melchizedeks, seraphim, and other orders of celestial life having to do with the early days of planetary organization and administration.
After making a painstaking survey of the planet, this commission returned to Jerusem and reported favorably to the System Sovereign, recommending that Urantia be placed on the life-experiment registry. Your world was accordingly registered on Jerusem as a decimal planet, and the Life Carriers were notified that they would be granted permission to institute new patterns of mechanical, chemical, and electrical mobilization at the time of their subsequent arrival with life transplantation and implantation mandates.
550,000,000 years ago the Life Carriers corps returned to Urantia. In cooperation with spiritual powers and superphysical forces we organized and initiated the original life patterns of this world and planted them in the hospitable waters of the realm.
1,000,000 years ago Urantia was registered as an inhabited world. A mutation within the stock of the progressing Primates suddenly produced two primitive human beings, the actual ancestors of mankind.
The Nature and Destiny of Human Beings:
Thought Adjusters:
Although the Universal Father is personally resident on Paradise, at the very center of the universes, he is also actually present on the worlds of space in the minds of his countless children of time, for he indwells them as the Thought Adjusters. The eternal Father is at one and the same time farthest removed from, and most intimately associated with, his planetary mortal sons.
The Adjuster is an absolute essence of an infinite being imprisoned within the mind of a finite creature which, depending on the choosing of such a mortal, can eventually consummate this temporary union of God and man and veritably actualize a new order of being for unending universe service. The Adjuster is the divine universe reality which factualizes the truth that God is man’s Father. The Adjuster is man’s infallible cosmic compass, always and unerringly pointing the soul Godward.
Since Thought Adjusters are of the essence of original Deity, no one may presume to discourse authoritatively upon their nature and origin; I can only impart the traditions of Salvington and the beliefs of Uversa; I can only explain how we regard these Mystery Monitors (i.e. Thought Adjusters) and their associated entities throughout the grand universe.
Though there are diverse opinions regarding the mode of the bestowal of Thought Adjusters, there exist no such differences concerning their origin; all are agreed that they proceed direct from the Universal Father, the First Source and Center. They are not created beings; they are fragmentized entities constituting the factual presence of the infinite God. Together with their many unrevealed associates, the Adjusters are undiluted and unmixed divinity, unqualified and unattenuated parts of Deity; they are of God, and as far as we are able to discern, they are God.
Can you really realize the true significance of the Adjuster’s indwelling? Do you really fathom what it means to have an absolute fragment of the absolute and infinite Deity, the Universal Father, indwelling and fusing with your finite mortal natures? When mortal man fuses with an actual fragment of the existential Cause of the total cosmos, no limit can ever be placed upon the destiny of such an unprecedented and unimaginable partnership.
We know that Thought Adjusters are spirits, pure spirits, presumably absolute spirits. But the Adjuster must also be something more than exclusive spirit reality. In addition to conjectured mindedness, factors of pure energy are also present. If you will remember that God is the source of pure energy and of pure spirit, it will not be so difficult to perceive that His fragments would be both. It is a fact that the Adjusters traverse space over the instantaneous and universal gravity circuits of the Paradise Isle.
Thought Adjusters are not personalities, but they are real entities; they are truly and perfectly individualized, although they are never, while indwelling mortals, actually personalized. Thought Adjusters are not true personalities; they are true realities, realities of the purest order known in the universe of universes – they are the divine presence. Though not personal, these marvelous fragments of the Father are commonly referred to as beings and sometimes, in view of the spiritual phases of their present ministry to mortals, as spirit entities.
If Thought Adjusters are not personalities having prerogatives of will and powers of choice, how then can they select mortal subjects and volunteer to indwell these creatures of the evolutionary worlds? This is a question easy to ask, but probably no being in the universe of universes has ever found the exact answer. Even my order of personality, the Solitary Messengers, does not fully understand the endowment of will, choice, and love in entities that are not personal.
We have often speculated that Thought Adjusters must have volition on all prepersonal levels of choice. They volunteer to indwell human beings, they lay plans for man’s eternal career, they adapt, modify, and substitute in accordance with circumstances, and these activities connote genuine volition. They have affection for mortals, they function in universe crises, they are always waiting to act decisively in accordance with human choice, and all these are highly volitional reactions. In all situations not concerned with the domain of the human will, they unquestionably exhibit conduct which betokens the exercise of powers in every sense the equivalent of will, maximated decision.
Why then, if Thought Adjusters possess volition, are they subservient to the mortal will? We believe it is because Adjuster volition, though absolute in nature, is prepersonal in manifestation. Human will functions on the personality level of universe reality, and throughout the cosmos the impersonal – the nonpersonal, the subpersonal, and the prepersonal – is ever responsive to the will and acts of existent personality.
Throughout a universe of created beings and nonpersonal energies we do not observe will, volition, choice, and love manifested apart from personality. Except in the Adjusters and other similar entities we do not witness these attributes of personality functioning in association with inpersonal realities. It would not be correct to designate an Adjuster as subpersonal, neither would it be proper to allude to such an entity as superpersonal, but it would be entirely permissible to term such a being prepersonal.
To our orders of being these fragments of Deity are known as the divine gifts. We recognize that the Adjusters are divine in origin, and that they constitute the probable proof and demonstration of a reservation by the Universal Father of the possibility of direct and unlimited communication with any and all material creatures throughout his virtually infinite realms, and all of this quite apart from his presence in the personalities of his Paradise Sons or through his indirect ministrations in the personalities of the Infinite Spirit.
There are no created beings that would not delight to be hosts to the Mystery Monitors, but no orders of beings are thus indwelt excepting evolutionary will creatures of finaliter destiny.
The Adjusters cannot invade the mortal mind until it has been duly prepared by the indwelling ministry of the adjutant mind-spirits and encircuited in the Holy Spirit. Creature mind must exhibit the worship outreach and indicate wisdom function by exhibiting the ability to choose between the emerging values of good and evil – moral choice. Adjusters reach their human subjects on Urantia, on the average, just prior to the sixth birthday.
The higher forms of intelligent intercommunication between human beings are greatly helped by the indwelling Adjusters. Animals do have fellow feelings, but they do not communicate concepts to each other; they can express emotions but not ideas and ideals. Neither do men of animal origin experience a high type of intellectual intercourse or spiritual communion with their fellows until the Thought Adjusters have been bestowed, albeit, when such evolutionary creatures develop speech, they are on the highroad to receiving Adjusters. Animals do, in a crude way, communicate with each other, but there is little or no personality in such primitive contact.
The Thought Adjuster and the Soul:
The concept of a soul and of an indwelling spirit is not new to Urantia; it has frequently appeared in the various systems of planetary beliefs. Many of the Oriental as well as some of the Occidental faiths have perceived that man is divine in heritage as well as human in inheritance. The feeling of the inner presence in addition to the external omnipresence of Deity has long formed a part of many Urantian religions. Men have long believed that there is something growing within the human nature, something vital that is destined to endure beyond the short span of temporal life.
In the conception of the atman the Hindu teachers really approximated an appreciation of the nature and presence of the Adjuster, but they failed to distinguish the copresence of the evolving and potentially immortal soul. The Chinese, however, recognized two aspects of a human being, the yang and the yin, the soul and the spirit.
The human personality is identified with mind and spirit held together in functional relationship by life in a material body. This functioning relationship of such mind and spirit does not result in some combination of the qualities or attributes of mind and spirit but rather in an entirely new, original, and unique universe value of potentially eternal endurance, the soul.
There are three and not two factors in the evolutionary creation of such an immortal soul. These three antecedents of the morontia human soul are:
1. The human mind and all cosmic influences antecedent thereto and impinging thereon.
2. The divine spirit indwelling this human mind and all potentials inherent in such a fragment of absolute spirituality together with all associated spiritual influences and factors in human life.
3. The relationship between material mind and divine spirit, which connotes a value and carries a meaning not found in either of the contributing factors to such an association. The reality of this unique relationship is neither material nor spiritual but morontial. It is the soul.
During the life in the flesh the evolving soul is enabled to reinforce the supermaterial decisions of the mortal mind. The soul, being supermaterial, does not of itself function on the material level of human experience. Neither can this subspiritual soul, without the collaboration of some spirit of Deity, such as the Adjuster, function above the morontia level. Neither does the soul make final decisions until death or translation divorces it from material association with the mortal mind expect when and as this material mind delegates such authority freely and willingly to such a morontia soul of associated function. During life the mortal will, the personality power of decision-choice, is resident in the material mind circuits; as terrestrial mortal growth proceeds, this self, with its priceless powers of choice, becomes increasingly identified with the emerging morontia-soul entity; after death and following the mansion world resurrection, the human personality is completely identified with the morontia self. The soul is thus the embryo of the future morontia vehicle of personality identity.
Personality Survival:
The evolutionary planets are the spheres of human origin, the initial worlds of the ascending mortal career. Urantia is your starting point; here you and your divine Thought Adjuster are joined in temporary union. You have been endowed with a perfect guide; therefore, if you will sincerely run the race of time and gain the final goal of faith, the reward of the ages shall be yours; you will be eternally united with your indwelling Adjuster. Then will begin your real life, the ascending life, to which your present mortal state is but the vestibule. Then will begin your exalted and progressive mission as finaliters in the eternity which stretches out before you. And throughout all of these successive ages and stages of evolutionary growth, there is one part of you that remains absolutely unaltered, and that is personality – permanence in the presence of change. Personality is changeless in the presence of change. It can make a gift to God – dedication of the free will to the doing of the will of God. It is characterized by morality – awareness of relativity of relationship with other persons.
Personality is unique, absolutely unique: It is unique in time and space; it is unique in eternity and on Paradise; it is unique when bestowed – there are no duplicates; it is unique during every moment of existence; it is unique in relation to God – He is no respecter of persons, but neither does He add them together, for they are unaddable – they are associable but nontotalable.
Personality may survive mortal death with identity in the surviving soul. The Adjuster and the personality are changeless; the relationship between them (in the soul) is nothing but change, continuing evolution; and if this change (growth) ceased, the soul would cease.
The Phenomenon of Death:
Urantians generally recognize only one kind of death, the physical cessation of life energies; but concerning personality survival there are really three kinds:
1. Spiritual (soul) death. If and when mortal man has finally rejected survival, when he has been pronounced spiritually insolvent, morontially bankrupt, in the conjoint opinion of the Adjuster and the surviving seraphim, when such coordinate advice has been recorded on Uversa, and after the Censors and their reflective associates have verified these findings, thereupon do the rulers of Orvonton order the immediate release of the indwelling Monitor. But this release of the Adjuster in no way affects the duties of the personal or group seraphim concerned with that Adjuster-abandoned individual. This kind of death is final in its significance irrespective of the temporary continuation of the living energies of the physical and mind mechanisms. From the cosmic standpoint the mortal is already dead; the continuing life merely indicates the persistence of the material momentum of cosmic energies.
2. Intellectual (mind) death. When the vital circuits of higher adjutant ministry are disrupted through the aberrations of intellect or because of the partial destruction of the mechanism of the brain, and if these conditions pass a certain critical point of irreparability, the indwelling Adjuster is immediately released to depart for Divinington. On the universe records a mortal personality is considered to have met with death whenever the essential mind circuits of human will-action have been destroyed. And again, this is death, irrespective of the continuing function of the living mechanism of the physical body. The body minus the volitional mind is no longer human, but according to the prior choosing of the human will, the soul of such an individual may survive.
3. Physical (body and mind) death. When death overtakes a human being, the Adjuster remains in the citadel of the mind until it ceases to function as an intelligent mechanism, about the time that the measurable brain energies cease their rhythmic vital pulsations. Following this dissolution the Adjuster takes leave of the vanishing mind, just as unceremoniously as entry was made years before, and proceeds to Divinington by way of Uversa.
After death the material body returns to the elemental world from which it was derived, but two nonmaterial factors of surviving personality persist: The pre-existent Thought Adjuster, with the memory transcription of the mortal career, proceeds to Divinington; and there also remains, in the custody of the destiny guardian, the immortal morontia soul of the deceased human. These phases and forms of soul, these once kinetic but now static formulas of identity, are essential to repersonalization on the morontia worlds; and it is the reunion of the Adjuster and the soul that reassembles the surviving personality, that reconsciousizes you at the time of the morontia awakening.
Upon death the Thought Adjuster temporarily loses personality, but not identity; the human subject temporarily loses identity, but not personality; on the mansion worlds both reunite in eternal manifestation. Never does a departed Thought Adjuster return to earth as the being of former indwelling; never is personality manifested without the human will; and never does a dis-Adjustered human being after death manifest active identity or in any manner establish communication with the living beings of earth. Such dis-Adjustered souls are wholly and absolutely unconscious during the long or short sleep of death. There can be no exhibition of any sort of personality or ability to engage in communications with other personalities until after completion of survival. Those who go to the mansion worlds are not permitted to send messages back to their loved ones. It is the policy throughout the universes to forbid such communication during the period of the current dispensation.
When the more spiritually and cosmically advanced mortals die, they proceed immediately to the mansion worlds; in general, this provision operates with those who have had assigned to them personal seraphic guardians. Other mortals may be detained until such time as the adjudication of their affairs has been completed, after which they may proceed to the mansion worlds, or they may be assigned to the ranks of the sleeping survivors who will be repersonalized en masse at the end of the current planetary dispensation.
There are two difficulties that hamper my efforts to explain just what happens to you in death, the surviving you which is distinct from the departing Adjuster. One of these consists in the impossibility of conveying to your level of comprehension an adequate description of a transaction on the borderland of the physical and morontia realms. The other is brought about by the restrictions placed upon my commission as a revelator of truth by the celestial governing authorities of Urantia. There are many interesting details which might be presented, but I withhold them upon the advice of your immediate planetary supervisors. But within the limits of my permission I can say this much:
There is something real, something of human evolution, something additional to the Mystery Monitor, which survives death. This newly appearing entity is the soul, and it survives the death of both your physical body and your material mind. This entity is the conjoint child of the combined life and efforts of the human you in liaison with the divine you, the Adjuster. This child of human and divine parentage constitutes the surviving element of terrestrial origin; it is the morontia self, the immortal soul.
This child of persisting meaning and surviving value is wholly unconscious during the period of death to repersonalization and is in the keeping of the seraphic destiny guardian throughout this season of waiting. You will not function as a conscious being, following death, until you attain the new consciousness of morontia on the mansion worlds of Satania.
During the transit of surviving mortals from the world of origin to the mansion worlds, whether they experience personality reassembly on the third period or ascend at the time of a group resurrection, the record of personality constitution is faithfully preserved by the archangels on their worlds of special activities. These beings are not the custodians of personality (as the guardian seraphim are of the soul), but it is nonetheless true that every identifiable factor of personality is effectually safeguarded in the custody of these dependable trustees of mortal survival. As to the exact whereabouts of mortal personality during the time intervening between death and survival, we do not know.
The situation which makes repersonalization possible is brought about in the resurrection halls of the morontia receiving planets of a local universe. Here in these life-assembly chambers the supervising authorities provide that relationship of universe energy – morontial, mindal, and spiritual – which makes possible the reconsciousizing of the sleeping survivor. The reassembly of the constituent parts of a onetime material personality involves:
1. The fabrication of a suitable form, a morontia energy pattern, in which the new survivor can make contact with nonspiritual reality, and within which the morontia variant of the cosmic mind can be encircuited.
2. The return of the Adjuster to the waiting morontia creature. The Adjuster is the eternal custodian of your ascending identity; your Monitor is the absolute assurance that you yourself and not another will occupy the morontia form created for your personality awakening. And the Adjuster will be present at your personality reassembly to take up once more the role of Paradise guide to your surviving self.
3. When these prerequisites of repersonalization have been assembled, the seraphic custodian of the potentialities of the slumbering immortal soul, with the assistance of numerous cosmic personalities, bestows this morontia entity upon and in the awaiting morontia mind-body form while committing this evolutionary child of the Supreme to eternal association with the waiting Adjuster. And this completes the repersonalization, reassembly of memory, insight, and consciousness – identity.
And when you thus awaken on the mansion worlds of Jerusem, you will be so changed, the spiritual transformation will be so great that, were it not for your Thought Adjuster and the destiny guardian, who so fully connect up your new life in the new worlds with your old life in the first world, you would at first have difficulty in connecting the new morontia consciousness with the reviving memory of your previous identity. Notwithstanding the continuity of personal selfhood, more of the mortal life would at first seem to be a vague and hazy dream. But time will clarify many mortal associations.
The Thought Adjuster will recall and rehearse for you only those memories and experiences which are a part of, and essential to, your universe career. If the Adjuster has been a partner in the evolution of aught in the human mind, then will these worth-while experiences survive in the eternal counsciousness of the Adjuster. But much of your past life and its memories, having neither spiritual meaning nor morontia value, will perish with the material brain; much of the material experience will pass away as onetime scaffolding which, having bridged you over to the morontia level, no longer serves a purpose in the universe. But personality and the relationships between personalities are never scaffolding; mortal memory of personality relationships has cosmic value and will persist. On the mansion worlds, you will know and be known, and more, you will remember and be remembered by, your onetime associates in the short but intriguing life on Urantia.
The mistakes of mortal mind and the errors of human conduct may markedly delay the evolution of the soul, although they cannot inhibit such a morontia phenomenon when once it has been initiated by the indwelling Adjuster with the consent of the creature will. But at any time prior to mortal death this same material and human will is empowered to rescind such a choice and to reject survival. Even after survival the ascending mortal still retains this prerogative of choosing to reject eternal life; at any time before fusion with the Adjuster the evolving and ascending creature can choose to forsake the will of the Paradise Father. Fusion with the Adjuster signalizes the fact that the ascending mortal has eternally and unreservedly chosen to do the Father’s will.
The human personality can truly destroy individuality of creaturehood, and though all that was worthwhile in the life of such a cosmic suicide will persist, these qualities will not persist as an individual creature. The Supreme will again find expression in the creatures of the universes but never again as that particular person; the unique personality of a non-ascender returns to the Supreme as a drop of water returns to the sea.
Such fused beings are twofold in their universe reactions: They are discrete morontia individuals not altogether unlike seraphim, and they are also beings in potential on the order of the Paradise finaliters.
On the mansion worlds, the resurrected mortal survivors resume their lives just where they left off when overtaken by death. When you go from Urantia to the first mansion world, you will notice considerable change, but if you had come from a more normal and progressive sphere of time, you would hardly notice the difference except for the fact that you were in possession of a different body; the tabernacle of flesh and blood has been left behind on the world of nativity.
Though you have morontia bodies, you continue, through all seven of these (morontia) worlds, to eat, drink, and rest. You partake of the morontia order of food, a kingdom of living energy unknown on the material worlds. Both food and water are fully utilized in the morontia body; there is no residual waste. Pause to consider: Mansionia number one is a very material sphere, presenting the early beginnings of the morontia regime. You are still a near human and not far removed from the limited viewpoints of mortal life, but each (morontia) world discloses definite progress. From (morontia) sphere to sphere you grow less material, more intellectual, and slightly more spiritual. The spiritual progress is greatest on the last three of these seven progressive worlds.
The present known destiny of surviving mortals is the Paradise Corps of the Finality; this is also the goal of destiny for all Thought Adjusters who become joined in eternal union with their mortal companions. At present the Paradise finaliters are working throughout the grand universe in many undertakings, but we all conjecture that they will have other and even more supernal tasks to perform in the distant future after the seven superuniverses have become settled in light and life, and when the finite God has finally emerged from the mystery which now surrounds this Supreme Deity.
You have been instructed to a certain extent about the organization and personnel of the central universe, the superuniverses, and the local universes; you have been told something about the character and origin of some of the various personalities who now rule these far-flung creations. You have also been informed that there are in process of organization vast galaxies of universes far out beyond the periphery of the grand universe, in the first outer space level. It has also been intimated in the course of these narratives that the Supreme Being is to disclose his unrevealed tertiary function in these now uncharted regions of outer space; and you have also been told that the finaliters of the Paradise corps are the experiential children of the Supreme.
We believe that the mortals of Adjuster fusion, together with their finaliter associates, are destined to function in some manner in the administration of the universes of the first outer space level. We have not the slightest doubt that in due time these enormous galaxies will become inhabited universes. And we are equally convinced that among the administrators thereof will be found the Paradise finaliters whose natures are the cosmic consequence of the blending of creature and Creator.
What an adventure! What a romance! A gigantic creation to be administered by the children of the Supreme, these personalized and humanized Adjusters, these Adjusterized and eternalized mortals, these mysterious combinations and eternal associations of the highest known manifestation of the essence of the First Source and Center and the lowest form of intelligent life capable of comprehending and attaining the Universal father. We conceive that such amalgamated beings, such partnerships of Creator and creature, will become superb rulers, matchless administrators, and understanding and sympathetic directors of any and all forms of intelligent life which may come into existence throughout these future universes of the first outer space level.
I have to say that there are some things about the Urantia Book that make me a bit uneasy about its content. First, there is the use of biblical-like names in the Book, names like Satania, Lucifer, Edentia, Jerusem, Havona, Seraphim, Ancient of Days, Melchizedeks, Salvington, Divinington, and Isle of Paradise. The use of these biblical-like names seems strange to me given the fact that the Urantia Book is not associated with the Bible of Christian religion. Another thing that disturbs me is the vast, vast numbers and levels of bureaucratic beings that are involved in the organization of the structure of the Urantia Book reality. It unfortunately seems that bureaucracy is inherent to the functioning of both physical and non-physical realms.
But perhaps the major conceptual difficulty I have with the Urantia Book is associated with the concept of the “I”. My spiritual intuition tells me that my “I” is essentially a differentiated “little bit” of the essence of God and that my “I” constitutes my immortal soul that is associated with my physical body and personality ego in this lifetime. It tells me that my “I” is both a “little bit” of God as well as the entirety of God, simultaneously. A physical analogy for this would be a wave in the ocean. The wave appears to be a differentiated unit from the ocean, but it is also the entire ocean itself at the same time. My “I” is a differentiated consciousness unit that is also connected to Universal Consciousness, which is my concept of God.
But there is also a larger “I” that is associated with my present “I” soul in this current physical lifetime. This “I” is my higher spiritual self. My “I” soul and my current physical ego personality are only a small portion of my higher spiritual “I” self, most of which always resides in the non-physical realm. My “I” higher self is a larger “bit” of Universal Consciousness. At death of the physical body, my “I” soul returns to the higher “I” self. My higher spiritual self strives for spiritual growth so that it can eventually be re-absorbed completely into Universal Consciousness. Such spiritual growth involves both experiencing many physical lifetimes via the mechanism of physical reincarnation of the “I”, followed by the “I” experiencing increasing higher levels in the non-physical realms once physical reincarnations are no longer necessary.
However, the Urantia Book speaks of the immortal Thought Adjuster, which is said to be without personality and without any “I-ness”. There is no “My” associated with the Thought Adjuster, until it conjoins itself with a personality. According to the Urantia Book, existence of a personality begins with birth into a physical life. Sometime after birth, the human personality forms by the conjoining of the physical mind/body with infusion of the Thought Adjuster. The human personality then develops as a result of the experiences and interactions it has during the lifetime and the free will choices that it makes in association with these experiences and interactions. Through a single lifetime on Earth, the conjoined physical mind/body and infused Thought Adjuster act in concert to develop a human personality, which the Urantia Book calls the non-physical “soul”.
At physical death, the personality soul and the Thought Adjuster are separated from each other, and a bureaucratic decision is made as to whether or not the personality soul that was developed in that lifetime is worthy of continued non-physical existence. If the personality soul is judged worthy of continued existence, it is re-united with its Thought Adjuster and the two then form an immortal personalized spirit which can continue up the various levels of non-physical growth and development. It is this joining by which a Thought Adjuster becomes personalized.
If the personality soul is not judged worthy of continued existence, it is not re-united with the Thought Adjuster and does not undergo any further development, although information about it is retained in the cosmic “database”. If this happens, the Thought Adjuster is what reincarnates into physical form again, for the development of a completely new personality soul that hopefully will be judged worthy of soul survival after physical death.
So the Urantia Book says that reincarnation of a non-physical soul into the physical realm does not occur. It says that there is no soul that undergoes increasing levels of spiritual growth through many physical reincarnations. It says the only thing that reincarnates is the non-personal Thought Adjuster which is already a little bit of the essence of God, and is perfect and has no need for spiritual growth. It says that the soul is formed in the first physical incarnation and upon physical death can only continue its existence and spiritual growth only if the personality associated with that soul is deemed worthy of continued non-physical survival so that it can fuse with its Thought Adjuster.
My spiritual intuition has a problem with this because it tells me that physical reincarnation of the soul for its spiritual development is a reality. Of course, there is also the possibility that my spiritual intuition in this current physical lifetime is incorrect. Whether or not the Urantia Book is correct about this is something that will reveal itself upon my physical death.
Pleiadian Interactions with Billy Meier:
Beginning in January 1975, Billy Meier had regular contacts and extensive discussions with a Pleiadian woman by the name of Semjase. Semjase appeared to Meier as an attractive Nordic-looking woman in her early 30s. She spoke to Meier in perfect German. Given below is their conversation upon first meeting, as remembered by Billy Meier and recorded in the book “Message From the Pleiades: The Contact Notes of Billy Meier” by Wendelle Stevens.
Billy Meier recorded very extensive contact notes about his many conversations with Semjase. He found that his word-for-word conversations with Semjase were coming into his mind just as if they had been recorded on a tape recorder. He later discovered that these conversations were indeed being recorded by the Pleiadians and then being played back into his mind from a computer-like device on their spacecraft. He could then write down (and later type down on a typewriter) a perfect record of his interactions with Semjase.
Semjase told Meier that in Earth years, she was 330 years old, although she physically appeared to be only about 32 years old. She said the average lifetime of Pleiadians was 1000 years.
Semjase then told Meier about the nature of her mission in contacting him:
Semjase:
You are a fearless human being.
Billy:
I have unlearned the anxiety and have become objective.
Semjase:
I know, as we have been studying you for years.
Billy:
Very nice, and why?
Semjase:
Because we would like to clarify some things through you.
Billy:
Isn’t someone else suitable for that?
Semjase:
Certainly, but we have kept an eye on you, because you have been preoccupied with these problems in other personalities for many thousands of years, and because you think and act in a real and honest way, and because you have already often carried out such a mission in your former lives, even though great mysteries surround this for us.
Billy:
Thanks for the “flowers”.
Semjase:
No need to, because they are your own merit.
Billy:
Fine, but who are you, really?
Semjase:
You can just call me you, like I do too.
Billy:
Thanks – but now, who are you?
Semjase:
I am called Semjase and I come from the Pleiades.
Already for a long time we have felt the urge to get in touch with a human being on the Earth who wants to be helpful in honesty and very real to our task. This attempt has already been made very often, but the chosen human beings were not knowing and willing enough, and there was often also a lack of honesty and loyalty. Those whom we could have engaged in our efforts, however, were afraid and remained silent about our appearance. They claimed that they would be insulted for spirit-illness and that attempts would be made through official and foolish human intrigues to destroy them and accuse them of lying.
Instead, however, very many human beings seeking renown appeared, who claimed to have contact with us and even to have flown in our beamships. But they are nothing other than charlatans and deceivers, who want to bask in dubious glory and capitalise on it. The Earth-humans have entire organisations that deal with reconnaissance of our beamships, but among them all, there is only very little material that is really genuine. They are in possession of very many photos, which, however, depict nothing more than some lights and light phenomena of natural origin or quite deliberate counterfeits. Only very few of these photographic proofs are genuine and really show our beamships. Most of the photos are just montages or forged recordings made by deceivers and charlatans, whose names thereby became known worldwide. Their books and their writings written in this way represent also only an evil fraud for the purpose of seeking renown or charlatanry.
On the other hand, however, many dare to associate us with the human religion, with which we have nothing to do and also never want anything to do. Your so-called sectarians do not even shy away from this step and are themselves deceiving their fellow human beings with the belief. These infamous and tentatively primitive machinations should be stopped before the world is completely gripped by them. If the deceivers and charlatans were actually linked to us and, thus, were standing or have stood in contact with us, then we would have given them the opportunity to create very clear photo evidence of our beamships. But since they are dishonest human beings, we have not given them this opportunity.
As proof for this fact, we gave you the opportunity to take clear pictures of one of our beamships. But we will also continue to give you such opportunities to create even better and clearer picture evidence. The Earth-human calls us "extraterrestrials" or "star people" or whatever he/she likes. He/she imputes supernaturality to us and does not know us in the least. In reality, we are human beings just like the Earth-humans, except that our knowledge and our essence of wisdom are far superior to theirs, so also from a technological point of view.
It is true that the Earth-human has taken the first very small step towards outer space flight, but that means nothing more than the first rather primitive attempts.
Even though he/she has reached the moon with rockets, he/she still hasn't reached the outer space yet. He/she would also never reach it in the present form; what is needed for this is a propulsion system capable of penetrating hyperspace and causing the unending distances to collapse. Space and time are not overcome by space and time, but by the spaceless and the timeless, which means that space and time collapse in themselves and become equally directed to null time. As a result, a few fractions of a second can suffice to rush through millions of light years, practically without a loss of time, because null time paralyzes space and time.
Many deceivers and charlatans claim that they would be in contact with planetary human beings of your solar system and that they have even flown with or in their beamships. That is nothing more than a lie, as for the most part, the stars mentioned by them and their planets are so inhospitable that human life would be impossible.
Other planets, on the other hand, have long since died out of life, or they are only in the developmental stages. Other solar systems, however, harbour a variety of lives, not just human ones. The forms of life are diverse – human as well as animal. Also, many animal or even plant life forms have developed to highly advanced level of life. So there are species who have attained great knowledge and have freed themselves from their spheres of life, who travel outer space and also come to your Earth every now and then.
Many of them, however, are unpleasant contemporaries and live in a certain barbarism, which is often almost as bad as that of the Earth-human. One must watch out for them because they often combat and destroy everything that gets in their way. Already often they have destroyed entire planets or forced their inhabitants into barbaric slavery. This is one of our tasks: To warn the Earth-human about these creatures.
Another task is aimed at the sects and religions and the underdevelopment of human consciousness associated with these. Above all there is only one thing that possesses the power over life and death of every creature. This is the Creation alone, who has laid out her laws over everything – laws that are irrefutable and that have eternal validity. The human being can recognise them in nature, if he/she strives for it. They show him/her the path of life and the path to the spiritual and consciousness-based greatness, which represent the life-determination. But as the human being indulges in his/her religions, and thus in evil irrational teachings, his/her consciousness atrophies more and more and leads ultimately to a bottomless abyss. The human being may realise that a god can never assume the role of the Creation or determine the destiny of the human being. A god is only a ruler and moreover a human being, who mightily exercises rule or tyranny over his fellow human beings. God is not the Creation, but only a creature of her, like all creatures dependent on the Creation. However, the human being chases after his/her religious irrational belief and claims that God is the Creation herself.
Semjase says that she is on a two-fold mission. The first is to make humans aware that they are part of a vast universe of life that exists in many forms. The vast distances between the stars are traversed by ships that operate through hyperspace, which she says is non-space and non-time. Vast distances can be traversed in minute amounts of time. Semjase warns about extraterrestrials who are not friendly and might seek to subjugate Earth humans.
The second part of her mission is to reveal to human beings the true nature of spirituality. Semjase says that God is really Creation, and that all the present human religions are incorrect in their views about God. Interestingly, she refers to Creation using the feminine “she”. Furthermore, Semjase specifically says that Jesus Christ was a highly spiritual Earth human, but not the Son of God as Christianity believes.
Semjase conveyed information about Earth and human history to Meier. She said that there was indeed a “great flood”, which happened about 10,000 years ago. The source of this worldwide calamity was the close passage of a giant comet, which she called the Destroyer. The comet came very close to the Earth and actually altered its orientation and rotational rate. It altered the orbit of Earth and changed its orientation and rotational period from 40 hours to the present 24 hours. Because of this, there were tremendous cataclysms, such as earthquakes, volcano eruptions, and gigantic tsunamis which constituted the “great flood”. Semjase said that this Destroyer comet periodically encounters the Earth and has a period of 575 years. It was last here in 1680 and will appear again in the year 2255. The last major effects encounter was 3500 years ago, but these effects were not as catastrophic as those 10,000 years ago.
Semjase also had some interesting things to say about the planet Venus. She said that Venus was originally located a vast distance from the Sun, but was caught up in the gravitational field of the Destroyer comet, causing it to be repositioned between Mercury and the Earth.
Semjase stated that 50,000 years ago, a group of 70,000 advanced human beings from another solar system in the universe migrated to Earth. She said that these advanced humans procreated the primal human races of the Earth, and that we Earth humans are their descendants. This is apparently the reason that Semjase and the Pleiadians look so similar to we humans.
Semjase provided insights into the developmental life of a human consciousness, which involved both physical and non-physical existences over truly vast periods of time:
1. Primary life:
1) Primary development of the intellect and the consciousness.
2) Primary intellectual and consciousness-based thinking.
3) Primary intellect-based thinking.
4) Primary use of intellect and consciousness-power.
5) Primary intellectual actions.
6) Primary willful thinking and acting.
7) Intellectual conduct of the life.
Life forms in these stages are designated by already rationality-endowed beings as mentally ill (ill in consciousness), as idiots etc., whose consciousness and intellect, however, are in reality simply not yet developed in knowledge-based terms (new spirit, who has to first form itself through learning and experience etc.).
2. Rationality-based life:
1) Primary development of rationality.
2) Effective realisation of the rationality and its use.
3) Primary recognition and acknowledgement of higher influences.
4) Belief in higher influences without having knowledge.
5) Belief in higher powers, deluded belief, fear of evil, veneration of what is good, etc. and so on. Germination time for religions etc.
Present stage of the average Earth-human.
6) Primary recognition of the real reality. Stage of knowledge-based development. Research, first spiritual cognitions and their use: "spiritual healing”, telepathy, etc. etc.
7) Primary development of knowledge and essence of wisdom.
3. Intellect-based life:
1) High-level development of the intellect. High technology, second use of spiritual power with first cognitions. Primary procreation of life forms. Present stage of the educated Earth-human = scientists, etc.
2) Realisation and use of knowledge, truth and essence of wisdom. Slow reduction of belief-assumptions.
3) First utilisation of knowledge and essence of wisdom.
4) Recognition and utilisation of the laws of nature. Creation of hyper technology. Second procreation of life forms.
5) Natural use of knowledge and essence of wisdom in recognition of spiritual powers. Further reduction of belief-assumptions.
6) Life in the knowledge of the essence of wisdom, truth and the logic.
Present stage of some few borderline and humanities scholars
7) Primary recognition of the reality as real Absolutum.
4. Real life:
1) Clear knowledge about the reality as real Absolutum.
2) Recognition of the spiritual knowledge and the spiritual essence of wisdom.
3) Utilisation of the spiritual knowledge and the spiritual essence of wisdom.
4) Recognition of the reality of the Creation and her laws.
5) Life according to the creational laws. Clarification of the spirit and the intellect. Recognition of the real task and power of the spirit. Total reduction of all belief-assumptions.
6) Deliberate and directed utilisation of spiritual and consciousness-based powers.
7) Procreation of first viable life forms.
5. Creational life:
1) Procreation and direction of life forms.
2) Creation of machine/apparatus-based viable life forms.
3) Development of spiritual and consciousness-based power for the control of material and organic life forms. Present stages of our races.
4) Willful control of the life and all its forms and species.
5) Stage of recognitions. Recollections of past lives, etc.
6) Essence of wisdom kingship = JHWH. The second to last highest might-knowledge.
7) Recognition of the spiritual peace, the universal love, and the creational harmony.
6. Spiritual life:
1) Acknowledgment and realisation of the spiritual peace, the universal love and the creational harmony.
2) Life in purely spiritual forms.
3) Spiritual creations.
4) Disembodiment of the spirit from organic bodies.
5) First spiritual existence.
6) Final spiritual existence.
7) Transition into the Creation.
7. Creation-life:
1) Twilight sleep over seven periods (eternities).
2) Awakening and beginning of creating in the Creation as Creation, during seven periods/eternities.
3) Creating of life forms.
4) Creating of new spirit in the relative absolute fulfilment of the Creation.
5) Creation of spiritual greatness in the Creation.
6) Relative absolute fulfilment of the Creation in the Creation.
7) Last attaining of highest absolutely full development of the seventh period/eternity.
The twilight sleep of the Creation outlasts 7 periods/eternities/great times (311,040,000,000,000 years amount to one period/eternity/great time). By the twilight sleep of the Creation, all life and the entire universe cease to exist. Only after her newly awakening does she begin to create everything anew. During her twilight sleep there is neither space nor time; there is only the nothing, since they lie asleep in the unending womb of the Creation and the null time. If there is no creating thought, then there is also no power, no time, and no space; there is only duration in the nameless nothing.
The description that Semjase provided about the seven stages of human development are interesting. The first stage, Primary life, would represent the cave man type of prehistory level. She indicates that the present stage of the average Earth human is the second, Rationality-based life. Current advanced human thinkers are said to be at the Intellect-based life level. The next Real life level is one that Earth humans are on the verge of attaining. The Creational life is the level the Pleiadians are presently at. One should note that this level seems to be associated with the creation of life forms, both biological and android-type. Semjase said that the Pleiadians have not yet attained the next two higher levels, Spiritual life and Creation life levels, which are associated with non-physical forms of existence. She said that the Pleiadians have only limited knowledge of these types of existence.
At the end of the highest Creation level, Semjase indicated that Creation goes into a “sleep” mode that lasts approximately seven times 311,000,000,000,000 years. During this sleep period, the universe and all life ceases to exist, and there is only the Nothing. Interestingly, in the Hindu religion, there is the “sleep of Brahma”, which is also said to last 311 trillion years. Scholars have always been puzzled as to how such a large number came to be in the Hindu theology. After the sleep, Creation awakes and a new universe with new life is created.
Billy Meier asked Semjase to explain to him the “world of spirits”. Here is Semjase’s description:
A "world of spirits," as you called it, does not exist. There are only the fine-fluidal worlds in this regard. These are worlds that are located in other dimensions and harbour bodiless spirit forms.
When a spirit leaves a material body, then it cannot simply settle down anywhere; it must inhabit a body again, i.e. it enters a fine-fluidal world, thus a world of spirit forms, of which there are countless ones. There, the spirit lives as its own form for so long, until it returns again into a newly created host body. This means that every spirit form normally has a residence (body) that is specially tailored to it, in which it lives through its life in material form.
Over an entire main period one can thus observe that the facial features of the host body are not always alike and that they therefore change very noticeably. This applies until a high spiritual level is reached. Not with very low, but with very high spiritual levels the faces of all host bodies of the various spirit beings begin to resemble each other.
So when a guest body has died then the spirit leaves it and normally enters a fine-fluidal world. There too it has to live through certain periods again, before it can call upon a host body anew. But if a host body is due to some circumstances destroyed with Gewaltsamkeit and prematurely, before it is brought to life by the spirit on the 21st day, then it can happen that the spirit in question does not as soon as possible look for another host body and inhabits it, but that it remains in the realm of the other world. So it won't then penetrate into bodies that are already occupied. Therefore, this won't have as a consequence that two spirits live in a single host body and cause serious confusion. There are thus no possibilities for that. So the normal process is that the spirit re-enters the fine-fluidal world and in turn while learning spends another period there.
The overall consciousness-blocks, which enter fine-fluidal worlds like the spirit forms themselves, are no further along in their knowledge than they were in their material life. Untruth and lies and very deliberate deception are still characteristic of them as well. Therefore the materially living ones should not want to get in touch with them, because they could be lied to on a large scale. It would be better for the living ones to increase their knowledge through their own consciousness-work than to aim to acquire it in this way, because in many cases they would only be led into the unreal. Of course, there are also overall consciousness-blocks that would be able to respond in an honest mentality. However, there are few of them, and they live in higher spheres because they are further developed consciousness-wise.
Semjase described the spirit world as being the “fine-fluidal” world. This world is composed of energy and not matter, as our three-dimensional world is. Matter is essentially compressed energy, which she terms as coarse material. She said there are many of these fine-fluidal worlds and they exist in dimensions other than our current three-dimensional state. Interestingly, she indicated that the process of entering the fine-fluidal world upon death does not make the spirit increase in its spiritual development at the time that it died. Spiritual growth requires continuous cycles of learning and experience.
Semjase explained to Meier in general terms how energy and matter were created by The Creation:
The principle is very simple; however, I'm not allowed to tell it. However, it is a fact that any energy can be converted into solid forms. It is only necessary to highly focus and highly concentrate the respective energy, whereby it can be converted into solid material. In this way the elementary building blocks of the solid substance of the material are created; neutron, proton and electron. From these, the atoms and the variety of the chemical compounds form, which then in their three (3) different states of aggregation form the solid external casing, which is nevertheless known to your scientists.
Solid material as well as ur-kind of energy are in every respect of equal value. That is to say that ur-kind of energy is absolute material, just as ur-kind of material is absolute energy. That means that without exception anything in the universe consists of material or energy. The two terms, energy and material, represent fundamentally one and the same, but they specify their two different forms: the coarse-substantial and the fine-fluidal. Coarse-substantial means material; fine-fluidal means energy.
Material is the embodiment of an idea. As energy, material is fine-fluidal, and as mass, it is just highly concentrated and condensed. Both types can be produced by apparatus, which you too are already practicing in various forms. Normally, however, they are produced completely naturally, namely through spiritual power, which is preceded by the idea. Fundamentally, the Creation is responsible for this; a tremendous spiritual form, a factor that, in turn, embodies ur-kind of energy. It is from the Creation that the idea arises. The power of the spirit (which, in turn, embodies energy) then condenses and concentrates the idea into fine-fluidal energy, which is then condensed by even greater concentration into the coarse-substantial, into the material.
Meier asked Semjase what the vast spiritual formation of The Creation was. She replied that it consists of Idea, condensed in Itself towards Itself to originate spiritual energy. She said that the Pleiadians do not know much more than this.
Semjase gave Meier a further description of the prehistory of Earth humans:
At our fifth contact I finished the history of humankind at the time when 50,000 years ago according to the earthly calendar our homeworlds found freedom and peace. Before that time, 70,000 human beings fled under the leadership of the scientist Pelegon. With spaceships, which they had seized, they fled through the space out of another configuration of space and time into the one of the Milky Way of the DERN universe and settled on the Earth.
Pelegon's leadership, there were 200 sub-leaders; scientists who were each responsible for a specific field of knowledge. Pelegon was unanimously recognized and respected by them and all others as king of essence of wisdom (JHWH / God). In the course of the millennia they built large cities and inhabited all continents of the Earth. Unfortunately, this only went well for barely 10,000 years before lust for might regained the upper hand and a deadly war raged over the world. Everything without residue was destroyed, and only a few thousand human beings were able to survive, while others fled again into the outer space and into the old space-time configuration and settled on distant worlds.
For the next 7,000 years the Earth was no longer flown to, during which time those who stayed behind became completely wild and degenerated. After that the descendants of those who had settled on distant worlds returned. Again they were led by to YHWH. Under such a kind of JHWH command, the distant descendants later built Atlantis and Mu. Two huge cities on two different continents.
For thousands of years, they lived in complete friendship and in peace, until some scientists again succumbed to the greed for might and wanted to seize the rule. However, having become tired of the constant wars, the peoples rose against them, hence they seized spacecrafts and fled into the outer space; according to earthly calendar about 15,000 years ago.
For two millennia they and their descendants lived in a neighboring solar system. Two millennia during which they had become very evil and were only able to uphold a certain regulation under the strictest discipline. Through mutations and researches they achieved a very long life span, which to more than three thousand years.
Obsessed with imperiousness, they left their world about 13,500 Earth-years ago and came back to the Earth. Their supreme leader was the scientist ARUS, who was also called "The Barbarian." As already JHWH Pelegon nearly 50,000 years ago, he also had 200 leaders or subleaders, who were each responsible for a specific field of knowledge. They settled in two parts in the far north and in today's America (Florida), whereby they constantly forged ahead to Atlantis and Mu, in order to invade them with war. And only a few millennia after their renewed requisitioning of the Earth, they succeeded in completely destroying Mu and Atlantis.
Few survivors went into servitude, while great scientists were able to flee and returned to the original homeworlds in the Pleiades. But thousands of years before that point in time, the new intruders spread across the Earth, and JHWH ARUS ruled with a firm and bloody hand. But also his subleaders usurped all kinds of things and made themselves more and more independent. Within only three decades, they acted largely at their own discretion, even though they feared the punishments of the JHWH ARUS. They pushed very far away from them the codex of preserving their own race pure under all circumstances and not allowing it to fall prey to mutations.
Forbidden and secretly, they went out and captured earth-created life-forms; but so also turned wild or mutated beings, which were very distant descendants of former human beings from the outer space. The female creatures, beautiful in their wildness, were tamed and copulated with or fertilized with genetic manipulation by the leaders who called themselves celestial sons. Case by case depending on their own races, they thus created mutated creatures; Completely new life forms that were of dwarfish stature, very gigantic or similar to animal forms.
Semjasa, the supreme leader of all subleaders, copulated with an EVA; a female creature who, according to his understanding, was still preserved as the most human-like and also quite beautiful one. The descendant of this act was of male gender and a human being in good form. Semjasa called him Adam, which is tantamount to HUMAN BEING OF EARTH.
Another copulation of the same kind brought forth a female creature, and in later years Semjasa determined that these two Adams had to mate together. In the meantime, however, many other creatures of the same kind were conceived, who banded together into large groups and tribes. From them today's humankind developed, which was already at its ur-beginning according to its races distributed to the most different continents.
According to Semjase, 50,000 years ago 70,000 Pleiadians fled from their home world in the Pleiades and settled on Earth. They built large cities and occupied all areas of the Earth. But unfortunately, there was a world war amongst the groups of these Pleiadians that took place 40,000 years ago, and all of them were destroyed except for a few thousand of the Pleiadian human beings. During the next 7000 years, these survivors descended into a barbaric state, and probably became cave-type men. But then, new settlers from the Pleiades arrived on Earth. These new settled built the civilizations of Atlantis and Mu.
About 15,000 years ago, a splinter group the Pleiadians left the Earth and settled in a neighboring solar system. This group then returned to the Earth 13,500 years ago, and went to war with Atlantis and Mu, subsequently destroying these civilizations. These new Pleiadians began copulating with some of the barbaric Earth females, and produced giant-type species. However, the leader of these Pleiadians copulated with a beautiful Earth female, and produced Adam and Eve. Adam and Eve’s descendants populated the Earth as the current homo sapiens, while the other gigantic species died out.
One intriguing thing in this account of Semjase’s is that it bears a certain resemblance to the account in the Book of Enoch about the “Sons of God” coming to Earth and having children with the “daughters of men”.
Now, Semjase instructed Meier about the spiritual development of Earth humans. This represents the essence of her spiritual teaching (Tenth Contact, “Message From the Pleiades”):
It is now time to speak about things that are very important in the sense of the development of the consciousness and of the spirit of the human being of Earth.
The human being is bearer of a spirit that does not die and that, even in deepest sleep of the human being, never sleeps, that records all thoughts and impulsations, that tells the human being whether his/her thoughts are right or wrong, if he/she has learned to pay attention to it. This spirit within the human being is the bearer of the creational realm, and it is characteristic of all human beings.
It is incomprehensible that the human being speaks of a heaven and of a kingdom of heaven in him- or herself and does not simply content with just saying: Creation, truth, knowledge, essence of wisdom, spirit, consciousness and existence. The human yearning lies in the joy that remains, in the immortal life, the lasting peace, the spiritual and consciousness-based richness that never passes and lasts eternally. Firmaments and Earth will pass away, but truth, knowledge, essence of wisdom and spirit will never be variable or pass away.
In the dream the human being is able to create worlds of miracles, just as the Creation consciously creates the worlds. For the human being this ability grows out of his/her consciousness, which in the existence is present in him/her, in the same way as all miracles are present in him/her. He/she himself/herself is the kingdom of heaven, the kingdom of the creational. That is why the ancient philosophers of the Earth spoke of the human being as the microcosm in the macrocosm, because everything that is contained in the universe is also present in the human being.
The dimensions of the inner within the human being are endless. The image of the Creation, the spirit in him/her, the existence that is dimensionless, it includes all dimensions in it and at the same time transcends all dimensions. Hence everything comes from within.
The human being may be externally old, but this is only a transitional matter. Fifty years ago he/she was not old yet and will also no longer be old in fifty years when his/her body is dead, because only it can become old and frail. The spirit, however, remains eternally young and is never subject to signs of aging. The age is something like the youth or the childhood, like worries, grief or problems, something that passes, in the same way as all external conditions and experiences of the world pass.
What is lasting is the existence of the spirit, the truth, the knowledge, the essence of wisdom, the reality. If the human being recognises the existence of his or her spirit, then the old age can no longer inflict anything on him/her. No worries, no grief, no problem, no changes and no vicissitudes of the life and the surroundings, the environment and the world will still be able to cast him into sorrow.
Essence of wisdom is the characteristic of a human being who has recognised the existence of his or her spirit and of the material consciousness and who works with it based on the laws of the Creation. Essence of wisdom is consciousness-unfolding as well as use of consciousness-power and use of spiritual power. Essence of wisdom and spirit as well as consciousness and truth are each two things that constitute one, just as the sunlight and the Sun are two things. The sunlight only results from the warmth of the Sun, which it first has to generate through its processes.
But so, too, there is an all-creating existence in the universe, which existence creates, by virtue of own powers, powers, which, following certain creational laws, follow as truth, knowledge, and essence of wisdom the endless aeons constantly and unswervingly according to a given equal guideline, and give life. This powerful existence, however, is the Creation. And therefore there is only one existence which rules everywhere in the universe – only one Creation, only one truth, one knowledge, and one essence of wisdom, which are equally directed and remaining the same for eternal times. The eternal truth is not subject to any fluctuations or any changes, and its laws never have to be revised and, therefore, never have to be adapted to a new time.
It is a sign of human weakness when religions and sects and their irrational teachings are portrayed as instruments of the creational, and the essence of wisdom thereby becomes unreal. The human being is then looking elsewhere for power, freedom, joy and light, just not where they really are. A human being who is filled with love is also rich in essence of wisdom, and a human being who is rich in essence of wisdom is also full of love.
A human being is no real human being until s/he has recognized and created the truth, the knowledge and the essence of wisdom, even if s/he does not use the word Creation, since essence of wisdom is also love in best form. Thus, s/he always finds that enlightenment and recognition are knowledge and also essence of wisdom and love, and where there is love there is also essence of wisdom. Love and essence of wisdom belong together, because the Creation and the laws of Creation are love and essence of wisdom at the same time. Where there is essence of wisdom and knowledge, there is love and cognition, and where there is cognition and love, there is the Creation.
The path of the consciousness-power and the spiritual power goes beyond the cognition of the truth, the knowledge, the essence of wisdom and the love. Sense and task of the spiritual teaching therefore are to spread truth, knowledge, essence of wisdom and love. If the teaching fails to do so due to misuse or false interpretation, then it is no longer a help, but instead becomes an evil cult that enslaves the material consciousness through irrational teachings and creates unknowledgeness, as is the case with the irrational teachings of the sects and religions. But if it exercises the function of the consciousness-widening and the spiritual knowledge-widening, then it is a mightful instrument of the creational regulation. The spiritual teaching is about the spreading of the cognition, the truth, the knowledge, the essence of wisdom and the love, the eternal, the immortal, the everlasting that overcomes the death and spreads light, that manifests the equalisedness of the essence of wisdom and the love in itself, the peace that surpasses all understanding.
Every human being believes to know what is meant by peace, by the way s/he knows it according to human experience. But to understand the wise peace of the unending existence, of the spirit, of the immortal Creation, that quite simply surpasses his/her human understanding. This is because s/he is chained to religious irrational teachings and to human-material things which deprive him/her of an understanding according to inner experience. The experience, which forms the true key to the true cognition and essence of wisdom.
Miracles upon miracles are contained in the kingdom of the spirit. The visible universe, with which the human being is concerned, is but a small spot in this wonderful, unending, spiritual intelligence of the Creation. Universes like this one are contained in countless thousand millions in the unending spiritual intelligence of the Creation. What is visible to the physical eyes of the human being means only a small iota in the endlessness.
What is not visible to his/her eyes is unmeasurable, uncomprehensible, and unthinkable, confusing, and unimaginable to his/her unspiritual human intelligence and comprehension. All the universe, which s/he sees, is but one single space of many, which must be measured by myriads, because there are universes in universes, universes beyond universes, universes beneath universes, universes above universes, and universes outside the universes in this ur-mighty, tremendous, and all-creational spiritual intelligence of the existence Creation. And the human being is connected with this immense spirit, with these ur-kind powers of the existence, of the Creation, of the spiritual intelligence, because a part-piece of this spirit-intelligence of the Creation dwells as spirit in the human being and gives life to him/her.
The spiritual intelligence is enlightened by law-based spiritual principles and is directed toward the creational inner core nature, the absolutely full development, and the power of the creational itself. This is in contrast to the human intelligence, because the human material consciousness is generally concerned only with individual things of the material world. But this has the consequence that the human being is constrained and hindered in every direction, indeed even captured, oppressed, plagued, and tortured by all possible forms of mishappening, weaknesses, and enslavements of all kinds.
Hence, a self-analysis of the individual human being is one of the most essential methods for finding the truth and for going the way of the consciousness-based and spiritual evolution. Thus, it is necessary that the human being continuously checks his/her thoughts and sees what kind they really are. S/he has to make sure that s/he is ultimately always guided, led and destined by creational-philosophical principles and realities, by creational-natural laws. In the human being the constant conscious feeling should reign, that s/he belongs to the creational, with his/her actual spiritual breath, his/her actual spiritual BEING.
Consciousness-based it shall be clear to him/her that his/her actual spiritual BEING is inseparably one with the creational, so as to overcome the material outer world in this consciousness. May the human being therefore be a practical philosopher and mystic and perceive the reality in the changeable passing forms. After all, what is a human being? S/he is only a figure and a name. If one takes away the name and the figure, what is still left of him/her? There remains the fundamental essence, the existence – the spirit and the overall consciousness-block.
The human being, who truthfully lives in accordance with the spiritual laws of the Creation, sees and recognises the creational all around in every life-form, in everything, in every thought and action, in every human being, in all the activity of the nature and also in all imaginable circumstances and occurrences.
The spirit, the source of all unending creational upbuilding, is itself the innermost inner core nature of the human being. The human outer nature, however, is full of limitations, because it is not the inner core nature itself, but only its shell, its material body, a limitation, a matter leading into delusion, the source of hardship and pain, limited in cognition and will, in readiness to make sacrifices, in freedom, love and happiness. If the human being views his/her fellow human beings only externally, materially, then s/he sees nothing but the form and shape, the material of this particular human being. If, however, s/he sees the fellow human being with the consciousness-based and spiritual eyes of the cognition and knows that this all-witnessing consciousness in him/her is also present in all others, even if it is unrecognised by them, then the way in which s/he sees his/her fellow human being changes fundamentally.
S/he then no longer simply sees a man, a woman, a girl or a child, but sees the fellow human being as bearer of a creational spirit, which knows about itself, about its existence and wishes to reveal itself through everyone, if only the opportunity to do so would be offered to it. The one who knows the truth sees the fellow human being based on this knowledge and cognition, because s/he sees the creational in him/her.
So the human being should constantly be conscious of this creational, without which s/he would be unable to do any breath, to conceive any conscious thought, without which s/he would neither be able to recognise, see, hear nor experience. That is why the great wise ones of all times say: "The creational spirit is closer to the human being than the own breath."
It, the spirit, is able to live without the light of the physical eyes, just as it is able to live without hearing, arms, legs, and even without the outer intellect of the outer material consciousness. However, there is always still something present that enables it to continue living, namely its own creational power. This self-consciousness, this all-observing and all-registering spiritual consciousness in the human being, which looks at and considers his/her thoughts and impulsations and is behind all his/her thinking, which tells him/her whether s/he is knowing or unknowing, that is the creational, the spiritual consciousness. To ponder again and again that the spirit is all-mighty, ever-present, all-knowing, and beyond that, unending happiness, unending beauty, unending value, the value of all things altogether, lets the word Creation become the absolute significance for the human being and brings forth evolution-based developmental changes in him/her.
Each human being carries within him/herself the whole kingdom of the spirit, but it is covered over by the unused material consciousness and struck by unknowledgeness, erroneous assumptions, not absolutely full development, bad things, errors and limitations of all kinds, which must be transformed into the opposite through the recognition and acceptance of the truth. All these bad things must be dissolved and cleared up, by the human being consciously developing abilities, which are opposite to everything negatively perverted and lead to a neutral equalisation.
The path of the experience of the spirit is accelerated through the unfolding of the consciousness and the conscious searching as well as the gathering of knowledge of the truth, and this unfolding leads to the true and all-embracing, cosmic-wide essence of wisdom and love, due to the cognition that the Creation is present in everything. The human being is one with everything in the Creation, in the truth, essence of wisdom and love, in the kingdom of the spirit. S/he is to see him/herself everywhere in the space and in the times and in all things. S/he him/herself is to be everything and is to awaken the creational in everything and bring it in this way into recognition and experience. Because the Creation is in all and everything is animated by its spirit, wherethrough everything is one in all.
S/he will identify with all things and all life-forms of the world and the universes. A human being full of creational-spiritual essence of wisdom, full of knowledge, truth, love and cognition, who knows that everything came out of, comes out of and will for eternal times come out of the truth. Hence, s/he identifies with everything and everyone. In his/her consciousness-based being he/she will at the innermost level always be one with everything and everyone.
All unreal suggestions and human imaginations become corrected by the human being realising: "I am a part of the Creation, which animates me as a part-piece, as spirit." But the knowledge that all things are imaginations and illusions, except the creational-spiritual power, truth and reality, will by no means diminish the keenness which the human being unfolds in the life, but rather propel him/her to unexpected heights
Only that which is true, and which will remain truth, can be regarded as truth; something on which one can rely in eternal times and which is never and under no circumstances ever in need of revision. Truth never has to be adapted to another and a new time, because it is permanent for all times. It is eternally remaining the same and always sounds the same, even if it is spoken in other words. It is the rock upon which one can build in eternal times and in all spaces. The truth was before the life, and the truth is also after it. Creation and truth are always the same, today and tomorrow, they are always remaining the same and of eternally equal value. They do not change, neither by name nor by form, as the Creation and the truth are nameless and formless. The truth is that which is immortal, like the Creation as such, it is that which is eternal in time, that which is relatively absolutely fully developed, that which is worth all energies and the total investment of will by the human being, because with it the human being does not fall prey to any deception.
The creational is full of endless peace, full of endless cognition, and relatively most total absolutely full development. It is the source of all miracles of the highest spiritual consciousness, which is present all around – inside like outside.
The Creation-thinking human being does not consider the future to be the time to experience the Creation and his/her spirit dwelling in him/her, but rather the immediate present, wherethrough however s/he lives in the eyes of the normal human being, who is poor in consciousness, already in the most distant future – often completely misunderstood. For the true Creation-thinking human being, the time is not someday, but always in the immediate present. For him/her, it is not necessary to see physically to see the truth. S/he begins to search in him/herself, and the truth becomes ever more real to him/her, because for his/her material consciousness his/her spirit is after all the all-seeing presence. The great, the spiritual, is for him/her present in his/her innermost, because in the cognition of the truth the unending dwells in the finite.
And in every human being the unending has its seat, something that however only very few are able to recognise. Because awakening the unending requires rational logic and a state of being free of unreal teachings. But awakening the unending and letting it become effective is the culmination-point of the life – the relatively highest possible consciousness-based and spiritual relative absolute fulfilment. Those who are rich in the consciousness become the instrument by which the Creation expresses the spiritual realm. It is this excellence of the Creation that causes the firmament to arise. The ones who are rich in the consciousness are free of all boundaries of a restriction and of the material selfish ego-consciousness, and therefore in constant contact with the Creation as such.
With the human beings the difficulty of the material principle still prevails. However, in not too distant a time, the earthly science will discover the principle of the creational in the material This is because the Creation is included in everything created; in everything that unfolds and further develops itself. When essence of wisdom and truth dawn in in the human being and his/her consciousness-based as well as spiritual knowledge increases, when universal love leads him/her and his/her life becomes prosperousness for him/her and others, then the cognition of the truth has matured in him/her. Then s/he will become conscious of the part of the Creation in him/her, of the spirit – of the spiritual realm. The Creation is present in spiritual love and essence of wisdom. Whoever strives for spiritual light and spiritual love, will have the gate to the Creation to open to him/her.
The heart of Semjase’s spiritual teaching is that the essence of each human being is the inner spiritual, which is a “little bit” of The Creation. Everything is a part of The Creation, and we are One with All. Semjase says that there are almost an infinite number of universes within The Creation, both physical and non-physical. We on Earth are living in one of those universes. The great truths of The Creation are Wisdom and Love.
When a human being dies physically, it is only the physical body that dies. The essence of the spirit, being a little bit of The Creation, does not die. Rather, it proceeds onward towards spiritual development, which may involve other lifetimes in both the physical and non-physical universes.
Semjase’s spiritual teachings re-affirm the truth that “the Kingdom of God is within you”.
Semjase took Billy Meier on an interstellar trip to what she described as the “ancient home planet of our human races”. This planet is said by Semjase to be in the Lyra constellation called the Ring Nebula of Lyra. Semjase said that it would require a 30 hour trip to get there, including traveling in the hyperspace mode. She first transported Meier to a “great spacer” ship located a far distance from Planet Earth. This ship was in the form of a large sphere and according to Semjase embodied all the technologies know to the Pleiadians.
Semjase indicated that the Pleiadian technology was thousands of years ahead of Earth’s. There were also android-like beings on the great spacer ship. It was essentially a small planetoid, and she said it contained an inhabited city of 144,000 resident Pleiadians, as well as an unspecified number of androids. The great spacer had a diameter of approximately 2.2 kilometers. Semjase introduced Meier to the captain of the great spacer and said that he was her father. He said his name was Ptaah.
The great spacer had to be far from any star before jumping through hyperspace. On the first hyperspace jump, which seemed like it took only an instant of local “time”, Semjase said that they had traversed 500 light years and were in the vicinity of the Pleiades. Then a second instantaneous jump was taken that put the ship 1800 light years from Earth and in the vicinity of the Orion nebula.
Semjase told Meier that they were now going to make a very long hyperspace jump of about seven minutes. She reminded Meier that hyperspace is essentially a condition of no-time and no-space, so he would be able to experience “eternity”. Before the jump Semjase put a helmet on Meier’s head that would record his thoughts while he experienced hyperspace.
Here is Meier’s account of what he experienced during this very long hyperspace jump:
Ptaah and Semjase manipulate the apparatus, and now I can see again how the fantastic heavens and stars change. In a fraction of a second they are nothing more than a whitish milky mass, a shining mass, as I have already seen in other hyper-leaps. But now suddenly as well, this milky whitish shining is gone and there is darkness.
But now what is this? Suddenly all is merging into a golden color, and now everything is like silver. But – my dear – this glistening light, this beaming shining splendor! Everything is merged into glistening light – only the glistening light. It is stronger than all the suns of the Universe.
Dear, oh dear, this glistening light, and it does not hurt the eyes! Dear, this must be eternity, the glistening light of the eternal … but see, there is nothing besides the eternity; man alive, how marvelous! Marvelous? Man alive, that is itself marvelous. Eternity and marvelousness are one and the same.
Only why do I separate it? Why do I put the eternity into terms of time? Time does not exist, and the eternity is marvelous. Man, just what is this? This tranquility, this peace – what is it? How could I have achieved this? Love, oh that deep all encompassing love. Nothing is there, but LOVE: wonderful, marvelous. Oh yes, I am, but I am not. Everything is so deep, and full of love.
Of course, I am eternity, and I am inside of eternity. How could I ever forget this? Oh yes, I am a human being, how can I … why do I forget that? I am only a guest in eternity – and those loving voices, calling for me, from where is it coming? I can see nothing, only the glistening light, comforting. Who is calling me?
I see nothing; man alive, I am nothing any more. I can’t see myself. I am eternity, in the eternity. Oh, how is that, but I don’t see with my eyes, still I see everything. And I am not listening with my ears, yet I hear everything.
Yes, the love, how powerful it is, how immense, infinite and wonderful. Everything is love and splendor; why doesn’t the human being understand this?... The calling comes out of the light. Is it the call of eternity?
Oh how hard it is … to not think that I am only a guest in eternity, that I am only a human being. How painful it is, this being a human. I do no more want to be. I want to remain here as eternity inside of eternity … this deep. Yes, I want to stay here. Never again do I want to return. Here is the existence, the real existence … How can I feel strange having to return to the material world? I belong here … Pain, why are you shaking me? What is it?
Semjase shakes Meier back into material awareness, now that the long jump is over. She tells him that he and they have all been inside the timelessness, and that they all indeed would like to stay there. But she says that “we are not ready to stay, because we have to absolve the way of evolution step-by-step”.
Grey Extraterrestrial Spirituality:
A book entitled “Alien Interview” was published by Lawrence Spencer in 2008. This book describes the contents of a file of documents that Spencer received, unsolicited, in the mail in 2007. These documents were labeled Top Secret and were the notes made by a Matilda O’Donnell MacElroy who, in the cover letter that accompanied them, said that she was an Army nurse who had conducted a series of interviews with a living extraterrestrial survivor of the Roswell UFO crash on July 7, 1947. This survivor said that her name was Airl and seemed to project to Matilda that she had a female gender.
Matilda told Spencer that she was now in her 80s and wanted to make this classified information public before she died. Matilda O’Donnell MacElroy is currently deceased. In the Disclaimer at the beginning of his book, Spencer makes it clear that he cannot verify the authenticity of the documents that he received from Matilda. In fact, he never met her personally and only spoke to her once over the phone. The documents were posted from the location of Navan, Ireland where Matilda said she was presently living. They consisted of handwritten notes, as well as typed notes on a manual typewriter. Here is what Matilda wrote to Spencer in her letter to him:
As you know in July, 1947, the Roswell Army Air Field (RAAF)issued a press release stating that personnel from the field's 509th Bomb Group had recovered a crashed “flying disc" from a ranch near Roswell, New Mexico, sparking intense media interest. Later the same day, the Commanding General of the Eighth Air Force stated that Major Jesse Marcel, who was involved with the original recovery of the debris, had recovered only the tattered remnants of a weather balloon. The true facts of the incident have been suppressed by the United States government since then.
You may not know that I was enlisted in the U.S. Women's Army Air Force(WAC)Medical Corp which was a part of the US Army back then. I was assigned to the 509th Bomb Group as a Flight Nurse at the time of the incident. When the news that there had been a crash was received at the base, I was asked to accompany Mr. Cavitt, the Counter Intelligence Officer, to the crash site as the driver of his vehicle, and to render any needed emergency medical assistance to any survivors, if necessary. Therefore, I briefly witnessed the wreckage of an alien space craft, as well as the remains of the several alien personnel aboard the craft who were already dead.
When we arrived, I learned that one of the personnel on board the craft had survived the crash, and was conscious, and apparently uninjured. The conscious alien was similar in appearance, but not the same as, the others. None of the other personnel present could communicate with the survivor, as the being did not communicate verbally or by any recognizable signs. However, while I examined the "patient" for injuries I immediately detected and understood that the alien being was attempting to communicate with me by "mental images", or "telepathic thought", which projected directly from the mind of the being. I immediately reported this phenomenon to Mr. Cavitt.
As no other person present could perceive these thoughts, and the alien seemed able and willing to communicate with me, it was decided, after a brief consultation with a senior officer, that I would accompany the surviving alien back to the base. This was partly due to the fact that I was a nurse, and could attend to the physical needs of the alien, as well as serve as a non-threatening communicator and companion.
After all, I was the only woman at the site and the only one who was not armed. I was thereafter assigned permanently to serve as a "companion" of the alien at all times. My duty was to communicate with and interview the alien and to make a complete report of all that I discovered to command authorities. Subsequently, I was supplied with specific lists of questions provided to me by military and non-military personnel, which I was to "interpret" for the alien, and record the responses to the questions provided. I also accompanied the alien at all times during medical testing and the many other examinations to which the alien was subjected by staff from numerous government agencies.
I was given a promotion in rank to Senior Master Sergeant to improve my security rating, and to increase my pay grade from $54.00 a month to $138.00 a month, for this very unusual assignment. I performed these duties from July 7th through August,1947, at which time the alien "died" or departed the "body", as you will read about in my notes.
Our communication did not consist of "spoken language", in the conventional sense. Indeed, the "body" of the alien had no "mouth" through which to speak. Our communication was by telepathy. At first, I could not understand Airl very clearly. I could perceive images, emotions and impressions, but it was difficult for me to express these verbally. Once Airl learned the English language, she was able to focus her thoughts more precisely using symbols and meanings of words I could understand. Learning the English language was done as a favor to me. It was more for my own benefit than hers.
Matilda described Airl as being a humanoid in appearance, about 40 inches tall, and said that she looked somewhat like a "doll". In stature and appearance, the body was quite short and petite. The head was disproportionately large, relative to the arms, legs and torso, which were quite thin. There were three fingers on each of the two hands and feet, and the head had no operational nose or mouth or ears.
Airl told Matilda that she was not really the "container" body, but that she was a spiritual being residing within and animating the "container". Airl said that the "container" was neither mechanical (i.e. robotic) nor biological (i.e. living). So, it would seem that the "container" was an artificially-created android. This would suggest that Airl survived the crash because her android container was more physically robust that the biological containers of the other members of the crew.
Airl said that she was from a race and civilization called the Domain, and that she was an officer, pilot, and engineer serving in the Domain Expeditionary Force. She said that her craft and crew were on Earth to "protect the property of the Domain", particularly as the Earth's ecosystem might be significantly damaged by the use of nuclear weapons.
Matilda taught Airl English, so that they might more easily communicate telepathically. Once this was done, Airl had quite a bit to say. I will only relate here what she told Matilda about her concepts of spirituality and the non-physical.
Airl said that all sentient beings throughout the universe are actually immortal spiritual beings, who she termed "IS-BE"s. She said that this descriptive term was used because the primary nature of an immortal being is that they live in a timeless state of "is", and the reason for their existence is that they decide to "be". Every sentient human living on Planet Earth is also an IS-BE.
This fact was vividly demonstrated to Matilda when Airl induced Matilda to have an out-of-body experience, where Matilda could directly experience that her consciousness was independent of her physical body. Airl seemed to indicate that the collection of all the IS-BEs that exist are part of an overarching Godhead. Each IS-BE is both a little bit of God and the entirety of God, simultaneously.
Here are further descriptions of IS-BEs that were told to Matilda by Airl:
Airl explained that IS-BEs have been around since before the beginning of the universe. The reason they are called "immortal", is because a "spirit" is not born and cannot die, but exists in a personally postulated perception of "is - will be". She was careful to explain that every spirit is not the same. Each is completely unique in identity, power, awareness and ability. The difference between an IS-BE like Airl and most of the IS-BEs inhabiting bodies on Earth, is that Airl can enter and depart from her "doll" at will.
Airl can also remember her "identity", so to speak, all the way back into the dim mists of time, for trillions of years! She says that the existing collection of suns in this immediate vicinity of the universe have been burning for the last 200 trillion years. The age of the physical universe is nearly infinitely old, but probably at least four quadrillion years since its earliest beginnings.
The physical universe itself is formed from the convergence and amalgamation of many other individual universes, each one of which were created by an IS-BE or group of IS-BEs. Originally, the interaction of IS-BE illusions or inventions created the very fabric of the physical universe -- the microcosm and the macrocosm. Every single particle of the universe has been imagined and brought into existence by an IS-BE. Everything created from an idea -- a thought with no weight or size or location in space.
The essence of creation and existence cannot be found through the lens of a microscope or telescope or by any other measurement of the physical universe. One cannot comprehend the perfume of a flower or the pain felt by an abandoned lover with meters and calipers. Everything you will ever know about the creative force and ability of a god can be found within you -- an Immortal Spiritual Being.
Immortal Spiritual Beings, which I refer to as "IS-BEs", for the sake of convenience, are the source and creators of illusions. Each one, individually and collectively, in their original, unfettered state of being, are an eternal, all-powerful, all-knowing entity. IS-BEs create space by imagining a location. The intervening distance between themselves and the imagined location is what we call space. An IS-BE can perceive the space and objects created by other IS-BEs.
IS-BEs are not physical universe entities. They are a source of energy and illusion. IS-BEs are not located in space or time, but can create space, place particles in space, create energy, and shape particles into various forms, cause the motion of forms, and animate forms. Any form that is animated by an IS-BE is called life. An IS-BE can decide to agree that they are located in space or time, and that they, themselves, are an object, or any other manner of illusion created by themselves or another or other IS-BEs. The entire back time track of IS-BEs is immeasurable, nearly infinite in terms of physical universe time. There is no measurable "beginning" or "end" for an IS-BE. They simply exist in an everlasting now.
An IS-BE can decide to agree that they are located in space or time, and that they, themselves, are an object, or any other manner of illusion created by themselves or another or other IS-BEs. The disadvantage of creating an illusion is that an illusion must be continually created. If not continually created, it disappears. Continual creation of an illusion requires incessant attention to every detail of the illusion in order to sustain it.
A common denominator of IS-BEs seems to be the desire to avoid boredom. A spirit only, without interaction with other IS-BEs, and the unpredictable motion, drama, and unanticipated intentions and illusions being created by other IS-BEs, is easily bored. What if you could imagine anything, perceive everything, and cause anything to happen, at will? What if you couldn't do anything else? What if you always knew the outcome of every game and the answer to every question? Would you get bored?
The entire back time track of IS-BEs is immeasurable, nearly infinite in terms of physical universe time. There is no measurable "beginning" or "end" for an IS-BE. They simply exist in an everlasting now. Another common denominator of IS-BEs is that admiration of one's own illusions by others is very desirable. If the desired admiration is not forthcoming, the IS-BE will keep creating the illusion in an attempt to get admiration.
One could say that the entire physical universe is made of unadmired illusions. The origins of this universe began with the creation of individual, illusionary spaces. These were the "home" of the IS-BE. Sometimes a universe is a collaborative creation of illusions by two or more IS-BEs. A proliferation of IS-BEs, and the universes they create, sometimes collide or become commingled or merge to an extent that many IS-BEs shared in the co-creation of a universe. IS-BEs diminish their ability in order to have a game to play. IS-BEs think that any game is better than no game. They will endure pain, suffering, stupidity, privation, and all manner of unnecessary and undesirable conditions, just to play a game. Pretending that one does not know all, see all and cause all, is a way to create the conditions necessary for playing a game: unknowns, freedoms, barriers and/or opponents and goals. Ultimately, playing a game solves the problem of boredom.
In this fashion, all of the space, galaxies, suns, planets, and physical phenomena of this universe, including life forms, places, and events have been created by IS-BEs and sustained by mutual agreement that these things exist. There are as many universes as there are IS-BEs to imagine, build and perceive them, each existing concurrently within its own continuum. Each universe is created using its own unique set of rules, as imagined, altered, preserved or destroyed by one or more IS-BEs who created it. Time, energy, objects and space, as defined in terms of the physical universe, may or may not exist in other universes. The Domain exists in such a universe, as well as in the physical universe. One of the rules of the physical universe is that energy can be created, but not destroyed. So, the universe will keep expanding as long as IS-BEs keep adding more new energy into it. It is nearly infinite.
Every IS-BE is basically good. Therefore, an IS-BE does not enjoy doing things to other IS-BEs which they themselves do not want to experience. For an IS-BE there is no inherent standard for what is good or bad, right or wrong, ugly or beautiful. These ideas are all based on the opinion of each individual IS-BE. The closest concept that human beings have to describe an IS-BE is as a god: all-knowing, all-powerful, infinite.
So, how does a god stop being a god? They pretend NOT to know. How can you play a game of "hide and seek" if you always know where the other person is hiding? You pretend NOT to know where the other players are hiding, so you can go off to "seek" them. This is how games are created. You have forgotten that you are just "pretending". In so doing, IS-BEs become entrapped and enslaved inside a maze of their own devising.
How does one create a cage, lock one's own self inside the cage, throw away the key, and forget there is a key or a cage, and forget there is an "inside" or "outside", and even forget there is a self? Create the illusion that there is no illusion: the entire universe is real, and that no other universe exists or can be created. On Earth, the propaganda taught and agreed upon is that the gods are responsible, and that human beings are not responsible. You are taught that only a god can create universes. So, the responsibility for every action is assigned to another IS-BE or god. Never oneself. No human being ever assumes personal responsibility for the fact that they, themselves -- individually and collectively -- are gods. This fact alone is the source of entrapment for every IS-BE.
Airl said that all sentient beings in both the physical and non-physical universes are in essence immortal spiritual beings termed IS-BEs. Every immortal IS-BE is individualized from all the other IS-BEs. No two IS-BEs are alike. The home of all IS-BEs exists in the non-physical, outside of physical time and space. Airl said that all IS-BEs exist within an overarching Godhead. However, she gave no indication as to whether or not there was a hierarchical structure of IS-BEs based upon their level of spiritual growth. The IS-BEs are both individualized entities as well as the total of All That Is, simultaneously.
The primary occupation of IS-BEs is the creation of illusionary realities such as physical reality. Collections of IS-BEs created our current illusionary physical universe, and can operate both within it and outside of it. There are myriads of both physical and non-physical realities that the vast number of IS-BEs create. The IS-BEs create because it pleases them to do so. IS-BEs are gods with a small “g”, but their sum total is contained within God with a large “G”.
According to Matilda, when Airl was attacked by government officials who wanted to experiment on her android body, her spiritual IS-BE essence chose to leave the android “container”, rendering the “container” effectively “dead”, and returned to its non-physical level of existence.
An Australian woman by the name of Judy Carroll has written a quite intriguing book entitled “Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth”, where she describes the spiritual beliefs of Grey extraterrestrials. In the book, she claims first-hand information about this topic since she says that she is the human reincarnation of a deceased Grey extraterrestrial being who died in the Roswell crash in 1940s. She indicates that she came to this realization at the age of 30 when she was visited in broad daylight by three Grey extraterrestrials, and during this contact she had the strong impression that she was meeting with “family”.
Carroll considers her soul to be composed of both human and Grey aspects. She describes herself as “human by day and Grey by night”. She says that at night her soul leaves her sleeping human body and travels to a Grey spacecraft where it enters into the physical body of an android “container”. In this android form, she performs a variety of work operations on the Grey craft. Then when these tasks are completed, her soul returns to her human body.
I know that Judy Carroll’s account may seem hard to believe. It was hard for me to believe initially, and there is no concrete scientific verification of what Judy writes in her book. However, I have had many direct discussions with her about the content of her book, and based on these interactions I believe that she is a well-grounded, intelligent, logical, and sincere person who firmly believes what she has written. Furthermore, my spiritual intuition resonates with the concepts she has put forth.
Here is her account of her situation:
I’ve had life-long contact with off-planet beings. In 1983, when I was 30, I had a conscious daytime encounter with beings whom people loosely call Greys. During this meeting I recognized them as “family,” and came to consciously understand that, like so many of us who have prepared for this mission, I have operated through a “dual” soul for several lifetimes. I carried this consciousness through the portal of “death” from the time that my Zeta soul container was made unusable after the crash of our ship in the 1940s. All of our crew chose to reincarnate on Earth in the 1950s.
In very simple terms, the original soul essence, what we all are at the core of our being, is comprised of pure source energy beyond racial, planetary or galactic identity. This soul essence is totally integrated in Oneness, omnipresent and omniscient. When the time comes for a soul essence to reincarnate into another life, it begins to attract energy frequencies to itself from the collective consciousness of whatever planetary culture it will be incarnating into. This choice is made with assistance from other souls such as spirit guides, teachers and other members of the soul family. One’s soul family may be likened to a molecule comprised of atoms which resonate in close synchronization with each other.
Since everything is energy, the frequencies required for life build up around the pure soul essence like the layers of an onion. In this way, the soul essence begins to individualize. It will be in synchronization with a particular planetary collective consciousness, a species consciousness on that planet, the racial identity and group mind-set that was chosen for the coming life.
Ones like myself, whose chosen mission is to be a “bridge” between various planetary groups, synchronize energetically with two rather than the usual one single planetary collective consciousness. This is necessary so that we can understand, connect with and help to integrate both groups. It also enables us to live a double life, in my case as an “Earth-human by day and a Zeta by night.”
Judy Carroll states that the Zeta-Grey viewpoint about God is that “God is not a physical being, but rather an omnipresent and omniscient Energy/Consciousness referred to by higher ET and interdimensional cultures as Source, Oneness or The Forever”.
She indicates that there are many different forms of extraterrestrials in the Universe, but that all these lifeforms are part of a Oneness within Source. The consciousness of all humans and extraterrestrials is derived from the Source. Our consciousness is the spirit contained within the physical body that we may have. Carroll refers to the physical body as a “container” for the immortal spirit which each being possesses. The spirit is the true reality and everything is really energy. Grey extraterrestrials believe that the Source energy permeates everything in the physical Universe, from the largest galaxy to the smallest sub-atomic particle.
Carroll says that there are a number of different types of extraterrestrials that have visited Earth, but the primary ones are the Greys from Zeta Reticuli, the Nordics from the Pleaides, and the Reptilians from Draco. She says that there is a basic humanoid form for extraterrestrials, which has a head with two arms and two legs connected to a central truck. However, all of these physical forms are essentially “containers”. She indicates that the Grey form is basically related to an insectoid-type physical stock.
Judy Carroll declares that all beings throughout the Universe are eternal spiritual entities that are differentiated little bits of the overarching Universal Consciousness that is the Source. She says that your true essence is your spiritual essence, and that this is true for human beings as well as Grey beings, and all other extraterrestrial beings.
When you are born, your spiritual essence takes up residence in the physical body “container”. At death, the physical body “container” dies, but the spiritual essence continues to exist at a higher vibrational level of existence than the three-dimensional physical realm. The purpose of living a three-dimensional life is to experience things in the third dimension, and learn from these experiences for the spiritual development of the soul, the spiritual essence. All spiritual beings, whether Earth human or extraterrestrial are all part of the Oneness of Universal Consciousness.
Judy indicates that the Greys have biological containers, but they also employ android containers in their operations. These androids are essentially functioning physical body forms that have been imbued with a Grey soul. They also have clones that are derived asexually from Grey donors. However, these clones have souls that are distinctly different from the soul of the donor.
Carroll speaks of the “Ladder” of human evolution, where human refers to both Earth humans and extraterrestrial humans. Here is how she describes it:
The Human Ladder is a path of evolution followed by all members of the human kingdom upwards through 10 levels of expanding conscious awareness from “animal human” to “cosmic human.” This journey actually begins even further back, at the mineral kingdom level, proceeds through the vegetable and animal kingdoms, and on to human and beyond.
The Human Ladder as depicted by Judy Carroll is given below (from her book “Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth”):
The Human Ladder
Basically, the rungs of this Ladder represent different frequencies of conscious awareness. The first three rungs all still involve three-dimensional reality, while rungs 4 and above are all non-physical and multi-dimensional. As one ascends this Ladder, the extent of conscious awareness increases towards the highest level of Oneness and Universal Consciousness awareness.
The first rung of the Ladder represents the conscious mind of physically-oriented three-dimensional Earth humans, as well as physically-oriented extraterrestrials. Essentially, it represents those whose vibrational frequencies are only attuned to the three-dimensional physical realm. One might say that Level 1 humans have the belief that the only reality is that of the physical reality, basically the materialist mentality.
Level 2 involves humans who have achieved a level of consciousness of about 20%, which allows them to know that they are in essence spiritual beings whose true existence is in non-physical realms. This means they have increased their level of vibrational frequency, so that they can leave their body at will and consciously. In other words, they can induce out-of-body experiences. Such people can also control some of their body functions at will, such as body temperature and respiration levels.
At Level 3, the human focus is on mind and spirit rather than bodily physicality. The body form may change into a simpler version. Also, the viewpoint here is that the physical body is merely a “container” for the mind and soul. The human spends more time out-of-body than in-body.
In Level 4, the human effectively ceases to exist in the physical but resides completely in the non-physical as an energy being of higher frequency. However, beings at this level and above, can lower their frequency to manifest on the physical level.
Level 4 and above is peopled by non-physical light beings, whose vibrational frequency and consciousness level progressively increases, until at Level 10, they attain Oneness with the Universal Consciousness. Carroll says that the Greys are currently in the Level 5-8 range, and serve as “Guardians” for human levels 1-3.
Level 9 is said to be peopled by “Angels”. These are beings who are at very high vibrational and consciousness levels, and can form a hierarchy of influence below the Oneness level. Angels can lower their vibrational levels even as low as Level 1, to interact with Level 1 humans. One might surmise that the great spiritual teachers such as Zoroaster, Krishna, Buddha, Jesus, and Muhammed might have been influenced in their teachings by Angelic entities.
Carroll says that in reality parts of our Higher Self exist in all the ten human levels simultaneously. However, our spiritual evolution requires that we work so that all of our Higher Self eventually unites in the Oneness at Level 10.
Physical death is just the demise of the functioning of the physical “container”. At this time the mind/soul continues to exist in the non-physical realm. Carroll indicates that there is a special level called the Astral Plane, which is where Level 1 humans reside during their times between physical incarnations.
Judy Carroll in her book “Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth” writes that there are 11 Universal Laws and 11 Spiritual Laws of the Cosmos. These are as follows:
The Universal Laws:
Free Will:
All "little bits" of Source that are sentient beings with the ability to make a choice have the freedom to choose between Love and Fear. Free will is the mechanism of spiritual growth.
Change:
Source, or The One just IS, but It needs to have experiences and reflections of Itself in order to know Itself, which is expressed in infinite ways. Each of us taking on some sort of form, or role, from the lower to the higher end of the scale, is an expression of The One, and by doing this, It can experience “Self”. Combine all the infinite possibilities, and you are left with infinite outcomes or expressions of what The One is. Out of this combination comes Omniscience and Oneness.
Movement and Balance:
If we don't have balance when we walk or do yoga, then we will fall down. Movement requires the controlling aspect of balance. This means that we must try and control our actions. It also refers to keeping our energy system in balance through some sort of spiritual practice.
Innocence, Truth and Family:
Little babies start out quite innocent, Love is their major modus operandi. But as they grow, they become less innocent and start to develop a combination of Love and Fear. For spiritual growth, we should strive for the innocence of unconditional love. We should strive for the Truth. The only ‘real’ reality/truth is the fact that, at our pure soul level, we are immortal spirits and an intrinsic aspect of Source/Oneness.
Symmetry:
Symmetry means Balance, which means keeping oneself in balance with Source Energy (as above, so below), which starts with keeping our own energy system in balance.
Life:
Life is Consciousness, and consciousness goes beyond what is perceived here on Earth as sentient life. Consciousness begins in the Mineral Kingdom, and is present in the Plant and Animal Kingdoms. All these things are composed of atoms and molecules, and so consciousness is present there too. DNA is life and it spans dimensions, so is way beyond just being physical. It is our soul blueprint.
Light, Sound and Vibration:
In the physical, Light is electromagnetic energy that we can detect with our sense of sight. However, with our scientific instruments, we can now see Light over a much wider frequency range. Our reality is that we are Beings of Light, that is our true nature.
Judgment:
After the death transition, there are no judgment other than our own self-judgment of our actions. We can open up to the more expanded conscious awareness of our Soul/Higher Self. From this perspective, we are more able to see/judge what we have learned from the past life, where imbalanced choices have been made, and what we need to experience in order to overcome those imbalances. From our Soul perspective, we are more able to see the bigger picture.
Nature:
There is physical Nature, but there is also non-physical Nature. We must appreciate both. As with everything, Nature is composed of multidimensional energy, and we ourselves are very much a part of Nature, both from a planetary and cosmic perspective.
Love:
Unconditional Love is an aspect of Source. For spiritual growth, we must strive to exhibit Love over Fear, and come to the understanding that Unconditional Love is high frequency energy, and fear is low frequency energy.
Perception:
In a physical lifetime, one is only able to directly perceive the physical world. However, by looking "Inward" during meditation, one can perceive some aspects of the non-physical world. As we evolve up through the Human Ladder, our perception deepens and expands, to enable us to access higher and higher energy frequencies, which is what evolution for humans is all about.
The Spiritual Laws:
Freedom of Man:
"Man" is all sentient beings, both humanoid and non-humanoid, both physical and non-physical, that have the freedom to choose between Love and Fear.
Growth of Man:
This is spiritual growth of the Soul Self up the Human Ladder towards Source. Here, growth refers to the right for every human being throughout the universe to evolve. At the top of the Ladder, our soul is absorbed into Oneness but nothing is lost. Our sense of individuality is retained, and this only adds to the omniscience aspect. Many people have a fear of losing their individuality, but in fact the higher up the Ladder we evolve, the more ‘self-realization’ we are able to access.
Strength, Health and Happiness:
In both the physical and the non-physical, one needs to promote strength, health and happiness. What is Happiness? One definition might be that happiness is the full satisfaction with the direction that one's existence is moving in. Happiness also operates through unconditional love, which is pure bliss, that leads to being consciously aware of our intrinsic connection to others.
Protection of Family:
One certainly is driven to try and protect his or her blood relative family. But our actual family is much, much greater than that. Our human Earth family is really all of the human beings on Earth as well as all of the lifeforms on the planet. Our extraterrestrial family is all of the sentient beings throughout the physical universe. And our non-physical family is all of the beings that inhabit the non-physical realms. We Are All One and We Are All Interconnected.
Equality:
Everyone is equal in the Eyes of Source, regardless of their level of spiritual advancement. We are all Children of Source. This applies on a universal level. No person or culture is ‘better’ or ‘worse.’ They are just different, and the differences should be celebrated.
Choice:
Using our free will, we have the ability to choose between Love and Fear. Spiritual growth involves making wise choices. This is the ‘Cosmic Key.’
Intuition:
Intuition is a non-logical way of Knowing. Intuition involves tapping into non-physical sources of information and truth.
Karma:
Karma is the process by which spiritual advancement occurs. Bad karma slows the advancement process, while good karma accelerates it. The Love you take is equal to the Love you make. It is all about Balance.
Protection of Man:
Protection of ‘man,’ meaning humankind, from themselves. We create our own reality through our thought patterns, so really, our protection would have to come from within.
Healing:
Healing involves treatment to resolve something that is not right, whether that something is physical or non-physical. Maladies with physical bodies require healing. Maladies with spiritual bodies also require healing.
Future Sight:
This is the realization that we really create our own future, based upon our choices.
These Laws apply across the entire universe, and reference to “Man” includes all humanoid-type people of all galactic cultures, not only Earth-human males. This does beg the question as to whether such laws also apply to non-humanoid-type galactic peoples. Presumably, “Man” also encompasses all sentient beings, regardless of their physical form. Carroll indicates that spirituality involves recognizing that the essence of Source is within your soul, and one should strive to express unconditional love for both Source as well as other living beings. In other words, the sum total of the Law is: Love Source and Love Others.
Reptilian Extraterrestrial Spirituality:
There is almost no information available that describes Reptilian views on spirituality. The only information I have been able to find is what is called the “Lacerta Files”. These Files discuss two encounters that a Swedish man, known only as Ole K., had with a female Reptilian being in Sweden in the Years 1999 and 2000. Unfortunately, I cannot speak to the authenticity of this Reptilian interaction, it is simply the only thing that we have to go on at the present time.
So with that qualification, here is Ole’s description of his first meeting with the Reptilian woman in 1999:
I certify that the following text is the absolute truth and no work of fiction. These are parts of a transcript of an interview I've made with a non-human and reptilian being in December 1999. This female being was already in contact with a friend of mine (whose name is given only with the abbreviation E.F. in the text) since some months. Let me declare, that I was all my life a sceptic about UFOs, aliens and other weird things and I thought that E.F. tells me just dreams or fictionous stories when he talked with me about his first contacts with the non-human being "Lacerta". I was still a sceptic when I met this being on December 16 last year (1999) in that small warm room in the remote house of my friend near to a town in the south of Sweden, despite the fact that I saw now with my own eyes that she was not human. She has told and shown me so many unbelievable things during that meeting that I can't deny the reality and the truth of her words any longer. This is not another of that wrong UFO papers which claim to tell the truth but tell in fact just fiction, I'm convinced that this transcript contains the only truth and therefore you should read it. I had talked with her for over 3 hours, so the following transcript shows you only shortened parts of the interview, because she asked me after the interview not to publish everything she had told me already now.
I certify furthermore, that various "paranormal" abilities of her species like telepathy and telekinesis (including the moving and dancing of my pencil on the table without touching and the flying of an apple around 40 centimetres over her hands) were shown to me during the 3 hours and 6 minutes of the meeting and I'm absolutely sure that these abilities were no tricks.
So Ole K. said that in 1999 he had a three hour conversation with a reptilian female. Here is some of that conversation, which is in a question and answer format:
Q: First of all, who are you and what are you? Are you an extraterrestrial species or can your origin be found on this planet?
A: As you could see with your own eyes, I´m not a human being like you and to be honest I´m no real mammal (despite my partly mammal-like body features, which are a result of evolution.) I´m a female reptile being, belonging to a very old reptilian race. We are the native terrans and we live on that planet since millions of years. We are native terrans. We had and have some colonies in the solar system, but we originate on this planet. It´s in fact our planet and not yours - it was never yours.
Q: Can you tell me your name?
A: Our language is very different from yours, but my name is - I will try to say it smoother by use of your human letters - something like "Sssshiaassshakkkasskkhhhshhh" with a very very strong pronounciation of the "sh" and "k" sounds. Please call me "Lacerta", this is the name I generally use when I´m among humans and talk with them.
Q: How old are you?
A: According to your human time scale I´m around 28 years old.
Q: What is your task? Do you have a "job" like us?
A: I´m a curious student of the social behaviour of your species. That´s why I´m here and talk to you, that´s why I have revealed my real nature to E.F. and now to you and that´s why I give you all that secret information and why I will try to answer all the questions on your many sheets of paper honestly.
Q: Can you describe yourself detailed?
A: Imagine the body of a normal human woman and you have at first a good imagination of my body. Like you, I have a head, two arms, two hands, two legs and two feet and the proportions of my body are like yours. As I´m female I have also two breasts (despite our reptile origin, we have started to give milk to our babies during the evolution process - this happened around 30 million years ago - because this is the best thing to keep the young alive. The external reproduction organs are for both sexes smaller than those of humans, but they are visible and they have the same function as yours. My skin is mainly of a green-beige colour - more pale green - and we have some patterns of brown irregular dots (each dot of the size of 1 - 2 centimetres) on our skin and in our face.
My eyes are a little bit larger then human eyes (for this reason, we can see better in the darkness) and usually dominated from the large black pupils, which are surrounded from a small bright-green iris (males have a dark-green iris). The pupil is slit and can change its size from a small black line to a wide-open egg-shaped oval, because our retina is very light sensitive and the pupil must compare this. We have external round ears but they are smaller and not so curved as yours, but we can hear better because our ears are more sensitive for sonic (we can also hear a wider range of sonic). There´s a muscle or "lid" over the ears which can completely close them (for example under water). Our nose is more pointed and there is a V-shaped curving between the nostrils, which enabled the ancestors to "see" temperature. We have lost most of this ability, but we can still feel temperature much better with this "organ". Our lips are shaped like yours (those of females a little bit larger than those of males) but of a pale brown colour and our teeth are very white and strong and a little bit longer and sharper than your soft mammal teeth. We have no different hair colours like you (but there is a tradition to colour the hairs in different ages) and the original colour is - like mine - a greenish brown. Our hairs are thicker and stronger than yours and they grow very slow. In addition, the head is the only part of our body where we have hairs.
Our body, arms and legs are similar in shape and size to yours, but the color is different (green-beige, like the face) and there are scale-like structures on the upper legs (over the knee) and upper arms (over the elbow). Our five fingers are a little bit longer and thinner then human fingers and our skin on the palm is plain, so we have no lines like you but again a combination of a scale-like skin structure and of the brown dots (both sexes have the dots on the palm) and we have no fingerprints like you. If you touch my skin, you will feel that it is smoother than your hairy skin. There are small sharp horns on the upside of both middle fingers. The fingernails are grey and generally longer then yours.
The following feature is very different from your body and part of our reptilian origin: if you touch the backside of my upper body you will feel a hard bony line through my clothing. This is not my spine but a very difficult shaped external plate-structure of skin and tissue following exactly our spine from the head to the hip. There is an extremely high number of nerves and large blood vessels in this structure and in the plates (which are around two or three centimetres long and very touch sensitive - this is the reason why we have always problems to sit in chairs with a back like this chair.) The main task of these small plates (beside a role in our sexuality) is simply the regulation of our body temperature and if we sit in natural or artificial sunlight, these plates become more bloodfilled and the vessels become wider and the sun is able to heat up our reptilioid blood (which circulates through the body and through the plates) for many degrees and that gives us a great pleasure. What else is different from your kind? Oh, we have no navel, because we were born in a different way to your mammal birth.
Unfortunately, Lacerta did not allow Ole to take her photograph. She said that she could disguise herself to appear to humans as a human woman if she wished to do so, through telepathic mental manipulation of the human observer. She indicated that her kind had been an evolutionary development from dinosaurian stock, and that the destruction of the dinosaurs 65 million years ago was not due to an asteroid strike, but rather a war between Nordic-type and reptilian-type extraterrestrials. The reptilians exploded some type of fusion device on the Earth, which wiped out the dinosaurs and much of the other plant and animal life. However, a small group of evolutionarily advanced reptilians survived, along with some small mammals.
Over millions of years after the war, this reptilian species continued to develop into highly intelligent beings. These reptilians live underground in deep, expansive caverns, where they have whole cities. These caverns are at depths of 2000-8000 meters. They have also developed spaceflight technologies and some of the UFOs reported by people are theirs. They very seldomly appear on the Earth surface and have very little contact with human beings. They consider themselves the species that actually “owns” the Earth, since they were there millions of years before mammalian humans developed from ape ancestors, something that she said was accelerated by another group of extraterrestrials who wanted to use the Earth humans as slave labor.
Lacerta had some interesting things to say about the nature of reality and the paranormal. The reality scenario she put forward is best described in her own words.
You have to be clear about some fundamental facts. The very first thing is that you must divide up the conception of the physical world because each existence consists of different layers; let’s say for simplicity’s sake that it consists of a material illusion and a sphere of influence. {TRANSLATOR’S NOTE: No legitimate translation exists for this word ‘Feldraum’; “Feld” means “field,” “Raum” means “space, room, expanse.” Therefore, I’m translating it as “sphere of influence.”} Certain physical conditions are associated only with the realm of the material {as in ‘concrete’}, while other and more complicated conditions are associated only with the sphere of influence of the material world. Your conception of the physical world is based upon a simple material illusion.
Is there a scientific substantiation for paranormal powers, as for example with your powers of thought?
Yes. In order to explain that, one has to acknowledge the physical reality of the sphere of influence {Feldraum}. I’ll try to do it…wait just a second…you are going to have to separate yourself mentally from the illusion that that which you see is the true nature of the universe. It is, at best, the surface of a side. Imagine for yourself that all the matter here —you, this table, this pencil, this technical device, this paper— does not really exist, but that it is rather only the result of a field oscillation and a concentration of energy. All matter that you see, every creature, every planet and star in this universe, has an “information-energy equivalent” in the sphere of influence which is located on a main field —the general level {of things}. Now, there is not only one level, but several. Last time, I had mentioned that highly-developed species which is capable of changing levels (which is something completely different from the simple bubble changing, for bubbles are a part of each and every level). Do you understand? Dimensions, as you call them, are a part of a solitary bubble, bubbles or universal foam are a part of a level, and levels are layers in the sphere of influence, while the sphere of influence, acting in the capacity of single physical size, is essentially unending; it is composed of innumerable information-energy layers and general levels.
Tangible matter on this side is mirrored in the sphere of influence {Feldraum} as a field with distinct layers. These layers contain information, as an example, about the simple structure of matter or the string frequency, but also there is stored information stemming from the development of matter. Are you familiar with the human concept of “morphogenetic fields?” One part of the layer could be designated as such. Now there is still another intermediary layer for which you unfortunately have no human concept, since the theory is not common in human thinking. Let’s call it a “para-layer,” for this layer is mainly responsible for everything which you call PSI and paranormal and which lies outside the boundaries of your primitive science. This para-layer lies between the layers of matter and the morphogenetic layers of a field in the sphere of influence. It can actively integrate with both. Your body, for example, is mirrored as a field in the sphere of influence {Feldraum}. That doesn’t mean that it does not also exist here as well —as flesh, blood, bones— in the form of matter strings or atoms, but not only that. Existence is always a duality. Some layers of the field contain simple information about the solid matter of your body and its frequency, while other layers {contain information about} your spirit, your consciousness or, speaking from a human-religious point of view, your soul. Awareness or consciousness in this case is a simple energy matrix, divided into different layers of your field in the sphere of influence —nothing more, nothing less. Genuine awareness can also exist here on the matter side, but only in the form of post-plasma {the fifth form of matter}. With the necessary physical knowledge and the corresponding technology, the consciousness/awareness matrix, or soul, can also be separated from its field of rest. It can, despite its removal, continue to exist in a self-sufficient manner for a certain amount of time. That has the strange occult name of “soul robbing.” But above all, we’re talking about science here, not about magic or dark forces.
Creatures with more powerful mental powers can have a direct influence on the para-layer by means of their consciousness/awareness fields. Now this layer is not limited only to the individual, but rather as a part of a general information layer —you could call it in a prosaic sense the community soul— that is connected with all animate and inanimate matter and all consciousness which exist on this main level. The biological cause for these abilities lies on the side of matter, by the way, in the pituitary gland, which always is in the position to generate the frequencies to actively control the sphere of influence {Feldraum}.
Everything that you call paranormal. As I said, this special layer lies in the sphere of influence {Feldraum} between the morphogenetic information layers and the matter layers and can interact with respect to both sides. That is to say, it can be interacted with solid matter as well as with mind or mental information, wherewith we can achieve everything that is generally designated as telekinesis and telepathy. The “connection absorption” with another consciousness/awareness is generally separate in the procedure from the simple influence of matter, since different consciousness/awareness fields work with different oscillations. A consciousness/awareness that sends or a consciousness/awareness that listens must first adapt itself to the other mind exactly, before any access is possible.
This explanation presumably sounds to you like —as you say— something esoteric or from the occult or magic. The reason for that is simply that you lack the basic understanding for seeing the background reasons. All paranormal phenomena have a purely scientific origination. None of this has anything to do with supernatural powers. We grow up with this kind of knowledge, we know how one makes use of these powers, and where they come from. We are acquainted with theory and practice. You are not. Therefore, you really don’t understand what happens in your world—you see only one side of existence, not the other (I mean here both that are physical). Everything paranormal is dualistic, and it exists in the space that matter inhabits as well as in the sphere of influence {Feldraum}. To be explained…it can only be explained by the acceptance of the latter, because the sphere of influence {Feldraum} is the basis.
Essentially, Lacerta said that everything in the physical universe was an illusionary part of a much larger “feldraum”. This “feldraum” was non-physical, and the physical material world existed within it, as an illusionary subset. She said that all of this was not mysticism, but rather science, based on a science which mammalian human beings on Earth presently had no knowledge of.
The translator of the Lacerta interaction translated “feldraum” as “field of influence”, but to my mind this may be off the mark. The German word “feld” means “field” and the German word “raum” means “space”. So I think the correct interpretation is “field space” or perhaps “space field”. I wonder if “feldraum” is essentially a non-physical field of consciousness. Lacerta seems to be saying that what we interpret as the physical reality is only an illusion, and that it essentially represents a subset of the consciousness field. She further indicates that there are various levels in the consciousness field. She says that “Some layers of the field contain simple information about the solid matter of your body and its frequency, while other layers {contain information about your spirit, your consciousness or, speaking from a human-religious point of view, your soul”. I get the impression that Lacerta may be saying that all things physical have their form established in the non-physical consciousness field.
Conclusions Regarding Extraterrestrial Spirituality:
What are we to conclude from our assessment of what is known about the aspects of spirituality for the Nordic, Grey, and Reptilian extraterrestrial species?
Nordics, Greys, and Reptilians all take a rather dim view of the current Earth religions. They essentially say that all Earth religions are incorrect. One abductee taken aboard an extraterrestrial craft asked the craft captain “what is the true religion?”, whereupon the captain responded to him “none of them”.
However, all of these extraterrestrial species appear to have a belief in an overarching, non-physical reality, and that our physical reality is derived from this non-physical reality. Terms like “Creation”, “Source”, and “Oneness” are used by the extraterrestrials (they consider the word God to be associated with too much Earth religious dogma).
The extraterrestrial view of reality appears to be both panentheistic and panpsychic. Everything is contained within an overarching non-physical reality, and this non-physical reality is All That Is. The physical reality is a subset of a much larger non-physical reality. Extraterrestrials clearly do not perceive All That Is as anything that can be conceived of in physical terms. Rather, All That Is seems to be viewed as an overarching Energy/Consciousness Field that is creating physical and non-physical entities and environments for Its own unknown purposes. All elements within this Field are associated with a Oneness. Everything, both physical and non-physical, is in essence part of this overarching Energy/Consciousness Field.
Extraterrestrials believe that there is a non-physical, spiritual reality that is the true essence of all extraterrestrial beings. The extraterrestrials often refer to the physical body as a “container” of the non-physical essence, the soul if you will. With the exception of the Urantia Book, there is a definite belief in some form of reincarnation into the physical by the non-physical soul. The soul evolves in its non-physical growth through these physical reincarnations, and eventually reaches a completely non-physical existence.
There appear to be many levels of existence in the non-physical. Some extraterrestrials refer to these levels as different dimensions. Others speak of “bubbles” of alternative levels. And some speak of a vast number of different universes.
The most extensive discussion of extraterrestrial spirituality is contained in the Urantia Book, but the Urantia Book gives no indication that it was written by physical extraterrestrials. Rather, the Book seems to have been compiled by non-physical extraterrestrial beings using a human channel, but it is not known if these beings were non-physical forms of Nordics, Greys, or Reptilians that have been visiting Earth in physical form. Basically, the extraterrestrial sources of the Urantia Book are not known in any Earth visitation context.
I find the transcendental experience that Billy Meier described during a long hyperspace jump in an extraterrestrial spacecraft to be most interesting. What Meier described was a condition of no-space and no-time that was higher dimensional and where he experienced a Oneness with the universe. His account suggests to me that extraterrestrials have the technological means to transition into higher, non-physical realms on a regular basis. Here on Earth such transcendental experiences can only be achieved through deep meditative states and out-of-body or near-death conditions. This clearly suggests that extraterrestrials are more evolved in a spiritual sense than present Earth humans.
Of the three types of extraterrestrial descriptions of spirituality concepts that have been explored in this book, the one I personally resonate with the most is the Grey spirituality that is described by Judy Carroll in her book “Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth”. The Grey concept of the physical body as merely a “container” for the non-physical soul is something that I agree with. The non-physical soul is your true essence, it is your “I”.
Greys conceive of God as a non-physical omnipresent and omniscient Energy/Consciousness that can be described as Source/Oneness. Everything both physical and non-physical is contained within Source/Oneness. Your soul is essentially a differentiated consciousness unit, a “little bit” of Source/Oneness, that has chosen to reside in a physical body for a lifetime, for the purpose of experiencing physical life for its spiritual development. Your soul reincarnates into many physical lives, which can be on Earth as well as other locations in the universe. After a sufficient number of physical reincarnations, the soul no longer reincarnates in the physical, but rather progresses up to higher and higher levels of spiritual existence, until it is completely reabsorbed into Source/Oneness. A central aspect of Source/Oneness is Unconditional Love and spiritual development of the soul involves the increasing expression of Unconditional Love.
All extraterrestrial beings within the universe are a part of Source/Oneness and, as such, all such beings, whether Nordics, Greys, Reptilians, or Earth humans, are interconnected. The reality is that we are all related.
Referenced Books:
“Message From the Pleiades: The Contact Notes of Eduard Billy Meier”, W.C. Stevens, Genesis III Publishing, Munds Park, Arizona, 1988.
“Other Planets”, Emanuel Swedenborg, originally published in Latin as De Telluribus in Mundo Nostro Solari, Quae Vocantur Planetae, et de Telluribus in Coelo Astrifero, deque Illarum Incolis, Tum de Spiritibus et Angelis Ibi: Ex Auditis et Visis, London, 1758.
“The Urantia Book”, Urantia Foundation, Chicago, Illinois, 1955.
“A History of the Urantia Papers”, Larry Mullins, Penumbra Press, Boulder, Colorado, c. 2000.
“Urantia: The Great Cult Mystery”, Martin Gardner, Prometheus Books, Amherst, New York, 1995.
“Alien Interview”, Lawrence Spencer, 2008.
“Extraterrestrial Presence on Earth”, Judy Carroll, Wild Flower Press, Columbus, North Carolina, 2018.
“The Lacerta Files”,
https://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/vida_alien/esp_vida_alien_52.htm